H 046 011711 02 M6Vet Operators Manual 1.0

M6Vet
Diagnostic Ultrasound System
Operator’s Manual
[Basic Volume]
Contents
Contents ............................................................................................................................... i
Intellectual Property Statement .......................................................................................................... I
Responsibility on the Manufacturer Party ......................................................................................... II
Warranty ........................................................................................................................................... III
Exemptions.................................................................................................................................. III
Customer Service Department .................................................................................................... IV
Important Information ........................................................................................................................ V
About This Manual ............................................................................................................................ V
Notation Conventions ........................................................................................................................ V
Operator’s Manuals .......................................................................................................................... VI
Manuals on Paper ............................................................................................................................ VI
Software Interfaces in this Manual ................................................................................................... VI
Conventions ..................................................................................................................................... VI
1 Safety Precautions.................................................................................................... 1-1

1.1 Safety Classification ............................................................................................................. 1-1
1.2 Meaning of Signal Words ..................................................................................................... 1-2
1.3 Meaning of Safety Symbols ................................................................................................. 1-2
1.4 Safety Precautions ............................................................................................................... 1-3
1.5 Latex Alert .......................................................................................................................... 1-10
1.6 Warning Labels .................................................................................................................. 1-11
2 System Overview ...................................................................................................... 2-1

2.1 Intended Use ........................................................................................................................ 2-1
2.2 Contraindication ................................................................................................................... 2-1
2.3 Product and Model Code ..................................................................................................... 2-1
2.4 Product Specifications .......................................................................................................... 2-2
2.4.1 Power supply ................................................................................................................ 2-2
2.4.2 Environmental Conditions ............................................................................................. 2-2
2.4.3 External Dimensions and Weight ................................................................................. 2-2
2.5 System Configuration ........................................................................................................... 2-2
2.5.1 Standard Configuration ................................................................................................. 2-2
2.5.2 Options ......................................................................................................................... 2-3
2.6 Introduction of Each Unit ...................................................................................................... 2-6
2.7 Mobile trolley ........................................................................................................................ 2-7
2.8 Extend Modules.................................................................................................................. 2-11
2.8.1 Probe Extend Module ................................................................................................. 2-11
2.8.2 I/O extend module ...................................................................................................... 2-12
i
2.8.3 V/A Extend Module ..................................................................................................... 2-13
2.8.4 ECG module ............................................................................................................... 2-14
2.9 Control Panel...................................................................................................................... 2-15
2.10 Symbols .............................................................................................................................. 2-18
3 System Preparation .................................................................................................. 3-1

3.1 Move/Posit the System ........................................................................................................ 3-1
3.2 Power Supply ....................................................................................................................... 3-1
3.2.1 Connecting the External Power Supply ........................................................................ 3-1
3.2.2 Powered by Batteries ................................................................................................... 3-2
3.3 Power ON /OFF.................................................................................................................... 3-2
3.3.1 Powering ON the System ............................................................................................. 3-2
3.3.2 Powering OFF the System ........................................................................................... 3-3
3.3.3 Standby ......................................................................................................................... 3-4
3.4 Connecting /Disconnecting a Probe ..................................................................................... 3-5
3.4.1 Connecting a Probe ...................................................................................................... 3-5
3.4.2 Disconnecting a Probe ................................................................................................. 3-5
3.5 Connecting the Footswitch ................................................................................................... 3-6
3.6 Connecting/ Removing a USB Memory Device ................................................................... 3-6
3.7 Graph /Text printer................................................................................................................ 3-7
3.8 Video Printer ......................................................................................................................... 3-8
3.9 Basic Screen and Operation ................................................................................................ 3-9
3.9.1 Basic Screen ................................................................................................................. 3-9
3.9.2 Basic Operations of Screens ...................................................................................... 3-14
4 Exam Preparation ..................................................................................................... 4-1

4.1 To Start an Exam .................................................................................................................. 4-1
4.2 Animal Information ............................................................................................................... 4-1
4.2.1 New Animal Information ................................................................................................ 4-2
4.2.2 Retrieve Animal Information ......................................................................................... 4-5
4.3 Select an Exam Mode and Probe. ....................................................................................... 4-6
4.3.1 Supported Exam Modes ............................................................................................... 4-6
4.3.2 Selecting Exam Modes and Probes ............................................................................. 4-6
4.4 Select the Imaging Mode ..................................................................................................... 4-7
4.5 Activate & Continue an Exam .............................................................................................. 4-7
4.5.1 Activate an Exam .......................................................................................................... 4-7
4.5.2 Continue an Exam ........................................................................................................ 4-7
4.6 Pause Exam and End Exam ................................................................................................ 4-7
4.6.1 Pause an Exam ............................................................................................................ 4-7
4.6.2 End an Exam ................................................................................................................ 4-8
4.7 Cancel an Exam ................................................................................................................... 4-8
ii
4.8 Anonymous Animal Exam .................................................................................................... 4-8
5 Image Optimization ................................................................................................... 5-1

5.1 Switching Between Imaging Modes ..................................................................................... 5-1
5.2 Image Adjustment................................................................................................................. 5-2
5.3 B Mode Image Optimization ................................................................................................. 5-4
5.3.1 B Mode Exam Protocol ................................................................................................. 5-4
5.3.2 B Mode Parameters ...................................................................................................... 5-4
5.3.3 B Mode Image Optimization ......................................................................................... 5-4
5.4 M Mode Image Optimization .............................................................................................. 5-11
5.4.1 M Mode Exam Protocol .............................................................................................. 5-11
5.4.2 M Mode Parameters ................................................................................................... 5-11
5.4.3 M Mode Image Optimization ....................................................................................... 5-12
5.5 Color Mode Image Optimization......................................................................................... 5-15
5.5.1 Color Mode Exam Protocol ......................................................................................... 5-15
5.5.2 Color Mode Image Optimization ................................................................................. 5-15
5.5.3 Color Mode Image Optimization ................................................................................. 5-16
5.6 Power Mode Image Optimization ....................................................................................... 5-21
5.6.1 Power Mode Exam Protocol ....................................................................................... 5-21
5.6.2 Power Mode Image Parameters ................................................................................. 5-21
5.6.3 Power Mode Image Optimization ............................................................................... 5-22
5.7 PW/CW Doppler Mode Optimization .................................................................................. 5-23
5.7.1 PW / CW Mode Exam Protocol .................................................................................. 5-23
5.7.2 PW/CW Mode Image Parameters .............................................................................. 5-23
5.7.3 PW/CW Doppler Mode Optimization .......................................................................... 5-24
5.8 Anatomical M Mode............................................................................................................ 5-30
5.8.1 Free Xros M Mode ...................................................................................................... 5-30
5.8.2 Free Xros CM (Curved Anatomical M Mode) ............................................................. 5-32
5.9 TDI ...................................................................................................................................... 5-33
5.9.1 TDI Exam Protocol...................................................................................................... 5-33
5.9.2 TDI Image Parameters ............................................................................................... 5-34
5.9.3 TDI Image Optimization .............................................................................................. 5-35
5.9.4 TDI Quantitative Analysis (QA) ................................................................................... 5-35
5.10 Color M Mode ..................................................................................................................... 5-39
5.10.1 Enter Color M Mode ................................................................................................... 5-39
5.10.2 Exit Color M Mode ...................................................................................................... 5-39
5.10.3 Image Parameters ...................................................................................................... 5-39
5.11 3D/4D ................................................................................................................................. 5-40
5.11.1 Note before Use.......................................................................................................... 5-40
5.11.2 Overview ..................................................................................................................... 5-41
iii
5.11.3 Smart 3D..................................................................................................................... 5-45
5.11.4 4D ............................................................................................................................... 5-55
5.11.5 Static 3D ..................................................................................................................... 5-57
5.12 iScape ................................................................................................................................ 5-59
5.12.1 Basic Procedures for iScape Imaging ........................................................................ 5-59
5.12.2 iScape Preset ............................................................................................................. 5-60
5.12.3 Image Acquisition........................................................................................................ 5-60
5.12.4 iScape Viewing ........................................................................................................... 5-61
5.12.5 Cine Review................................................................................................................ 5-62
5.12.6 Save Image................................................................................................................. 5-63
5.13 Stress Echo ........................................................................................................................ 5-64
5.13.1 About the Stress Echo Feature................................................................................... 5-64
5.13.2 Acquisition of Stress Echo Loops ............................................................................... 5-64
5.13.3 Navigation Toolbar ...................................................................................................... 5-66
5.13.4 Selecting Preferred Stress Echo Loops (Select Mode) .............................................. 5-67
5.13.5 Review Mode .............................................................................................................. 5-69
5.13.6 Wall Motion Scoring and Reports ............................................................................... 5-71
5.13.7 Maintenance and Protocol .......................................................................................... 5-73
5.13.8 Saving Stress Echo Data ............................................................................................ 5-77
5.13.9 Exiting the Stress Echo Feature ................................................................................. 5-77
5.13.10 Measurement .............................................................................................................. 5-77
5.14 Contrast Imaging ................................................................................................................ 5-78
5.14.1 Basic Procedures for Contrast Imaging ...................................................................... 5-78
5.14.2 Contrast Image Parameters ....................................................................................... 5-79
5.14.3 Measurement, Comments and Body Marks ............................................................... 5-80
5.15 Elastography ...................................................................................................................... 5-81
5.15.1 Basic Procedure for Elastography .............................................................................. 5-81
5.15.2 Pressure Hint Curve ................................................................................................... 5-81
5.15.3 Mass Measurement .................................................................................................... 5-82
5.15.4 Cine Review................................................................................................................ 5-82
5.16 Image Preset ...................................................................................................................... 5-83
5.16.1 Image Preset .............................................................................................................. 5-83
5.16.2 Soft Menu and Menu Preset ....................................................................................... 5-84
6 Display & Cine Review.............................................................................................. 6-1

6.1 Image Display....................................................................................................................... 6-1
6.1.1 Splitting Display ............................................................................................................ 6-1
6.1.2 Spot ............................................................................................................................... 6-1
6.1.3 Pan ............................................................................................................................... 6-1
6.1.4 iZoom (Full-screen Zooming) ....................................................................................... 6-2
iv
6.1.5 Freeze/ Unfreeze the Image ......................................................................................... 6-2
6.2 Cine Review ......................................................................................................................... 6-3
6.2.1 Entering/ Exiting Cine Review ...................................................................................... 6-4
6.2.2 Cine Review in 2D Mode .............................................................................................. 6-4
6.2.3 Cine Review in M or D Mode ........................................................................................ 6-5
6.2.4 Linked Cine Review ...................................................................................................... 6-5
6.2.5 Review Play .................................................................................................................. 6-6
6.3 Image Compare.................................................................................................................... 6-6
6.3.1 Cine Compare............................................................................................................... 6-6
6.3.2 Frame Compare............................................................................................................ 6-6
6.4 Cine Saving .......................................................................................................................... 6-7
6.5 Live Capture ......................................................................................................................... 6-7
6.6 Cine Memory ........................................................................................................................ 6-7
6.6.1 Cine Memory Setting .................................................................................................... 6-7
6.7 Cine Settings ........................................................................................................................ 6-8
7 ECG ............................................................................................................................ 7-1

7.1 ECG Operation Basic Procedures ....................................................................................... 7-2
7.2 ECG Setting ......................................................................................................................... 7-2
7.3 Parameter Description ......................................................................................................... 7-3
7.4 ECG Review ......................................................................................................................... 7-3
8 Measurement............................................................................................................. 8-1
8.1 Basic Operations .................................................................................................................. 8-1
8.2 General Measurements ........................................................................................................ 8-2
8.2.1 2D General Measurements .......................................................................................... 8-2
8.2.2 M General Measurements ............................................................................................ 8-3
8.2.3 Doppler General Measurements .................................................................................. 8-3
8.3 Application Measurement ..................................................................................................... 8-4
9 Comments and Body Marks ..................................................................................... 9-1

9.1 Comments (Annotations)...................................................................................................... 9-1
9.1.1 To Add Comments ........................................................................................................ 9-1
9.1.2 Comment Menu ............................................................................................................ 9-1
9.1.3 Adding Comments ........................................................................................................ 9-2
9.1.4 Moving Comments ........................................................................................................ 9-3
9.1.5 Modifying (Editing) Comments ..................................................................................... 9-4
9.1.6 Deleting Comments ...................................................................................................... 9-4
9.2 Body Marks .......................................................................................................................... 9-5
9.2.1 Soft Menu for Body Marks ............................................................................................ 9-5
9.2.2 Adding Body Marks ...................................................................................................... 9-5
v
9.2.3 Moving Body Marks ...................................................................................................... 9-6
9.2.4 Deleting Body Marks .................................................................................................... 9-6
10 Animal Data Management ...................................................................................... 10-1

10.1 Animal Information Management ....................................................................................... 10-1
10.1.1 Enter Animal Information ............................................................................................ 10-1
10.1.2 Animal Information Setting ......................................................................................... 10-1
10.2 Image File Management .................................................................................................... 10-2
10.2.1 Memory Media ............................................................................................................ 10-2
10.2.2 Image File Formats ..................................................................................................... 10-2
10.2.3 Image Storage Preset ................................................................................................. 10-2
10.2.4 Saving Images to the System ..................................................................................... 10-3
10.2.5 Quickly Saving Images to USB Flash Drive ............................................................... 10-4
10.2.6 Quickly Saving Full Screen Image to the System ...................................................... 10-4
10.2.7 Thumbnails ................................................................................................................. 10-4
10.2.8 Image Review and Analysis ........................................................................................ 10-5
10.2.9 iVision ......................................................................................................................... 10-6
10.2.10 Sending Image File ..................................................................................................... 10-7
10.3 Report Management .......................................................................................................... 10-8
10.4 Animal Data Management (iStation) .................................................................................. 10-8
10.4.1 Viewing Animal Information ........................................................................................ 10-8
10.4.2 Searching a Animal ..................................................................................................... 10-9
10.4.3 Animal Data Management .......................................................................................... 10-9
10.4.4 Examinations ............................................................................................................ 10-10
10.5 Network Storage ............................................................................................................... 10-11
10.6 Print Job Management ..................................................................................................... 10-11
10.7 Backing Up and Erasing Files through DVD Drive ........................................................... 10-12
10.8 Animal Task Management ................................................................................................ 10-13
10.9 Administration................................................................................................................... 10-13
10.9.1 Access Setting .......................................................................................................... 10-13
10.9.2 Setting Access Control ............................................................................................. 10-14
10.9.3 System Login ............................................................................................................ 10-14
10.9.4 Add/ Delete a User ................................................................................................... 10-15
10.9.5 Modify Password ...................................................................................................... 10-15
11 DICOM...................................................................................................................... 11-1
11.1 DICOM Preset .................................................................................................................... 11-1
11.1.1 Local TCP/IP Setting .................................................................................................. 11-1
11.1.2 DICOM Local Setting .................................................................................................. 11-1
11.1.3 DICOM Server Setting ................................................................................................ 11-2
11.1.4 DICOM Service Setting .............................................................................................. 11-3
vi
11.2 Verify Connectivity .............................................................................................................. 11-9
11.3 DICOM Service ................................................................................................................ 11-10
11.3.1 DICOM Storage ........................................................................................................ 11-10
11.3.2 DICOM Print ..............................................................................................................11-11
11.3.3 DICOM Worklist ........................................................................................................ 11-12
11.3.4 MPPS ........................................................................................................................ 11-13
11.3.5 Storage Commitment ................................................................................................ 11-13
11.3.6 Query/ Retrieve......................................................................................................... 11-14
11.4 DICOM Media Storage ..................................................................................................... 11-14
11.5 Showcase Recording ....................................................................................................... 11-16
11.6 DICOM Task Management ............................................................................................... 11-16
12 Probes and Biopsy ................................................................................................. 12-1

12.1 Probe .................................................................................................................................. 12-1
12.1.1 Name and Function of Each Part of the Probe........................................................... 12-2
12.1.2 Orientation of the Ultrasound Image and the Probe Head ......................................... 12-3
12.1.3 Procedures for Operating ........................................................................................... 12-4
12.1.4 Wearing the Probe Sheath ......................................................................................... 12-7
12.1.5 Probes Cleaning and Disinfection .............................................................................. 12-8
12.1.6 Storage and Transportation ...................................................................................... 12-10
12.2 Biopsy Guide .................................................................................................................... 12-12
12.2.1 Basic Procedures for Biopsy Guiding ....................................................................... 12-14
12.2.2 Needle-guided Brackets ........................................................................................... 12-15
12.2.3 Biopsy Preset ............................................................................................................ 12-19
12.2.4 Needle-guided Bracket Inspection and Installation .................................................. 12-19
12.2.5 Biopsy Menu ............................................................................................................. 12-22
12.2.6 iNeedle ...................................................................................................................... 12-23
12.2.7 Verifying the Biopsy Guide Line ................................................................................ 12-24
12.2.8 Removing the Needle-guided Bracket ...................................................................... 12-25
12.2.9 Clean and Sterilize the Needle-guided Bracket ........................................................ 12-26
12.2.10 Storage and Transportation ...................................................................................... 12-27
12.2.11 Disposal .................................................................................................................... 12-27
12.3 Middle Line ....................................................................................................................... 12-28
13 Recording ................................................................................................................ 13-1

13.1 DVR .................................................................................................................................... 13-1
13.1.1 DVR Recording ........................................................................................................... 13-1
13.1.2 DVR Video Replay ...................................................................................................... 13-1
14 Setup........................................................................................................................ 14-1
14.1 System Preset .................................................................................................................... 14-1
vii
14.1.1 Region ........................................................................................................................ 14-2
14.1.2 General ....................................................................................................................... 14-2
14.1.3 Image Preset .............................................................................................................. 14-4
14.1.4 Meas ........................................................................................................................... 14-4
14.1.5 OB ............................................................................................................................... 14-4
14.1.6 Comment .................................................................................................................... 14-4
14.1.7 Key Config .................................................................................................................. 14-5
14.1.8 Biopsy ......................................................................................................................... 14-5
14.1.9 Option ......................................................................................................................... 14-6
14.1.10 Admin .......................................................................................................................... 14-6
14.2 Exam Preset ....................................................................................................................... 14-6
14.2.1 Exam Selection ........................................................................................................... 14-6
14.2.2 Exam Configuration .................................................................................................... 14-7
14.2.3 User-defined Exam Modes ......................................................................................... 14-7
14.3 Image Preset ...................................................................................................................... 14-7
14.4 Measure Preset .................................................................................................................. 14-8
14.5 Body Mark Preset ............................................................................................................... 14-8
14.5.1 Preset Body Mark for Exam Mode.............................................................................. 14-8
14.5.2 User-defined Body Marks ........................................................................................... 14-8
14.6 Comment Preset .............................................................................................................. 14-10
14.6.1 Custom Comments ................................................................................................... 14-10
14.7 Peripheral Preset.............................................................................................................. 14-11
14.8 Network Preset ................................................................................................................. 14-12
14.9 Manage Settings .............................................................................................................. 14-13
14.9.1 Exporting Setup Data................................................................................................ 14-13
14.9.2 Importing Setup Data ................................................................................................ 14-14
14.10 Maintenance ..................................................................................................................... 14-14
14.11 System Information .......................................................................................................... 14-14
15 Batteries .................................................................................................................. 15-1

15.1 Overview ............................................................................................................................ 15-1
15.2 Precautions ........................................................................................................................ 15-2
15.3 Installing and Removing the Batteries................................................................................ 15-2
15.4 Battery Status Indicator ...................................................................................................... 15-3
15.5 One Full Discharge /Charge Cycle..................................................................................... 15-3
15.6 Checking Battery Performance .......................................................................................... 15-4
15.7 Battery Disposal ................................................................................................................. 15-4
16 Acoustic Output ...................................................................................................... 16-1

16.1 Concerns with Bioeffects .................................................................................................... 16-1
16.2 Prudent Use Statement ...................................................................................................... 16-1
viii
16.3 ALARA Principle (As Low As Reasonably Achievable) ...................................................... 16-1
16.4 MI/TI Explanation ............................................................................................................... 16-2
16.4.1 Basic Knowledge of MI and TI .................................................................................... 16-2
16.4.2 MI/TI Display ............................................................................................................... 16-3
16.5 Acoustic Power Setting ...................................................................................................... 16-3
16.6 Acoustic Power Control ...................................................................................................... 16-4
16.7 Acoustic Output .................................................................................................................. 16-4
16.7.1 Derated Ultrasonic Output Parameters ...................................................................... 16-4
16.7.2 Limits of Acoustic Output ............................................................................................ 16-5
16.7.3 Differences between Actual and Displayed MI and TI ................................................ 16-5
16.8 Measurement Uncertainty .................................................................................................. 16-6
16.9 References for Acoustic Power and Safety ........................................................................ 16-6
17 EMC Guidance and Manufacturer’s Declaration ................................................... 17-1

18 System Maintenance .............................................................................................. 18-1
18.1 Daily Maintenance .............................................................................................................. 18-1
18.1.1 Cleaning the System .................................................................................................. 18-1
18.1.2 Checking the Probe .................................................................................................... 18-4
18.1.3 Checking the Power Cable and Plug .......................................................................... 18-4
18.1.4 Checking Appearance ................................................................................................ 18-4
18.1.5 Backup of the System Hard Drive .............................................................................. 18-5
18.2 Troubleshooting .................................................................................................................. 18-5
Appendix A Wireless LAN ........................................................................................A-1

Appendix B To Use the Lock ....................................................................................B-1
Appendix C Barcode Reader ....................................................................................C-1
Appendix D Electrical Safety Inspection .................................................................D-1
ix
©2019 Shenzhen Mindray Bio-Medical Electronics Co., Ltd. All Rights Reserved.
For this Operator’s Manual, the issue date is 2019-08.
The following label applies to U.S.A. only.
IMPORTANT!
The system is veterinary use only.
Intellectual Property Statement

SHENZHEN MINDRAY BIO-MEDICAL ELECTRONICS CO., LTD. (hereinafter called
Mindray) owns the intellectual property rights to this Mindray product and this manual.
This manual may refer to information protected by copyright or patents and does not
convey any license under the patent rights or copyright of Mindray, or of others.
Mindray intends to maintain the contents of this manual as confidential information.
Disclosure of the information in this manual in any manner whatsoever without the written
permission of Mindray is strictly forbidden.
Release, amendment, reproduction, distribution, rental, adaptation, translation or any

other derivative work of this manual in any manner whatsoever without the written
permission of Mindray is strictly forbidden.
, , , , , BeneView,
WATO, BeneHeart, are the trademarks, registered or otherwise, of Mindray in China
and other countries. All other trademarks that appear in this manual are used only for
informational or editorial purposes. They are the property of their respective owners.
I
Responsibility on the Manufacturer Party
Contents of this manual are subject to change without prior notice.
All information contained in this manual is believed to be correct. Mindray shall not be
liable for errors contained herein or for incidental or consequential damages in connection
with the furnishing, performance, or use of this manual.
Mindray is responsible for the effects on safety, reliability and performance of this product,
only if:
 all installation operations, expansions, changes, modifications and repairs of this
product are conducted by Mindray authorized personnel;
 the electrical installation of the relevant room complies with the applicable
national and local requirements; and
 the product is used in accordance with the instructions for use.
Note
This equipment must be operated by skilled/trained clinical professionals.
Warning
It is important for the hospital or organization that employs this equipment to carry out a
reasonable service/maintenance plan. Neglect of this may result in machine breakdown or
personal injury.
II
Warranty
THIS WARRANTY IS EXCLUSIVE AND IS IN LIEU OF ALL OTHER WARRANTIES,
EXPRESSED OR IMPLIED, INCLUDING WARRANTIES OF MERCHANTABILITY OR
FITNESS FOR ANY PARTICULAR PURPOSE.
Exemptions
Mindray's obligation or liability under this warranty does not include any transportation or
other charges or liability for direct, indirect or consequential damages or delay resulting
from the improper use or application of the product or the use of parts or accessories not
approved by Mindray or repairs by people other than Mindray authorized personnel.
This warranty shall not extend to:

 Malfunction or damage caused by improper use or man-made failure.
 Malfunction or damage caused by unstable or out-of-range power input.
 Malfunction or damage caused by force majeure such as fire and earthquake.
 Malfunction or damage caused by improper operation or repair by unqualified
or unauthorized service people.
 Malfunction of the instrument or part whose serial number is not legible
enough.
 Others not caused by instrument or part itself.
III
Customer Service Department
Manufacturer: Shenzhen Mindray Bio-Medical Electronics Co., Ltd.

Address: Mindray Building,Keji 12th Road South,High-tech industrial
park,Nanshan,Shenzhen 518057,P.R.China
Website: www.mindray.com
E-mail service@mindray.com
Address:
Tel: +86 755 81888998
Fax: +86 755 26582680
EC-Representative: Shanghai International Holding Corp. GmbH(Europe)

Address: Eiffestraβe 80, Hamburg 20537, Germany
Tel: 0049-40-2513175
Fax: 0049-40-255726
Mindray DS USA, Inc.
800 MacArthur Blvd.
Mahwah, NJ 07430-0619 USA
Tel: +1(201) 995-8000
Toll Free: +1 (800) 288-2121
Fax: +1 (800) 926-4275
IV
Important Information
1. It is the customer’s responsibility to maintain and manage the system after delivery.
2. The warranty does not cover the following items, even during the warranty period:
(1) Damage or loss due to misuse or abuse.
(2) Damage or loss caused by Acts of God such as fires, earthquakes, floods,
lightning, etc.
(3) Damage or loss caused by failure to meet the specified conditions for this system,
such as inadequate power supply, improper installation or environmental
conditions.
(4) Damage or loss due to use of the system outside the region where the system
was originally sold.
(5) Damage or loss involving the system purchased from a source other than
Mindray or its authorized agents.
3. This system shall not be used by persons other than fully qualified and certified
medical personnel.
4. Do not make changes or modifications to the software or hardware of this system.
5. In no event shall Mindray be liable for problems, damage, or loss caused by
relocation, modification, or repair performed by personnel other than those
designated by Mindray.
6. The purpose of this system is to provide physicians with data for clinical diagnosis. It
is the physician’s responsibility for diagnostic procedures. Mindray shall not be liable
for the results of diagnostic procedures.
7. Important data must be backed up on external memory media.
8. Mindray shall not be liable for loss of data stored in the memory of this system caused
by operator error or accidents.
9. This manual contains warnings regarding foreseeable potential dangers, but you shall
always be alert to dangers other than those indicated as well. Mindray shall not be
liable for damage or loss that results from negligence or from ignoring the precautions
and operating instructions described in this operator’s manual.
10. If the manager for this system is changed, be sure to hand over this operator’s
manual to the new manager.
About This Manual

This operator’s manual describes the operating procedures for this diagnostic ultrasound
system and the compatible probes. To ensure safe and correct operations, carefully read
and understand the manual before operating the system.
Notation Conventions
In this operator’s manual, the following words are used besides the safety precautions
(refer to "Safety Precautions"). Please read this operator’s manual before using the
system.
NOTE: Indicates information of interest to users of this system regarding exceptional
conditions or operating procedures.
V
The diagnostic ultrasound system is not intended for
CAUTION: ophthalmic use. Its use in this clinical specialty is
contraindicated.
United States federal law restricts this device to be sale by or
on the order of a physician.
Operator’s Manuals
Please read the operator’s manuals carefully before operating the system.
You may receive multi-language manuals in compact disc or paper. Please refer to
English manual for latest information and register information.
The content of the operator manual, such as screens, menus or descriptions, may be
different from what you see in your system. The content varies depending upon the
software version, options and configuration of the system.
Manuals on Paper
 Operator’s Manual [Basic Volume]: Describes the basic functions and operations
of the system, safety precautions, exam modes, imaging modes, preset,
maintenance and acoustic output, etc.
 Operator’s Manual [Advanced Volume]
 Operation Note: Contains quick guide for basic operations of the system.
Software Interfaces in this Manual

Depending on the software version, preset settings and optional configuration, the actual
interfaces may be different from those in this manual.
Conventions
In this manual, these conventions are used to describe the buttons on the control panel,
the items in menu, buttons in dialog box and some basic operations:
 <Buttons>: The angular bracket indicates buttons, knobs and other controls on
control panel.
 [Items in menu and buttons in dialog box]: The square bracket indicates items in
menu or the soft menu, or buttons in dialog box.
 Click [Items or Button]: Move the cursor to the item or button and press <Set>, or
click it on the soft menu.
 [Items in Menu][Items in Submenu]: Selects a submenu item following the path.
 [Dyn Rng (Value)]: Indicates menu items with parameter, (value) shows the
current value of the item.
VI
1 Safety Precautions
1.1 Safety Classification

 According to the type of protection against electric shock:
CLASS I EQUIPMENT
 According to the degree of protection against electric shock:
Type-BF applied part
 According to the degree of protection against harmful ingress of water:
The main unit belongs to IPX0, and the probes belong to IPX7
Footswitch: 971 SWNOM belongs to IP68
Footswitch: SP-997-350 (3-pedal) belongs to IPX8
 According to the degree of safety of application in the presence of a FLAMMABLE
ANESTHETIC MIXTURE WITH AIR or WITH OXYGEN OR NITROUS OXIDE:
EQUIPMENT not suitable for use in the presence of a FLAMMABLE ANESTHETIC
MIXTURE WITH AIR or WITH OXYGEN OR NITROUS OXIDE
 According to the mode of operation:
CONTINUOUS OPERATION
 According to the installation and use:
PORTABLE EQUIPMENT
MOBILE EQUIPMENT (when the system is installed on the mobile trolley)
Safety Precautions 1-1

1.2 Meaning of Signal Words
In this manual, the signal words" DANGER”, “ WARNING”,
“ CAUTION”, “NOTE” and "Tips" are used regarding safety and other important
instructions. The signal words and their meanings are defined as follows. Please
understand their meanings clearly before reading this manual.
Signal word Meaning
Indicates an imminently hazardous situation that, if not avoided, will
DANGER result in death or serious injury.
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation that, if not avoided, could
WARNING result in death or serious injury.
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation that, if not avoided, may
CAUTION result in minor or moderate injury.
Indicates a potentially hazardous situation that, if not avoided, may
NOTE
result in property damage.
Important information that helps you to operate the system more
Tips
effectively.
1.3 Meaning of Safety Symbols

Symbol Description
Type-BF applied part.
The ultrasound probes connected to this system are type-BF applied parts.
The ECG module connected to this system is Type-BF applied part.
Caution！
General warning sign.
Patient/user infection due to contaminated equipment. Be careful when

performing the cleaning, disinfection and sterilization.
Patient injury or tissue damage from ultrasound radiation. It is required to

practice ALARA when operating ultrasound system.
1-2 Safety Precautions

1.4 Safety Precautions
Please observe the following precautions to ensure patient and operator’s safety when
using this system.
DO NOT use flammable gasses, such as anesthetic gas or
DANGER: hydrogen, or flammable liquids such as ethanol, near this
system, because there is danger of explosion.
1. Do connect the adapter power plug of this system and

WARNING: power plugs of the peripherals to wall receptacles that
meet the ratings indicated on the rating nameplate.
Using a multifunctional receptacle may affect the
system protective grounding performance, and
cause the leakage current to exceed safety
requirements.
Use the cable provided with this system to connect the
printer. Other cables may result in electric shock.
You must use the power adapter provided with the
system; otherwise electric shock may result.
You can only adopt the power supply method provided
by Mindray, other power supply modes (e.g. using a
UPS) may result in electric shock.
2. Connect the protective grounding conductor before
turning ON the system. Disconnect the grounding cable
after turning OFF the system. Otherwise, electric shock
may result.
3. For the connection of power and grounding, follow the
appropriate procedures described in this operator’s
manual. Otherwise, there is risk of electric shock. DO
NOT connect the grounding cable to a gas pipe or
water pipe; otherwise, improper protective grounding
may result or a gas explosion may occur.
4. Before cleaning the system, disconnect the power cord
from the outlet. System failure and electric shock may
result.
5. This system is not water-proof designed. DO NOT use
this system in any place where water or any liquid
leakage may occur. If any water is sprayed on or into
the system, electric shock or device malfunction may
result. If water is accidentally sprayed on or into the
system, power off the system immediately and contact
Mindray Customer Service Department or sales
representative.

6. DO NOT use a probe that has a damaged, scratched
surface, or exposed wiring of any kind. Immediately
stop using the probe and contact Mindray Customer
Service Department or sales representative. There is
risk of electric shock if a damaged or scratched probe
is used.
7. DO NOT allow the patient to contact the live parts of the
ultrasound system or other devices, e.g. signal I/O
ports. Electric shock may occur.
8. Do not use an aftermarket probe other than those
specified by Mindray. The probes may damage the
system, causing a profound failure, e.g. a fire in the
worst case.
9. Do not subject the probes to knocks or drops. Use of a
defective probe may cause an electric shock.
10. Do not open the covers and front panel of the system.
Short circuit or electric shock may result when the
system hardware is exposed and powered on.
11. DO NOT use this system simultaneously with
equipment such as an electrosurgical unit,
high-frequency therapy equipment, or a defibrillator,
etc. Otherwise, there is a risk of electric shock to the
patient.
12. Only use the ECG leads provided with the ECG module;
otherwise electric shock may result.
13. When moving the system, you should first fold the LCD
display, disconnect the system from other devices
(including probes) and disconnect the system from the
power supply.
14. Accessory equipment connected to the analog and
digital interfaces must comply with the relevant IEC
standards (e.g., IEC 60950 information technology
equipment safety standard and IEC 60601-1 medical
equipment standard). Furthermore, all configurations
must comply with the standard IEC 60601-1-2. It is the
responsibility of the person, who connects additional
equipment to the signal input or output ports and
configures a medical system, to verify that the system
complies with the requirements of IEC 60601-1-2. If you
have any questions regarding these requirements,
consult your sales representative.
15. Prolonged and repeated use of keyboards may result in
hand or arm nerve disorders for some individuals.
Observe the local safety or health regulations
concerning the use of keyboards.
16 The operator SHOULD NOT touch SIP/SOP and the
patient at the same time.
17 If the battery cannot be automatically maintained in a
fully usable condition, please conduct periodic
checking of the battery.

18 The ultrasound system use a mains plug as isolation
means to the mains power supply. Please do not set the
ultrasound system in a place difficult to operate the
mains plug.
19 Do not modify this equipment without authorization of
the manufacture.
1. Precautions concerning clinical examination

CAUTION: techniques:
This system must be used only by qualified medical
professionals.
This operator’s manual does not describe clinical
examination techniques. The clinician should select the
proper examination techniques based on specialized
training and clinical experience.
2. Malfunctions due to radio wave:
 If a radio wave emitting device is used in the
proximity of this system, it may interfere with
operations. DO NOT use or take any devices
transmitting RF signals (such as cellular
phones, transceivers and radio controlled
products) in the room placing the system.
 If a person brings a device that generates radio
waves near the system, ask him / her to
immediately turn OFF the device.
3. Precautions concerning movement of the system:
 When you place the system on the mobile trolley
and move them together, you must secure all
objects on the mobile trolley to prevent them
from falling. Otherwise you should separate the
system from the mobile trolley and move them
individually.
When you have to move the system with the
mobile trolley upward or downward the stairs,
you must separate them first and then move
them individually.
 Object placed on the monitor may fall and injure
an individual when moving.
 Confirm that there is no peripheral device
connected to the system before moving the
system. Otherwise, peripheral device may fall
and injure an individual.
4. DO NOT expose the system to excessive vibration
through transportation. Mechanical damage may result.

5. Do not connect this system to outlets with the same
circuit breakers and fuses that control the current of
devices such as life-support systems. If this system
malfunctions and generates over current, or when there
is an instantaneous current at power ON, the circuit
breakers and fuses of the building’s supply circuit may
be tripped.
6. Always keep the system dry. Avoid transporting this
system quickly from a cold place to a warm place;
otherwise condensation or water droplets may form
allowing a short circuit and possible electric shock.
7. If the circuit protector is tripped, it indicates that the
system or a peripheral device was improperly shut down
and the system is unstable. You cannot repair the
system under this circumstance and must call the
representative.
8. There is no risk of high-temperature burns during
normal ultrasound examinations. It is possible for the
surface temperature of the probe to exceed the body
temperature of a patient due to environmental
temperature and exam mode combinations. Apply the
probe only for a period of time required for the purpose
of diagnosis.
9. The system and its accessories are not disinfected or
sterilized prior to delivery. The operator is responsible
for the cleaning and disinfection of probes and
sterilization of biopsy brackets according to the
manuals, prior to the use.
All items must be thoroughly processed to completely
remove harmful residual chemicals, which will not only
harmful to the human body, but also damage the
accessory.
10. It is necessary to press [End Exam] to end the current
scan that is in progress and clear the current Patient
Information field. Otherwise, new patient data may be
combined with the previous patient data.
11. DO NOT connect or disconnect the system’s power cord
or its accessories (e.g., a printer or a recorder) without
turning OFF the power first. This may damage the
system and its accessories or cause electric shock.
12. If the system is powered off improperly during
operation, it may result in data damage of the system’s
hard disk or system failure.
13. Do not use the system to examine a fetus for a long
period of time.
14. Do not use a USB memory device (e.g., a USB flash
drive, removable hard disk) which has unsafe data.
Otherwise, system damage may result.

15. It is recommended to only use the video devices
specified in this manual.
16. Do not use gel, disinfectant, probes, probe sheath or
needle-guided brackets that are not compatible with the
system.
17. Read the Acoustic Output Principle in the operation
manual carefully before operate this system on clinical
examination.
18. Please use the ultrasound gel compliant with the
relevant local regulations.
19 When using intra-cavity transducers, do not activate
the transducer outside the patient’s body.
NOTE: 1. DO NOT use the system in the vicinity of strong electromagnetic field (such
as a transformer), which may affect the performance of the system.
2. DO NOT use the system in the vicinity of high-frequency radiation source,
which may affect the performance of the system or even lead to failure.
3. To avoid damaging the system, DO NOT use it in following environment:
(1) Locations exposed to direct sunlight.
(2) Locations subject to sudden changes in environmental temperature.
(3) Dusty locations.
(4) Locations subject to vibration.
(5) Locations near heat generators.
(6) Locations with high humidity.
4. Turn ON the system only after the power has been turned OFF for a while.
If the system is turned ON immediately after being turned OFF, the system
may not be rebooted properly and could malfunction.
5. When using or placing the system, keep the system horizontal to avoid
imbalance.
6. Remove ultrasound gel from the face of a probe when the examination is
complete. Water in the gel may enter the acoustic lens and adversely affect
the performance and safety of the probe.
7. You should properly back up the system to a secure external storage
media, including system configuration, settings and patient data. Data
stored to the system’s hard drive may be lost due to system failure,
improper operation or accident.
8. Do not apply external force to the control panel; otherwise, the system may
be damaged.
9. If the system is used in a small room, the room temperature may rise.
Please provide proper ventilation and free air exchange.
10. To dispose of the system or any part, contact Mindray Customer Service
Department or sales representative. Mindray is not responsible for any
system content or accessories that have been discarded improperly.

11. Electrical and mechanical performance may be degraded due to long
usage (such as current leakage or distortion and abrasion); the image
sensitivity and precision may become worse too. To ensure optimal system
operations, it is recommended that you maintain the system under a
Mindray service agreement.
12. The iScape feature constructs a single extended image from a series of
individual image frames. The quality of the final image is user-dependent
and requires skill to efficiently apply the feature and technique. Exercise
caution when measurements are performed from an iScape image.
13. Ensure that the current exam date and time are the same as the system
date and time.
14. DO NOT turn OFF the power supply of the system during printing, file
storage or invoking other system operations. An interrupted process may
not be completed, and can become lost or corrupted.
15 Use detachable power supply cord as mains power breaking device. DO
NOT set equipment in place where difficult for disconnection of detachable
power supply cord！
Please read the following precautions carefully to ensure the safety of the patient and the
operator when using the probes.
The ultrasonic probe is only for use with the specified
WARNING: 1. ultrasonic diagnostic system. Please refer to the 2.5
System Configuration to select the proper probe.
Confirm that the probe and cable are normal before and
2. after each examination. A defective probe may cause
electric shock to the patient.
Do not subject the probe to shock. A defective probe may
3.
cause electric shock to the patient.
Do not disassemble the probe to avoid the possibility of
4.
electric shock.
Never immerse the probe connector into liquids such as
water or disinfectant because the connector is not
5.
waterproof. Immersion may cause electric shock or
malfunction.
A probe sheath must be installed over the probe before
6.
performing intra-cavity or intra-operative examination.
When using the probe, wear sterile gloves to prevent

CAUTION: 1.
infection.
Be sure to use sterile ultrasound gel. Please use the
ultrasound gel compliant with the relevant local
2.
regulations. And manage the ultrasound gel properly to
ensure that it does not become a source of infection.
In normal diagnostic ultrasound mode, there is no
danger of a normal-temperature burn; however, keeping
3.
the probe on the same region of the patient for a long
time may cause such a burn.

Do not use the carrying case for storing the probe. If the
4. carrying case is used for storage, it may become a
source of infection.
It is required to practice ALARA when operating
5. ultrasound system. Minimize the acoustic power without
compromising the quality of images.
The probe and accessories supplied with it are not
6. delivered disinfected or sterilized. Sterilization (or
high-level disinfect) before use is required.
Disposable components (for example the probe sheath,
the sterile gloves) are packaged sterile and are
single-use only. Do not use if integrity of packaging
7.
violated or if expiration date has passed. Please use the
disposable components compliant with the relevant
local regulations.
Please use the disinfection or sterilization solution that
recommended in this operator’s manual; otherwise
Mindray will not be liable for damage caused by other
8.
solutions. If you have any questions, please contact
representative.
The probe sheath contains natural rubber that can cause
9.
allergic reactions in some individuals.
Do not use pre-lubricated condoms as a sheath.
10. Lubricant may not be compatible with the transducer
material and damage may result.
Transducer damage may be caused by inappropriate gel,
detergent or cleanser:
Do not soak or saturate transducers with solutions
11. containing alcohol, bleach, ammonium chloride
compounds, acetone or formaldehyde.
Avoid contact with solutions or coupling gels containing
mineral oil or lanolin.
NOTE: 1. Read the following precautions to prevent the probe from malfunction:
 Clean and disinfect the probe before and after each examination.
 After the examination, wipe off the ultrasound gel thoroughly.
Otherwise, the ultrasound gel may solidify and the image quality
would be degraded.

2. Ambient conditions:
To prevent the probe from being damaged, do not use it where it will be
exposed to:
 Direct sunlight or X-rays
 Sudden changes in temperature
 Dust
 Excessive vibration
 Heat generators
Use the probes under the following ambient conditions:
 ambient temperature: 0℃～ 40℃
 relative humidity:30% ～ 85% (no condensation)
 atmospheric pressure:700 hPa ～ 1060 hPa.
Use the D7-2s probe under the following ambient conditions:
 ambient temperature: 10°C ～ 40°C
 relative humidity: 30% ～ 85% (no condensation)
 atmospheric pressure: 700 hPa ～ 1060 hPa
3. Repeated disinfection will eventually damage the probe, please check the
probe's performance periodically.
NOTE: 1. The following definition of the WEEE label applies to EU

member states only: The use of this symbol indicates that this
system should not be treated as household waste. By
ensuring that this system is disposed of correctly, you will help
prevent bringing potential negative consequences to the
environment and human health. For more detailed information
with regard to returning and recycling this system, please
consult the distributor from whom you purchased the system.
2. For system products, this label may be attached to the main unit only.
1.5 Latex Alert

When choosing a probe sheath, it is recommended that you directly contact CIVCO for
obtaining probe sheath, pricing information, samples and local distribution information.
Allergic reactions in latex (natural rubber) sensitive patients
WARNING: may range from mild skin reactions (irritation) to fatal
anaphylactic shock, and may include difficulty in breathing
(wheezing), dizziness, shock, swelling of the face, hives,
sneezing or itching of the eyes (FDA Medical Alert on latex
products, “Allergic Reactions to Latex-containing Medical
Devices”, issued on March 29, 1991).

1.6 Warning Labels
The warning labels are attached to this system in order to call your attention to potential
hazards. The symbol on the warning labels indicates safety precautions.

The warning labels use the same signal words as those used in the operator’s manual.
Read operator’s manual carefully before using the system.
The name, pattern and meaning of each warning label are described as follows:
No. Warning Labels Meaning
Read this information carefully before using

1
the system.
The following labels are available

when the system works with the
mobile trolley.
a. Do not place the system on a sloped
surface. Otherwise the system may slide,
resulting in personal injury or the system
a malfunction. Two persons are required to
2 move the system over a sloped surface.
b. Do not sit on the system.
c. DO NOT push the system when the
casters are locked.
b c

2 System Overview
2.1 Intended Use

The diagnostic ultrasound system is intended for use in abdomen, cardiac, small parts,
peripheral vascular, and reproduction exams for animals such as dog, cat, equine, bovine and
ovine, etc.
2.2 Contraindication
None.
2.3 Product and Model Code

M □
Model code;
Product code.
NOTE: The functions described in the operator’s manual may vary depending upon the
specific system you purchased.
System Overview 2-1

2.4 Product Specifications
2.4.1 Power supply

Voltage 100-240V～, 50/60Hz (AC adapter)
220-240V～, 50/60Hz (when configured with mobile trolley UMT-300)
Frequency 50/60Hz (AC adapter)
Input Power 1.5 – 0.6A (AC adapter)
600 VA (when configured with mobile trolley UMT-300)
Fuse 250V~ T3.15AL
NOTE: The CE region applied voltage is 220-240V～.
2.4.2 Environmental Conditions

Operating conditions Storage and transportation conditions
Ambient 0℃～40℃ -20℃～55℃
temperature
Relative 30%～85% (no condensation) 30%～95% (no condensation)
humidity
Atmospheric 700hPa～1060hPa 700hPa～1060hPa
pressure
Do not use this system in the conditions other than those

WARNING: specified.
2.4.3 External Dimensions and Weight

 External dimensions: 361mm(H)×357mm(L)×75mm(W)
 Net weight: 6.5Kg (including batteries and 4D board, no power adapter)
2.5 System Configuration
2.5.1 Standard Configuration

 Main unit
 Accessories
 Operator's manuals
 Ultrasound gel
 Power adapter and connecting cable
2-2 System Overview
 Battery Pack
 Multilingual controls overlay
2.5.2 Options
2.5.2.1 Probes and Needle-guided Brackets Available

Probe model
6C2s
D7-2s
P4-2s
P7-3s
7L4s
L14-6Ns
P7-3Ts
3C5s
2P2s
6CV1s
7L5s
C11-3s
L14-6s
6LE5Vs
Some of the probes have matched needle-guided brackets for biopsy, the available
probes and the corresponding needle-guided brackets are listed as follows:
Biopsy
Needle-guided Bracket Angle/Depth Applicable Biopsy
Probe Model
Model Needle
(±1°)
NGB-004
6CV1s / 16G, 17G, 18G
Metal/needle un-detachable
NGB-005 (metal/needle 13G, 15G, 16G, 18G,
6C2s 12.7°, 24.2°
un-detachable) 20G
Metal: 14G, 16G, 18G,
NGB-006
20G, 22G
3C5s Plastic/needle detachable; 25°, 35°, 45°
Plastic: 13G, 15G,
Metal/needle detachable
16G, 18G, 20G
Metal: 14G, 16G, 18G,
NGB-007
20G, 22G
7L4s/ L14-6Ns Plastic/needle detachable; 40°, 50°, 60°
Plastic: 13G, 15G,
Metal/needle detachable
16G, 18G, 20G
NGB-011 13G, 15G, 16G, 18G,
2P2s 11°, 23°
Metal/needle un-detachable 20G
NGB-016 14G, 16G, 18G, 20G,
L14-6s 30°, 40°, 50°
Metal/needle detachable 22G
System Overview 2-3

Biopsy
Needle-guided Bracket Angle/Depth Applicable Biopsy
Probe Model
Model Needle
(±1°)
NGB-018 14G, 16G, 18G, 20G,
C11-3s 15°, 25°, 35°
metal/needle detachable 22G
2.5.2.2 Options
No. Item
1. Pack
2. 4D module
3. CW module
4. Wireless adapter
5. Probe Extend Module: PEM-21
ECG module (including ECG Lead): ECG-21(only can be applied with I/O Extend
6.
Module configured)
7. I/O Extend Module
Mobile Trolley(configured with a notebook combination lock):
8. UMT-200, UMT-300
Options for UMT-300: power module, built-in DVD R/W drive, display module.
9. DVD R/W Drive
10. V/A Extend Module
11. Dust-proof cover
12. Footswitch (971-SWNOM/SP-997-350)
13. Barcode Reader
14. DICOM Basic module
DICOM Worklist module (only can be applied with the DICOM basic function module
15.
configured)
DICOM MPPS (only can be applied with the DICOM basic function module
16.
configured)
DICOM Query/Retrieve (only can be applied with the DICOM basic function module
17.
configured)
18. Abdomen General Package
19. Cardiology Package
20. Small Parts Package
21. Vascular Package
22. Reproductive Package
23. IMT module (Only can be applied with the Vascular Package configured)
24. Smart 3D module
25. iScape View
26. Free Xros M module
2-4 System Overview

No. Item
27. Free Xros CM module
TDI (Tissue Doppler imaging) module (Only can be applied with the Cardiology
28.
Package configured)
29. TDI Quantitative Analysis(Only can be applied with the TDI module configured)
30. Stress Echo (only can be applied when Cardiac Package configured)
31. Contrast Imaging
32. Strain Elastography
33. iClear module
34. iNeedle
2.5.2.3 Peripherals Supported

Item Model
Black /white video SONY UP-D897, SONY UP-X898MD, MITSUBISHI P95DW-N,
printer SONY UP-D898MD
Color video printer SONY UP-D25MD
SYMBOL LS2208(1-D)
Bar code reader
SYMBOL DS4308(2-D)
 Parts that can be used within patient environment:
 Main unit.
 Probes.
 Footswitch.
 Printers: SONY UP-D897, SONY UP-X898MD, MITSUBISHI P95DW-N, SONY
UP-D898MD.
This system complies with IEC60601-1-2:2014, and its RF

WARNING: emission meets the requirements of CISPR11 Class B. In a
domestic environment, the customer or the user should
guarantee to connect the system with Class B peripheral
devices; otherwise RF interference may result and the
customer or the user must take adequate measures
accordingly.
System Overview 2-5

2.6 Introduction of Each Unit
No. Name Function

1 Monitor Displays the images and parameters during scanning.
2 Control Panel Operator-system interface or control.
3 CW pencil probe port Connects the pencil probe to the main unit
4 Handle Used for carrying the system.
Connects a probe to the main unit; or connects a probe
5 Probe port extend module.
Locks or unlocks the probe connected with the main
unit.
6 Transducer locking lever

: locked symbol
: unlocked symbol
7 Connects the I/O extend module.

I/O extend port
Power input port
8 Connects the power adapter.
9 USB port Connects USB devices.

10 Network port Connects the network.
S-Video separate video
11 Connects DVR recorder or video printer.
output
2-6 System Overview

2.7 Mobile trolley
The system can be configured with 2 models of mobile trolley: UMT-200 and UMT-300.
Mobile Trolley is used for placing the ultrasound system, extend modules and etc.
UMT-200
System Overview 2-7

UMT-300
1. Be sure to connect the equipotential wire before

WARNING: inserting the power plug into the receptacle; be sure to
remove the power plug from the receptacle before
disconnecting the equipotential wire; otherwise electric
shock may result.
2. When you connect another device to the trolley, you
should use the equipotential wire to connect each of
equipotential terminals; otherwise electric shock may
result.
3. Connect the earth cable before powering ON. Disconnect
the earth cable after powering OFF. Otherwise, electric
shock may result.
4. DO NOT connect the trolley to the outlets with the same
circuit breakers and fuses that control the current to
devices such as life-support systems. If the trolley or the
system malfunctions and generates over-current, or
when there is an instantaneous current at power ON, the
circuit breakers and fuses of the building’s supply circuit
may be tripped.
5. If UMT-300 has configured with display module, please
take care of the display module position to leave enough
space below when adjusting the display support arm, so
that the display module will not hit into the monitor of the
ultrasound system.
1. When moving the trolley with mounted system, please

CAUTION: take care of the connector of the power adapter in case of
damage.
2. Maximum output power of the outlet in the trolley is
350VA.
NOTE 1. If UMT-300 has configured with display module, please take care of the
display module position in case of hurting one’s head.
2. If probe extend module is configured, please do not place any objects under
the module.
2-8 System Overview

No. Name Function
Displays the image and parameters during
1. Display module
scanning
2. Probe cable hook Probe cable hanger
3. Ultrasound system /
4. Probe holder Used for placing probes temporarily
5. Operating platform To place the ultrasound system
Adjustable telescopic column Raise the handle to adjust height of the
6.
switch platform
7. Built-in DVD RW drive DVD-RW drive
Compartment for placing ECG
8. /
module or B/W printer
Compartment for placing color
9. /
printer
10. Caster Used for securing or moving the system
System Overview 2-9

No. Name Function
Supports the display module, for adjusting
11. Display support arm the height and position of the display
module.
12. I/O extend module To extend I/O ports
13. Probe port To connect probe or probe extend module.
14. Adjustable telescopic column To adjust height of the operating platform
15. Probe extend module To extend ports for connecting probes
16. Power adapter /
Power supply input/output interface,
17. Power module equipotential terminal, breaker and power
indicator
 Power Panel
No. Name Function

1. Circuit breaker Switch on or off the mains power supply
2. Power inlet AC power inlet
Indicates if the trolley is connected to the mains power supply:
If connected with mains power and the breaker is on, the
3. Power indicator indicator illuminates in green color
If not connected with mains power or the breaker is off, the
indicator does not illuminate
4. Power outlet Supply power for optional peripheral devices (e.g. DVR)
Used for equipotential connection, to balance the protective
Equipotential
5 earth potentials between the system and other electrical
terminal
equipment
2-10 System Overview

2.8 Extend Modules
There are four extend modules available for the system:
 Probe extend module
 I/O extend module
 V/A extend module
 ECG module
2.8.1 Probe Extend Module

 Overview
 To connect the module:

a) Insert the module connector into the probe port with its bulge facing to the
right side of the system (when you are facing to the front of the system).
b) Toggle the lock lever to the top position.
You must turn off the ultrasound system before connecting or

CAUTION: disconnecting the probe extend module. Otherwise the
system may be damaged.
NOTE: 1. Before connecting/disconnecting the probe extend module, please freeze

the image first to keep the module in a good condition.
2. If you use the probe extend module to connect a probe, the image quality
may be degraded.
System Overview 2-11

2.8.2 I/O extend module
 Overview
No. Symbol Function

<1>, <2> USB port Connects USB devices.
<3> ECG Port Connects the ECG module
<4> Serial port Connects serial port devices
Used for audio signals of Doppler mode sound

<5>, <6>
Audio output port from DVD output or audio comments
Reserved.(Connects a microphone used for
<7> Mic In port receiving audio comments when a recorder is
used to record images)
<8> Remote control port Connects the control port of the video printer
Composite video output port Used for receiving the output image signal of
<9>
the video printer or DVD recorder
<10> DVI-I output port Connects a display or projector
 To connect the module:
Connect the I/O extend module to the main unit via the I/O extend port, thus the data port
is extended. As shown in the following figure.
I/O Extend Module
When connects serial port devices (via port <4>) or the ECG
CAUTION: module (via port <3>), you should first freeze the image or power
off the machine, or malfunction may result.

2.8.3 V/A Extend Module
 Overview
The module is connected to the USB port of the main unit via a USB cable.
< 1> <2> < 3> <4>
No. Name Function

<1>, <2> Audio input port Used for audio signal input
Used for composite signal video input
<3> Composite video input port
(Reserved)
Used for separate signal video input
<4> Separate video input port
(Reserved)
 Connection
Connect the V/A extend module to the main unit via a USB port. As shown in the following
figure.

2.8.4 ECG module
 Overview
To connect the ECG module, the system should also be configured with the I/O extend
module.
The ECG module is connected to main unit via connection to the I/O extend module.
Name Function
Used for ECG signal input

ECG lead port
 Connection
Connect the ECG module to the main unit via the I/O extend module, see "2.8.2 I/O
extend module" for details). As shown in the following figure.
NOTE: You must turn off the ultrasound system before connecting or disconnecting the
ECG module. Otherwise the system or the module may be damaged.

2.9 Control Panel
<1> <2> <3> <4> <5> <6> <7>
<8> <9> <10> <11> <12> <13> <14> <15> <16>
<18> <17>
<19>
<20> <21> <22> <23>
<25> <35> <24>

<36>
4>
<3 <38>
<37>
<26> <29>
<40>
<33>
<27> <30> <41> <42>

<39>
<28> <31> <43>

<50> <44>
<32>
<49>
<47>
<45> <46> <48>
<51><52>
No. Name Description Function

Press to select the soft menu items displayed on
Soft menu the bottom of the screen.
<1> /
controls 1 Refer to the subsequent contents for specific
functions.
<2> /
functions.
<3> /
functions.
Up/ down controls are used to turn pages
up/down when there is more than one page for
Soft menu the soft menu.
<4> /
controls 4
Left/ right keys are used to switch among the
different modes.

<5> /
functions.
<6> /
functions.
It does not illuminate when the system is turned
off.
Press the button to turn on the system, the
<7> / Power button system enters work status and the indicator
lights on and becomes green.
When the system enters the standby status, the
indicator turns orange.
Press to exit the current status to the previous
<8> Esc Exit
status.
<9> Help Help Press to enter help status.
<10> Report Report Press to open or close the diagnosis reports.
Press to enter or exit the patient information
<11> iStation /
management system.
User-defined
<12> F1-F4 You can assign a function to the key.
key
Quad-split Press to enter Quad mode.
<13> Quad
screen Switch image windows in the Quad mode.
<14> Biopsy Biopsy Press to show or hide the biopsy guide line.
<15> Setup Setup Press to show the Setup menu.
<16> Del / Press to delete the comment, etc.
<17> TGC / Move to adjust time gain compensation.
Alphanumeric
<18> / Same as those of PC.
keys
Press to display or hide a mode-specific
<19> Menu Main menu
parameter menu.
ABC Press to enter or exit the character comment
<20> Comment
(Comments) status.
<21> Arrow Arrow Press to enter or exit the arrow comment status.
Press to clear the comments or measurement
<22> Clear Clear
calipers on the screen.
Direction Press “Fn+/” to adjust volume or monitor
<23>
keys brightness

Rotate to increase or decrease the image gain.
<24> iTouch / Press to optimize the image, serving as a
one-key optimization.
Patient
<25> Patient Press to enter the [Patient Info] screen.
Information
<26> Exam Exam Type Press to select an exam mode and a probe.
<27> Review Review To review the stored images.
<28> End Exam End Exam Press to end an exam.
<29> Body Mark Body Marks Press to enter or exit the Body Mark status.
<30> Cine Cine Review Press to enter or exit the Cine Review status.
<31> Zoom Zoom Press to enter or exit the Zoom status.
<32> Cursor Cursor Press to show the cursor.
User-defined
<33> F5 You can assign a function to the key.
key
<34> Measure Measurement Press to enter or exit the measurement state.
Press to change the currently active window.
<35> Update / Or start/stop image acquisition in iScape or
3D/4D.
Press to confirm an operation, same as the
<36> Set Set
left-button of the mouse.
<37> B / Press to enter B mode
Press to enter Dual mode from another modes.
<38> Dual / Press to switch between the two windows in
Dual mode.
<39> Color / Press to enter Color mode.
<40> Power / Press to enter Power mode.
<41> CW / Press to enter CW mode.
<42> M / Press to enter M mode.
<43> PW / Press to enter PW mode.
User-defined
<44> F6 You can assign a function to the key.
key
<45> Print Print Press to print; user-defined key.
<46> Save Save Press to save; user-defined key.
Press to increase or decrease the imaging depth
<47> Depth Depth
in scanning mode.
<48> Freeze Freeze Press to freeze or unfreeze the image.
<49> / Trackball Roll the trackball to change the cursor position.

Rotate to adjust image parameters or direction of
Multifunctional comment arrows.
<50> /
knob Press to show the menu, rotate to select the
item.
Indicates if the main unit is connected to the
power supply.
If not connected, the indicator does not
<51> / Indicator 1
illuminate.
If connected, the indicator illuminates in green
color.
Indicates the current status of the batteries.
When the system is supplied with power by the
batteries and the power capacity is lower than
30%, the indicator is yellow and flashes.
<52> / Indicator 2 When the batteries are being charged, the
indicator light is on and in yellow color.
When the battery capacity is charged to the full
capacity, the indicator color turns green.
In other statuses, the indicator light is off.
Tip: “/” means the key / knob has no silk-printed name.
2.10 Symbols
This system uses the symbols listed in the following table, and their meanings are
explained as well.
Symbol Description
Type-BF applied part
Caution
AC (Alternating current)
Battery Status Indicator
Power button
Probe port
Probe connection unlocked symbol
Probe connection locked symbol
I/O extend port
USB port
Network port

Symbol Description
S-VIDEO signal interface;
VIDEO signal interface
Pencil probe port (reserved)
Battery installation position indicator
ECG function
No user serviceable parts (applied to the power adapter)
Indoor, dry location use only (applied to the power adapter)
Connects serial port devices
ECG function
Connects a display or projector
Audio signal
Microphone input jack
Remote control port
Product serial number
Manufacture date
Authorized representative in the European Community
The device is fully in conformance with the low voltage directive

2014/35/EU and the EMC directive 2014/30/EU
NOTE: The product complies with the Council Directive 2011/65/EU.

3 System Preparation
3.1 Move/Posit the System

Please read and understand the safety precautions before placing the system to ensure
safety for both operator and device.
1. Turn off the power and disconnect the system from all peripherals.
2. Carry the system by holding the handle.
3. Place the system in a desired location.
4. Leave at least 20cm at the back and both sides of the system.
Maintain a generous–free air flowing space around the back
CAUTION: and both sides of the system; failure may result due to
increased rise in system operating temperature.
3.2 Power Supply

This system can work normally only when it is connected to the external power supply or
the battery capacity is sufficient.
3.2.1 Connecting the External Power Supply

1. Connect the connector of the power adapter to the adapter port in the system.
2. Use a three-wire cable to connect the adapter with the external power supply.
3. The external power supply system must meet the following requirements:
 Power supply voltage:100-240V～
 Power supply frequency: 50/60Hz
 Input current: 1.5- 0.6A
 The model of the power adapter: ADP1210-01.
If you have any question about the power adapter, please contact your sales
representative.
NOTE: 1. You must use the specified power adapter.
2. Do not use this power adapter in the conditions other than those specified.
System Preparation 3-1

3.2.2 Powered by Batteries
 When connected to the external power supply, the system is powered by the external
power. The lithium ion batteries inside it are in the charging status.
 When disconnected from the external power supply, the system is powered by the
lithium ion batteries. Refer to chapter “15 Batteries” for the detailed operations and
precautions.
3.3 Power ON /OFF
3.3.1 Powering ON the System

To ensure safe and effective system operation, you must
CAUTION: perform daily maintenance and checks.
If the system begins to function improperly – immediately
stop scanning. If the system continues to function improperly
– fully shut down the system and contact Mindray Customer
Service Department or sales representative.
If you use the system in a persistent improperly functioning
state – you may harm the patient or damage the equipment.
 Checking before Power ON

To check the system before the system is turned on:
No. Check Item
The temperature, relative humidity and atmospheric pressure shall meet the
<1> requirements of operating conditions. See "2.4.2 Environmental Conditions" for
details.
<2> There shall be no condensation.
There shall be no distortion, damage or dirt on the system and peripheral devices.
<3> If any dirt is found, cleaning shall be performed as defined in section “18.1.1
Cleaning the System”.
<4> There shall be no loose screws on the monitor or control panel.
There shall be no cable damage (e.g. power cord). Maintaining secure
<5>
connections to the system at all times.
The probes and probe cables shall be free of damage or stains.
<6> See "12.1.5 Probes Cleaning and Disinfection” for details on probe cleaning and
disinfection.
No miscellaneous odds and ends are allowed to be attached or affixed to the
<7>
control panel.
Ensure that all connections are free from damage and remain clear of foreign
<8> object blockages.
There shall be no obstacles around the system and its air vent.
Probe cleaning and disinfection. (Please refer to chapter “12 Probes and Biopsy”
<9>
for details)
3-2 System Preparation

No. Check Item
<10> The overall scanning environment and field must be clean.
 Turning on the Power
To turn on the system:
1. Press the power button in the upper right corner on the control panel
2. The system enters the work status.
3. The indicator lights on and becomes green.
 To check the system after it is turned on
Press the power button in the upper right corner on the control panel to turn on the
system.
To check the system after the system is turned on:
No. Check Item
<1> There shall be no unusual sounds or smells indicating possible overheating.
<2> There shall be no persistently displayed system error message.
There shall be no evident excessive noise, discontinuous, absent or black artifacts
<3>
in the B mode image.
Check if there is abnormal heat on the surface of the probe during an ultrasound
<4>
procedure.
<5> The control panel keys and knobs are fully functional.
The exam date and time are the same as the system date and time, and are
<6>
displayed correctly.
1. If you use a probe giving off excessive heat, it may burn

WARNING: the patient.
2. If you find anything not functioning properly, this may
indicate that the system is defective. In this case, shut
down the system immediately and contact Mindray
Customer Service Department or sales representative.
NOTE: When you start the system or switch between probes, you will hear clicking
sounds – this is expected behavior.
3.3.2 Powering OFF the System

You need to follow the correct procedures to power off the system. In addition, after you
upgrade the software or when the system is down, you need to power off and restart it.
If you will not use the system for a long period of time, you shall:
1. Disconnect the power adapter.
2. Disconnect the mains power.
3. Turn off powers of all peripherals connected to the system.
 To power off your system normally:
Gently press the power button once on the upper right corner of the control panel. The
[Shutdown Confirm] screen appears.
 Shut down: To power off the system normally.
 Standby Click to enter the standby status.
 Cancel: to cancel the operation.
 To shut down the system in a direct way if you cannot do it normally:

Press and hold the power button for a long time and the system will power off without
displaying the [Shutdown Confirm] screen. However, shutting down the system this way
may destroy the data.
NOTE: 1. DO NOT rush shutdown of the system in a direct way. It may destroy the
data.
2. After the software upgrade, please shut down the system in the normal way
(using “Shut down” method) so as to guarantee a fully update.
3.3.3 Standby
Definition of standby: in a normal environmental temperature and humidity condition, the
system is connected with only one probe while no other external devices or extend
modules are connected, only 3V3_STB and 5V_STB power supply is available and in the
meantime, the standby indicator is in orange.
When the battery capacity is charged to the full capacity, the standby time of the system is
no less than 64 hours.
 To enter standby:
 Fully fold the LCD display and wait for 30 sec, then the system enters the standby
status.
 Open [Setup]->[System Preset]->“General” to set the time for screensaver and
standby. If there is no operation, the system enters screensaver after the waiting
time set for screensaver, and if there is still no operation, the system enters
standby after the waiting time for standby.
 Press the power button and select “Standby”.
When the system enters the standby status, the power button backlight turns orange.
 To exit standby
 Unfold the LCD display.
 Press the power button.
 When the system enters the standby status, if need to power off:
 Long press the power button for several seconds.
 Press the power button to exit the standby status and then power off the system.
NOTE: 1. Power off the system if you will not use the system for a long period of time
(including storage/ transportation condition), and you should not allow the
system in standby status, otherwise the batteries will be out of power and
permanently damaged.
2. If you will not use the system for a long period of time, DO NOT leave the
system in the standby status, you should shut down the system, disconnect
power adapter, mains power, and turn off powers of all connected
peripherals.

3.4 Connecting /Disconnecting a Probe
1. When connecting or disconnecting a probe, place it in a
CAUTION: proper position, to prevent the probe from falling off or
becoming damaged.
2. Only use the probes provided by Mindray. Aftermarket
probes may result in damage or cause a fire.
3.4.1 Connecting a Probe

The probes, cables and connectors are in proper operating
WARNING: order and free from surface defects, cracks and peeling.
Using a defective probe may cause electric shock.
1. Keep the cable end of the probe to the right side of the system, and insert the
connector into the port of the system, and then press in fully. See the figure below.
2. Toggle the locking lever to the top position.
3. Place the cable properly to avoid being treaded or wrapping with other devices. DO
NOT allow the probe head to hang free.
Locking lever
3.4.2 Disconnecting a Probe

1. Toggle the locking lever to the bottom position to unlock the connector of the probe.
2. Pull the probe connector straight out as shown in the figure below.

3.5 Connecting the Footswitch
Connect the footswitch to the main unit via a USB port. As shown in the following figure.
Set the functions of the footswitch in the [Key Config] page. Refer to "14.1.7 Key Config"
for details.
3.6 Connecting/ Removing a USB

Memory Device
DO NOT directly remove a USB memory device; otherwise,
WARNING: the USB memory device and /or the system may be damaged.
 When connecting a USB memory device to the ultrasound system via a USB port：
1. You can hear a sound if it is connected successfully.
2. You can see the symbol in the lower right corner of the imaging screen.
 To remove the USB memory device:
1. Click to open the “Remove USB Device” dialogue box.

2. Select the memory device to be removed.
3. Click [OK] and you can hear a sound.
4. Remove the USB memory device. There will be sound feedback when remove the
USB memory device.

3.7 Graph /Text printer
 Connecting a local printer
As shown in the figure below, a graph /text printer has a power cord and data cable. The
power cord shall be directly connected to a protective grounding wall receptacle as
required.
Power cord
Data cable
USB connector
1. Connect the two USB ports of the printer and the system with the USB cable of the
printer.
2. Power on the system and the printer.
3. Install the printer driver: "[Setup]-> [Peripheral Preset]->[Printer]->[Printer Driver]" and
click [Add Printer], as shown in the figure:
4. Select "Add Local Printer" and click [Next] to enter the screen of browsing driver;
select the desired driver and click [OK] to install the driver.

 Printers listed in "2.5 System Configuration" have drivers installed already.
 Click [Printer Attribute] to see the printer attribute.
5. Click [OK] to finish the installation.
 Add Network Printer
After the system is connected into a LAN, enter the "[Setup] -> [Peripheral Preset] ->
[Printer] -> [Printer Driver]" screen.
1. Click [Add Printer] and select the types of adding network printer
 Search Network Printer
Select "Search Network Printer" and click [Next] to search for the printer; select
the domain and server in the screen to find the printer.
 Connecting to the specified printer
Select "Connect to this Printer" and enter the printer address in the field box.
2. When the network printer is successfully connected, you can see the printer in the list.
Tips: the network printer functions depending on the configured network environment in
the hospital, please consult the network configuration manager in case of failure.
NOTE: When you install the printer’s driver, you must specify the specific path for
installation; otherwise, vague path may result in longer time for searching.
 Report print
You can use a graph/ text printer to print report or images.
 To set the default report printer and properties:
In "[Setup] -> [Print Service]" screen, select the "Report Print" column in the
service list, set the items in the "Property" box.
 To print a report:
Click [Print] in the report dialog box to print a report; or, use the user-defined key
to print, see "14.1.7 Key Config" for details.
Please refer to the accompanying manuals of the printers for more details.
3.8 Video Printer

The system support digital video printers, including B/W printers and color printers.
USB cable
Power cord
 Connecting a local printer

1. Place the printer in the proper position.
2. Connect the power cord of the printer to a receptacle. Use a USB cable to connect the
USB port of the system with the USB port of the printer.
3. Load a paper roll, and turn on the system and printer.

4. Install the printer driver (steps are the same as of graph/text printers; please refer to
relevant chapters for details). Printers listed in "2.5.2.3 Peripherals Supported" have
drivers installed already.
5. Add a print service:
(1) Open "[Setup] → [Peripheral Preset] → [Print Service]" screen.
(2) Click [Add Service] to enter the following page.
(3) Select the service type as "Digital Image Print" and enter the service name
manually.
(4) Click [OK] to return to the Printer Service page.
(5) Set the items in the Property box and click [Save] to save the settings.
 Image print
Video printers are mainly used for image print; refer to DICOM chapter for DICOM
image print.
 Modify print service:
a) Select a printer service in the list.
b) Select the printer type in the Property box.
c) Set print properties: Paper size, Paper orientation, Rows*Columns, Vertical
Align, Page margin etc.
d) Click [Save] to confirm.
 Video output settings:
Enter "[Setup] → [Peripheral Preset] → [Input & Display]"; set the output size.
 Image print
 Select the image to be printed on the iStation or Review screen, and click
[Send To] to select the printer to print.
 To print by the user-defined key (<Print> as an example):
a) Enter "[Setup] → [System Preset] → [Key Config]".
b) Select "Print" in the "Key Function" list, and select the desired print service in
the right "Print" list.
Please refer to the accompanying manuals of the printers for more details.
3.9 Basic Screen and Operation
3.9.1 Basic Screen

The following diagram maps out the different areas in the screen:

Exam Acoustic
Hospital Name MI/TI
Time Power Freeze
Logo Accession#
Exam ECG icon
Animal Information Probe Operator
Mode icon
Image
Parameter and
Menu Area Image area
Thumbnail Area of
Images Stored
Cine Review
Image-in-image
Thumbnail Body Mark Area
Help information area Cursor area
Soft Menu Area System status icon
 Information Area
The information area displays manufacturer logo, hospital name, exam date & time,
acoustic power & MI/TI, freeze icon, Animal information, probe model, current exam
mode, ECG icon (if ECG module is connected), and accession #, etc.
To preset whether gender, age or operator is displayed: Enter "[Setup]→[System
Preset]→[General Preset]" and check "Gender", "Age" or "Operator" in the [Animal
Info] box in the upper left corner of the screen.
 Logo
Manufacture logo, displayed in the upper left corner of the screen.
 Hospital name
Display the hospital name. Hospital name can be set via "[Setup] → [System
Preset] → [Region]".
 Exam time
Displays the exam time, including date and time. Exam time can be set via
"[Setup]→[System Preset]→[Region]". Exam time will be frozen with the frozen
image.
 Acoustic power & MI/TI
Display the acoustic power, including the acoustic power, MI (Mechanical Index)
and TI (Thermal Index).
 Freeze icon
The freeze icon means the image is frozen.
 Animal Information
Displays Animal name, ID, gender and age etc. Enter the Animal information
through the "Animal Info" screen. Or, import the saved Animal data from iStation
or the DICOM Worklist server.
 Probe Model
Display the currently-used probe model, or the default model.
 Exam Mode
Displays the currently used exam type, e.g. A-Abdomen, is displayed.
 Operator
Displays the operator’s name on the screen. This information is entered through
the “Animal Info” screen.
 ECG icon
Displays ECG icon, which consists of a heart icon and heart rate, e.g. " 75bpm"
 Accession#
Serial number used in DICOM or the manually entered serial number in “Animal
Info” screen.
 Image Parameter and Menu Area
The image parameter and menu are both displayed in this area. When no menu is
available; this area displays the image parameters of the current mode.
 Menu area
When an image menu is displayed, the imaging parameters will be covered by
the menu.
Include image menu, measurement menu, comment menu, body mark menu and
so on. Use the trackball or the multifunctional knob to operate on the menu.
Use the <Menu> to show or hide the menu. You can also show the menu by
pressing the multifunctional knob.
The menu area consists of menu title, menu items and page-turning button. As
shown in figure below.
Menu title
Tab
Page-turning
button
Drop-down list
button
Items
Page-turning
button
 Menu title
Displays the menu name.
 Tab
Divide the menu items according to measurement conditions.
 Page-turning button
When there are too many items in a menu, the items will be divided into more
than one page.
You can turn pages by page-turning buttons, and .
 Items
Refers to the items on a menu. For item that is applicable for more than one
mode, the item appears as shared item in the certain mode. Items of image
modes and measurement can be preset.
 Down-drop list button
If there are several options available for one item, you can choose the options
through the button.
yThe multifunctional knob can be used to operate the menu. Press the knob to
open the menu; rotate the knob to navigate through the items one by one, and
press it to select the item.
Depending on the item types, the multifunctional knob can:
 For a commanding item or command optional item: press the knob to directly
activate the item.
 For a parameter item or ON/OFF item: press the knob to lock and select the
item, then rotate the knob to switch among the available values; press the
knob again to release and deselect the item.
 For an item with sub-menu: press the knob to extend the sub-menu, and the
cursor navigates to the first sub-item. Operate the sub-menu through the
multifunctional knob. At the same time, you can exit from the sub-menu to the
previous item by clicking “Exit” in the sub-menu.
 For tab items in the menu: e.g. the “Right” and “Left” items in the
measurement menu. Rotate the multifunctional knob to navigate the tab, and
press the knob to select the tab.
 Parameter Area
Display the image parameters for the activated image window. If there are more
than one imaging modes, the system displays the parameters of each image
mode respectively. For details, please refer to the corresponding imaging
mode(s).
 Image area
The image area displays the ultrasound images, ECG waveforms, probe mark (or
activating window mark), time line (in M or PW mode), coordinate axis (including
depth, time, velocity/frequency), focal position (located at depth axis in the form of
), besides, the annotation, body mark, measurement calipers, color bar/grayscale
bar are also displayed here.
Tips: Amplitude and position of ECG waveform can be preset, for more details, please
refer to “7.2 ECG Setting”.
 Image-in-Image Area
In the zoom status, this area displays the thumbnail of a complete image, and a
rectangular frame is used to highlight the currently magnified area. This feature is
called image-in-image.
 Cursor area
The status icon area indicates the current cursor status, such as in cineloop
status.

 Help information area
The help information area displays various help information or progress bar in the
current status.
Besides, the system can provide help for each key. Press <Fn>+<Help> to enter
key-help status, you can see the cursor changes into a arrow with a question mark on
it. Press any key on the control panel, the screen displays the key-relevant
information, meanwhile, the system exits the key-help status.
Tips: in terms of help information, “TB” refers to “Trackball”; “Knob” refers to
“Multifunctional knob”.
 Thumbnail area of images stored
Displays the thumbnail images stored under the current Animal.
 Image manage area
 Page up/down: when there are more than one page images have been stored,
you can turn to the next or preview page by or respectively.
 Delete: select a thumbnail image, and click to delete it.
 Send to: select a thumbnail image, and click to send it to external devices.
 Soft Menu Area
The soft menu items displayed are corresponding to functions of soft menu controls in
the control panel. The soft menu items are related to image mode and settings of
each mode in preset.
The soft menu controls are located at the top of the control panel, shown in the
following figure.
 Page-turning:
Use the up/down keys in soft menu controls <4> to turn pages up or down; you
can operate the items only when they are highlighted.
 Mode switching:
Left / right keys in <4> are used to switch among the modes. The soft menu items
vary depending on the mode. The menu navigation will cause the change of the
menu, while the change of the menu will cause the menu navigation.
 Soft menu control:
The soft menu items are operated respectively through the five groups of soft
menu controls <1>, <2>, <3>, <5> and <6>.
The soft menu items can also be adjusted by <Set> on the control panel. Move
the cursor onto a soft menu item and press <Set> to change the parameter of the
item.
 System status area
This area displays the relevant system icons, such as USB memory device, printer,
network connection, and current system time, etc.

Click to see the hidden status icons.
 None-fixing Area
Areas illustrated here are position-changeable; you can move them by the trackball
within a certain area on the monitor.
 Result window
The measurement result window displays the results of recently performed
measurements.
To move the result window:
a) Place the cursor on the title of result window (you can see the cursor
changes into ).
b) Press <Set> and move the trackball, the window moves together with the
cursor.
c) Move the cursor to the target position, press <Set> again to anchor the result
window in the target position.
 Comment area
For details, please refer to “9 Comments and Body Marks”.
 Body mark area
For details, please refer to “9 Comments and Body Marks”.
3.9.2 Basic Operations of Screens

A screen consists of title, page tabs, contents and buttons:
Composition Description
The title bar is used to give a description for the content and
Title Bar
function of the screen.
For some screens, contents are distributed across several
Page Tab pages. Click the tab by pressing <Set> to open/close the
available pages.
 Radio button: click to select the item.
 Check box: click to check or uncheck the item.
 Entry box: enter characters manually via the keyboard.
Contents Position the cursor into the box, and then enter the letters
or characters.
 Drop-down list box: click “▼” to show the list and select
an item.
When the operation of a screen is complete, click [OK] or
[OK] and [Cancel] [Cancel] to save or cancel the operation, and close the
screen.
 To reposition a dialogue box:

1. Roll the trackball to move the cursor onto the title bar of the dialogue box. At this time
the cursor becomes a ; press <Set>.
2. Roll the trackball and reposition the rectangular graphic to the new desired location.
3. Press the <Set>, and the dialogue box is moved to the desired position.

4 Exam Preparation
Before examining a new Animal, press <End Exam> to end the

CAUTION: exam of the previous Animal, update the Animal ID and
information, to avoid mixing data of the next new Animal.
4.1 To Start an Exam

You can start a Animal exam in the following situations:
 New Animal information: Enter the Animal information, if it is a new Animal, refer
to "4.2.1 New Animal Information" for details; however, the system also supports
anonymous Animal exam, refer to "4.8 Anonymous Animal Exam" for details.
 New exam: to start a new exam for an already registered Animal, the recorded
information can be obtained either through iStation or Worklist, refer to "4.2.2.1
iStation" and "4.2.2.2 DICOM Worklist" for details.
 Activate an exam: select an exam that is ended within 24 hours, and continue the
exam. For details, please refer to “4.5 Activate & Continue an Exam”.
 Continue an exam: select an exam that is paused within 24 hours, and continue
the exam. For details, please refer to “4.5 Activate & Continue an Exam”.
General procedure for an exam: Enter the Animal information -> Select an exam mode
and probe -> Choose an imaging mode -> Start the exam.
To start a new Animal exam, it is better to enter the detailed Animal information. The
system will set up a unique information database for each Animal based on the Animal
information entered, so that the information of one Animal will not be confused with that of
another Animal.
4.2 Animal Information

 To enter the "Animal Info" screen
 Press <Patient>, or,
 Move the cursor onto the Animal information area on the monitor and press
<Set> to open the screen.
 To exit the "Animal Info" screen
 Click [OK] on the "Animal Info" screen; or, press <Patient> on the control panel
again, to save the settings and exit the screen.
 Click [Cancel] or press <Esc> to exit the screen without saving any of the entered
Animal data.
 Press or <Freeze> to return to the current exam mode with the entered
information being saved.
Exam Preparation 4-1

 Click [Basic] or [Detail] on the screen to show or hide the detailed Animal information.
4.2.1 New Animal Information

Place the cursor onto the targeted box. The field box is highlighted and a flashing cursor
appears. Information can be entered or selected from the options.
You can also change the cursor position by <Tab>, <Enter> or direction keys.
Detailed information is described as follows:
1. General information
 Animal ID
Once you enter the ID and confirm it, you are not allowed to change it. There are 2
ways to generate the Animal ID. “\” is not permitted.
Tips: Animal ID of an activated exam (within 24 hours) can be modified.
 Auto generate ID
Select "Auto generated ID" through the path: [Setup] -> [System Preset] -> [General].
System will automatically populate the (Animal) ID field with a unique time-stamp
identification code. The auto generated ID can be edited manually.
 Enter the ID
If you deselect "Auto Generated ID", you need to enter an ID.
If an ID that is already existed in the system is entered, the system prompts "The ID
existed, load data", you can choose to import the data.
 Name
Enter the Animal name directly through the keyboard. Characters of A through Z and
0 through 9 and “.” are allowed.
“\”, “^”, “＝” and “,” are not permitted.
 Gender
Select Male, Female or Unknown for Animal gender in the drop down list.
 DOB (Date of birth):
You can either enter the birth date of a Animal manually according to the format
displayed in the field, or click to select the date. In the table, you can select the
desired year (or enter it manually); month and day, then click [OK] to finish it.
 Age:
 Auto generated age: once the DOB is entered, the system can display an
auto-generated age in the field box, the unit can be “Years”, “Months” or
“Days”. If the age is less than one year, the system will automatically
calculate the age in months or days.
 Also, you can manually enter the age.
NOTE: When you enter the date manually, please enter it in the format as that of the
system.
4-2 Exam Preparation

2. Exam Type
 Exam application type
You can select among 8 types: ABD (Abdomen), OB (Obstetrics), GYN (Gynecology),
CARD (Cardiac), VAS (Vascular), URO (Urology), SMP (Small Part), and PED
(Pediatrics).
Select the exam type tab to enter the exam-specific information.
 General information:
Study description: To enter description for each exam.
CPT4 code: To enter the CPT4 code.
CPT4 description: To enter the CPT4 description.
 Exam specified information:
Exam Type Information Description
Height /
Weight /
ABD (Abdomen) After the height and weight are entered, the system
BSA (body
will automatically calculate the BSA based on the
surface
formula which is set via "[Setup] -> [System Preset]
area)
-> [General]".
According to the entered index (can be selected in
the drop-down list); including LMP (last menstrual
period), IVF (in vitro fertilization), PRV (previous
exam date), BBT (basic body temperature)), the
system can automatically calculate GA and EDD
(estimated delivery date); or, calculates GA and LMP
according to the EDD and entered date.
 LMP: After you enter LMP, the system will
Calculation calculate and display GA and EDD.
index  IVF: After you enter IVF, the system will
calculate GA and EDD.
 PRV: input the date and GA of the last
exam, the system will calculate a new GA
REP(Reproduction) and EDD.
 BBT: input BBT, the system will calculate the
GA and EDD.
 EDD: after you enter EDD, the system will
calculate and display GA and LMP.
Gravida Times of pregnancy.
Times of abnormal pregnancy. e.g. extrauterine
Ectopic
pregnancy
Gestations Number of embryos (1, 2, 3; 1 is default)
Para Times of delivery
Aborta Times of abortion
Height /
CARD(Cardiology)
Weight /

Exam Type Information Description
After the height and weight are inputted, the system
BSA (body
will automatically calculate the BSA based on the
surface
formula which is set via "[Setup] -> [System Preset]
area)
->[General]".
BP Blood pressure.
HR /
RA Press Right Atrium Pressure
BP(L) Input left blood pressure.
VAS (Vascular)
BP(R) Input right blood pressure.
SMP (Small Parts) None /
3. Operating Information
 Accession #: exam number used in DICOM. “\” is not permitted.
 Diagnostician: people who is responsible for the exam. "\", "^","＝" and "," are not
permitted.
 Operator: people who is responsible for images acquisition and scanning. "\", "^",
"＝" and "," are not permitted.
 Ref. Physician: the people who requires the ultrasound exam. "\", "^", "＝" and ","
are not permitted.
 Comment: exam-specific explanation or remarks.
4. Functional key
 [Pause Exam]: to pause the current exam.
 [Cancel Exam]: to cancel the current exam.
 [New Animal]: click to clear the current Animal information in the Animal
information screen in order to input information of a new Animal.
 [New Exam]: click to clear the entered exam information to start a new exam for
the current Animal.
 [OK]: click to save the Animal data entered and exit the screen.
 [Cancel]: click to cancel the Animal data entered and exit the screen.

4.2.2 Retrieve Animal Information
4.2.2.1 iStation
The Animal data can be obtained in iStation from the system hardware or USB memory
device. You can enter the searching conditions for the Animal.
1. To enter iStation screen:
 Press <iStation> on the control panel; or,
 Click [iStation] in the "Animal Info" screen; or
 Press the <Review> on the control panel and click [iStation] in the screen.
2. Select the data source:
Select the data source in the drop-down list of "Data Source". The occupying space
percentage of the selected data source will be displayed.
3. Set the searching condition
Define the searching item: Name, ID, DOB or Exam Date; and then enter the related
keyword.
 Select “Find in results”, the system will search the keyword based on the existed
searched results.
 Click [Reset], the system will clear the information you entered, and all the
recorded Animal information of the system will be listed out.
4. Select the desired Animal information from the list.
 [New Exam]: click to enter “Animal Info” screen, meanwhile, the corresponding
Animal information is also imported to the new exam. After you edit the Animal
information in the [Animal Info] screen, select [OK] to start a new exam.
 [Activate Exam]: click to continue an exam that is finished within 24 hours.
 [Continue Exam]: click to continue an unfinished exam that is carried out within
24 hours.
 [Review]: click to switch to the Review screen.
 [Exit]: click to exit to iStation dialogue box.
4.2.2.2 DICOM Worklist

When the DICOM basic package is configured and the Worklist server has been set, click
[Worklist] in the "Animal Info" screen to query or import the Animal data. (For the setting of
Worklist server, please refer to “11.1.4.3 DICOM Worklist Setting”.)
Procedure:
1. Select data source: choose a worklist server in the drop-down list of “Worklist Server”,
and then all the Animal exam records in the server are listed out.
2. Set the searching condition:
 Enter the period which includes the exam date, and click [Query] to search.
 Enter Animal ID, Animal name, accession #, the system provides the result in
real-time.
 Or select the keyword type, enter the keywords and then click [Query] to search.
 To reset the criteria, click [Clear] button.
3. Select the desired Animal from the list, and:
 Click [Start Exam], the Animal information is imported into the system and then an
exam is started.

 Click [Transfer], the Animal information is imported into the "Animal Info" screen.
After you edit the Animal information in the "Animal Info" screen, click [OK] to start
a new exam.
 Click [Show Detail] to see details of Animal data.
4. Click [Exit] to exit the Worklist.
4.3 Select an Exam Mode and Probe.

If the exam mode is changed during a measurement, all
CAUTION: measurement calipers on the image will be cleared. The data
of general measurements will be lost, but the data of
application measurements will be stored in the reports.
4.3.1 Supported Exam Modes

The system can be configured with applications including abdominal, gynecology,
obstetrics, cardiac, vascular, small parts, urological, pediatrics, EM and nerve use, and the
system will support corresponding exam modes related to the application software (refer
to “2.5.2 Options” for details); the system also supports user-defined exam modes.
The system supports to preset application type, measurements, comments, body marks,
image parameters for each exam mode (including user-defined exam modes). For details,
please refer to “14.2 Exam Preset”.
You can select exam modes for the probes. For details, please refer to “14.2.1 Exam
Selection”.
4.3.2 Selecting Exam Modes and Probes

 Select the exam mode(when connecting with one probe):
(1) Press <Exam> to open the following dialog box.
(2) Roll the trackball and press <Set> to select the exam mode.
 Select the exam mode (when more than one probe are connected):
(1) Press <Exam> to open the following dialog box.
(2) Roll the trackball and press <Set> to select the exam mode, and use the left/right
keys of the soft menu controls to switch the probe.
 To save the current settings for the current exam mode quickly:
(1) Press <Exam> to open the dialog box.
(2) Click [Save], to save the image parameters of the current image mode as setup
data. A dialogue box pops up to prompt you that the operation will cover the
current image preset data.
(3) Click [Save as] to save the current image parameter, measurement, comments
and body mark settings to the designated exam mode.
 Click [Exam Preset] to enter the exam preset screen. For exam preset, please refer to
“14.2 Exam Preset”.
 Exit:
Click [Exit] or press <Exam> to exit, press , <Freeze> or <ESC> can also exit the
screen.

4.4 Select the Imaging Mode
Use the corresponding keys in the control panel to enter the imaging modes.
For the detailed operations in each imaging mode, please refer to “5 Image Optimization”.
4.5 Activate & Continue an Exam
4.5.1 Activate an Exam

Select an exam that is finished within 24 hours, click [Activate Exam] in “iStation” or
“Review” screen to activate the exam.
Tips:
 The system can automatically load the Animal information and exam data to
continue the exam.
 If you want to activate an exam with data in an external memory database, you
have to first import the Animal data to the system’s Animal database.
4.5.2 Continue an Exam

Select an exam that is paused within 24 hours, click [Continue Exam] in “iStation” or
“Review” screen to continue the exam.
If you want to continue an exam with data in an external memory database, you have to
first allow the system to load the Animal data to the system’s Animal database.
4.6 Pause Exam and End Exam
4.6.1 Pause an Exam

 Sometimes, you have to stop an uncompleted exam due to some special causes or
system power off/ when the exam is paused, the system can begin other exams.
1. Press <Patient> to enter "Animal Info" screen.
2. Click [Pause Exam].
 If the system is powered off during scanning, the exam status turns "paused" after the
system restart.
Only one exam can be paused every time.
When an exam is paused, the system will do the following:
1. Save the exam-related images, reports and measurement data, and modify the status
as “Paused”.
2. Save the exam information, including report, imaging mode, exam mode, image
parameters, operation mode, imaging /measurement data and so on.
3. If the system has been configured with a MPPS server, it will send the status
information to the server. For details, please refer to the DICOM chapter.

4.6.2 End an Exam
Before examining a new Animal, press <End Exam> to end the exam of the previous
Animal, update the Animal ID and information, to avoid mixing data of the next new
Animal.
To end an exam, you can do one of the following:
 Press <End Exam> on the control panel.
 Click [New Animal] on the Animal Info screen to end the last Animal exam and
clear the Animal information.
 Click [New Exam] on the Animal Info screen (or iStation screen, or Review screen)
to end the last exam and clear the exam data.
4.7 Cancel an Exam

An undergoing exam can be stopped by clicking [Cancel Exam] in the Animal Info screen.
1. Press <Patient> to enter "Animal Info" screen.
2. Click [Cancel Exam].
3. The system prompts the confirmation message, and requires to select the reason for
canceling the exam.
4. Select the reason and click [OK].
5. After the above operations being taken, the exam is cancelled, and images,
measurements and report are saved with the status of the exam to be "Canceled".
 If the system has been configured with a MPPS server, it will send the status
information "Cancelled" to the server. For details, please refer to relevant description
in the DICOM chapter.
4.8 Anonymous Animal Exam

The system can also carry out image scanning and measurement even though no Animal
information is available：
 Deselect "Save image without Animal info" in "[Setup] -> [System Preset] ->
[General]".
When saving an image, the system pops up the Animal Info screen to ask for the
Animal information.
 Enter the information and click [OK] to save the image and data.
 Select [Cancel] and the system will not save the images.
 If "Save image without Animal info" is selected.
The system will automatically generate an ID, and save the images in the ID.

5 Image Optimization
1. The images displayed in this system are only reference

WARNING: for diagnosis. Mindray is not responsible for the
correctness of diagnostic results. It is the responsibility
of the clinician, who performs the exam, to capture the
correct diagnostic results.
2. In Dual-B imaging mode, the measurement results of the
merged image may be inaccurate. Therefore, the results
are provided for reference only, not for confirming a
diagnosis.
5.1 Switching Between Imaging Modes

Key Description
B Mode key: press to enter B Mode.
M Mode key: press to enter M Mode.
PW Mode key: press to enter PW Mode.

In 3D/4D mode, press to enter 3D image in single window.
CW Mode key: press to enter CW Mode.
Color Mode key: press to enter Color Mode.
Power mode key: press to enter Power Mode.
Dual-split display key: press to enter the Dual-split display mode, and
to switch between the windows.
Press to change the currently active window.
Press to start or end image capture in 3D/4D or iScape.
Press to enter the quad-split screen display, or switches image
window in the Quad mode.
Click to enter different modes: 3D/4D, iScape, TDI, Free Xros M,

Stress Echo.
Define buttons for Contrast Imaging mode and Elastography;

User-defined key
Press to enter.
Image Optimization 5-1

5.2 Image Adjustment
Before optimizing the image by adjusting image parameters, adjust the brightness and
contrast of the monitor to the best.
Requirement Available Operations
Adjust gain
Adjust TGC
To modify the brightness
Adjust [A. power] (do try to adjust gain first before
increasing the acoustic power)
Adjust [Dyn Ra.]
To modify gray scale image Adjust [Gray Map]
effect Adjust [Persistence]
Adjust [iClear] (optional)
Decrease depth
Decrease the [Focus Number] in B mode
To increase frame rate of gray
Decrease the [FOV] in B mode
scale imaging
Decrease [Line Density]
Turn on [High FR] in harmonic mode
Decrease ROI in Color/Power mode
To increase frame rate of color Turn on [B/C Wide] in Color/Power mode
imaging Decrease [Packet Size] in Color mode
Decrease [Line Density]
Adjust [Freq]
Adjust [Scale]
To modify flow images effect
Adjust [Packet Size]
(Resolution and sensitivity)
Adjust [Line Density]
Adjust [Smooth]
 Adjustment through image menu
Press <Menu> or multifunctional knob to open the menu; use the multifunctional knob
to adjust.
 Adjustment through soft menu controls
The soft menu locates at the bottom of the screen, items of which are dependent
upon image modes and preset. Take B mode adjustment as an example.
 Image mode switching
5-2 Image Optimization

Use left/ right controls in soft menu controls <4> to switch among the modes. The
soft menu items vary depending on the mode. The menu navigation will cause
the change of the menu, while the change of the menu will cause the menu
navigation.
 Page up/down
Use the up/down keys in soft menu controls <4> to turn pages up or down; you
can operate the items only when they are highlighted.
 Soft menu controls operation
a) The soft menu items are operated respectively through the five groups of soft
menu controls <1>, <2>, <3>, <5> and <6>.
b) You can also move the cursor to the certain soft menu item, and then press
<Set> or rotate the multifunctional knob to adjust.
 Adjustment through image parameter area
The image parameter area is located in the upper left corner of the screen. The image
parameters are displayed while the image menu is not available.
(1) Move the cursor to the item on the parameter area, and a frame will be around the
certain item, as .
(2) Press <Set> to adjust, and rotate the multifunctional knob to select the values.
 Adjustment through control panel
 Trackball, control panel key, knob or sliders.
 Adjustment through grayscale/ color bar
 Move the cursor onto the grayscale bar, and press <Set> to switch among the
gray maps.
 Move the cursor onto the color bar, and press <Set> to switch among the color
maps.

5.3 B Mode Image Optimization
B mode is the basic imaging mode that displays real-time images of anatomical tissues
and organs.
5.3.1 B Mode Exam Protocol

1. Enter the Animal information, and select the appropriate probe and exam mode.
2. Press on the control panel to enter B mode.
3. Adjust parameters to optimize the image.
4. Perform other operations (e.g. measurement and calculation) if necessary.
 In real-time scanning of all imaging modes, press on the control panel to return to
B mode.
5.3.2 B Mode Parameters

 In B Mode scanning, the image parameter area in the upper left corner of the screen
will display the real-time parameter values as follows:
Display F 5.0 D 17.6 G 50 FR 40 IP 4 DR 60

Parameter Frequency Depth Gain Frame Rate B IP B Dynamic Range
 Items that appear in the menu or the soft menus are dependent upon preset, which
can be changed or set through "[Setup] -> [Image Preset]"; please refer to "5.16
Image Preset" for details.
5.3.3 B Mode Image Optimization

Gain
Description To adjust the gain of the whole receiving information in B mode. The
real-time gain value is displayed in the image parameter area in the upper
left corner of the screen.
Operation Rotate the <iTouch> knob clockwise to increase the gain, and
anticlockwise to decrease.
Or adjust it in the image parameter area.
Effects Increasing the gain will brighten the image and you can see more received
signals. However, noise may also be increased.

Depth
Description This function is used to adjust the display depth of sampling, the real-time
value of which is displayed on the image parameter area in the upper left
corner of the screen.
Operation To change depth, press keys in the lower right corner of the control panel.
Press key to decrease the depth; Press key to increase the

depth.
The adjustable depth values vary depending upon the probe types.
Effects Increase the depth to see tissue in deeper locations, while decrease the
depth to see tissue in shallower locations.
Impacts Depth increase will cause a decrease in the frame rate.
TGC
Description The system compensates the signals from deeper tissue by segments to
optimize the image.
There are 8-segment TGC sliders on the control panel corresponding to
the areas in the image.
Operation To increase the gain compensation at an area of interest, move the TGC
slider to the right.
To decrease the gain compensation at the corresponding area of interest,
move the TGC slider to the left.
About 1.5s after the adjustment is finished, the TGC curve disappears.
Effects Adjust the signal gain for the certain image area to get a balanced image.
Frequency
Description This function is used to select the operating frequency of the current probe,
the real-time value of which is displayed in the image parameter area in the
upper left corner of the screen, where “F” represents B mode frequency,
and “FH” represents harmonic frequency.
Operation Adjust the frequency value through the [Frequency] item in the soft menu
or menu, “H” indicates harmonic frequency.
Values of frequency vary depending upon the probe types.
Select the frequency according to the detection depth and current tissue
characteristics.
Effects The higher the frequency the better the near field resolution but the worse
the force of penetration.
Harmonic imaging enhances near field resolution and reduces
low-frequency and large amplitude noise, so as to improve small parts
imaging.

Acoustic Power
Description Refers to the power of ultrasonic wave transmitted by the probe, the
real-time value of which is displayed in the image parameter area in the
upper left corner of the screen.
Operation Adjust through the [A. power] item in the soft menu or menu.
The adjusting range vary depending upon probe types.
Effects Generally, increasing the acoustic power will increase the brightness and
contrast of the image as well as the force of penetration.
Impacts You should perform exams according to actual situation and follow the
ALARA Principle.
Focus
Description Refers to adjustment of focus of the ultrasonic beams, symbols as " " of
which are displayed on the right of the image.
Operation Adjust the focus number through the [Focus Number] in the soft menu or
menu.
Adjust the focus position through the [Focus Position] in the soft menu or
menu.
Effects The area that is focused will be of a higher contrast and resolution to
provide a much clearer image.
Impacts The greater the number of focus, the slower the frame rate to image.
Imaging Display Adjustment

Description More information can be obtained without moving the probe or changing
the sampling position.
FOV (Field Change the scan range through the [FOV] item in the soft menu or menu.
of View)
You can get a much larger field of view when selecting a larger FOV, but
the frame rate will decrease.
FOV Change the scan position through the [FOV Position] item in the soft menu
Position or menu.
When the scan range is "W”, the FOV position cannot be changed.
B Steer This function is to steer the beam transmitted by the probe.
Steer the transmitting beam through the [B Steer] item in the soft menu or
menu.
The steering angles vary depending upon the probe types.
Trapezoid Turn on or off the function through [Trapezoid] item in the soft menu or
menu.
You can define user-defined key for trapezoid function in "[Setup] ->
[System Preset] -> [Key Config]".
ExFOV Turn on or off the function through [ExFOV] item in the soft menu or menu.
You can define user-defined key for ExFOV function in "[Setup] -> [System
Preset] -> [Key Config]".

Impacts The FOV position is available only for the convex and phased probes.
The B Steer and Trapezoid function are available only for linear probes.
The ExFOV function is available only for convex probes.
Line Density
Description The function determines the quality and information of the image.
Operation Adjust through the [Line Density] item in the soft menu or menu.
Effects The higher the line density, the higher the resolution, and the lower the
frame rate.
Dynamic Range
Description This function is used to adjust the B image resolution to compress or
expand the gray display range.
The real-time dynamic range value is displayed on the image parameter
area in the upper left corner of the screen.
Operation Adjust through the [Dyn Ra.] item in the soft menu or menu.
Effects The more the dynamic range, the more specific the information, and the
lower the contrast with more noise.
iClear
Description This function is used to increase image profile, so as to distinguish the
image boundary.
Operation Adjust through the [iClear] item in the soft menu or menu.
The system provides 4 levels of iClear effects adjustment, off represents no
iClear is turned on, and the bigger the value the stronger the effect.
Effects The bigger the value the more clearly the profile of the image.
Impacts This function is optional.
Smooth
Description This function is to reject image noise and to make images smooth.
Operation Adjust through the [Smooth] item in the soft menu or menu.
Persistence
Description This function is used to superimpose and average adjacent B images, so
as to optimize the image and remove noises.
Operation Adjust through the [Persistence] item in the soft menu or menu.
Effects Persistence can remove image noise to make details to be clearer.
Impacts Persistence increase may lead to signal missing.
Invert /Rotation
Description This function provides a better observation for image display.

Invert(U/D To invert the image horizontally or vertically.
Flip and Click [L/R Flip] or [U/D Flip] in the menu or the soft menu to invert the
L/R Flip) image.
Rotation Rotate the image through the [Rotation] item in the menu or the soft menu.
When you invert or rotate an image, the “M” mark will change its position correspondingly
on the screen; the M mark is located in the upper left corner of the imaging area by
default.
iBeam
Description This function is used to superimpose and average images of different steer
angles to obtain image optimization.
Operation Turn on or off the function through the [iBeam] item in the soft menu or
menu.
Effects Images after iBeam processing can be optimized with less spot noise and
higher resolution, so that more details for the structure are revealed.
Impacts When linear probe is being used, iBeam function is not available when
trapezoid function is turned on or B steer is adopted.
Image Merge
Description In the Dual-split mode, when the images of the two windows use the same
probe type, depth, invert status, rotation status and magnification factor,
the system will merge the two images so as to extend the field of vision.
Operation Turn on or off the function through the [Img Merge] item in the soft menu or
menu.
Impacts Image Merge is available only for linear probes.
Gray Map
Description This function applies the gray correction to obtain the optimum images.
Operation Select among the maps through the [Gray Map] item in the soft menu or
menu.
You can also adjust through the grayscale bar: move the cursor to the
grayscale bar and press <Set> on the control panel to adjust.
IP (Image Processing)
Description IP is a combination of several image processing parameters, which is used
for a fast image optimization, the real-time group of which is displayed in
the image parameter area in the upper left corner of the screen.
The IP combination parameters include dynamic range, iClear, persistence
and smooth.
Operation Select among the IP groups through the [IP] item in the soft menu or menu.
Colorize and Colorize Map

Description Colorize function provides an imaging process based on color difference
rather than gray distinction.

Operation Turn on or off the function through the [Colorize] item in the soft menu or
menu.
Select the colorize map through the [Colorize Map] item in the soft menu or
menu.
TSI (Tissue Specific Imaging)

Description The TSI function is used to optimize the image by selecting acoustic speed
according to tissue characteristics.
Operation Select among the TSI modes through the [TSI] item in the soft menu or
menu.
iTouch
Description To optimize image parameters as per the current tissue characteristics for
a better image effect.
Operation Press <iTouch> on the control panel to turn on the function, the symbol of
which will be displayed in the image parameter area of the screen; long
press <iTouch> to exit iTouch status.
Post Process
Description Post process is used to apply modifications to a gray map in order to
optimize overall image quality.
Gray This function is to reject image signals less than a certain gray scale, then
Rejection the rejected signal corresponding area turns black.
Click [Gray Rejection] in the soft menu or menu to adjust.
Curve To manually enhance or restrain the signal in the certain scale.

Click [Curve] in the soft menu or menu to open the dialogue box to adjust.
Drag the curve node to increase or decrease the gray scale information:
drag the node up to increase the information and down to decrease.
γ The γ correction is used to correct non-linear distortion of images.

Click [γ] in the soft menu or menu to adjust.
Impacts The post process adjustment will not influence the cine review.
High FR
Description When the THI function is turned on, this function can provides you with
much higher frame rate.
Operation In single B mode when THI is turned on, click the [High FR] item in the soft
menu or menu to obtain images with high frame rates.
LGC
Description Adjust gain of the corresponding image areas to increase the image lateral
resolution.

Operation Adjust through the [LGC1]-[LGC8] item in menu.
The 8-segment LGC indicate the corresponding image areas on the main
screen.
Increasing the LGC value will increase the gain of the corresponding image
areas.
HScale
Description Display or hide the width scale (horizontal scale).
The scale of the horizontal scale is the same as that of vertical scale
(depth), they change together in zoom mode, or when the number of the
image window changes. When image is turned up/down, the HScale will
also be inverted.
Operation Click [HScale] on the soft menu to display or hide the scale.
Animal Temperature
Description If the current active probe is P7-3Ts, the parameter will display under
the B mode menu. You can enter the Animal temperature by this
function.
Operation Enter the temperature by [Animal Temperature] on the soft menu.
If the Animal temperature is above 37°C (98.6°F) and the [Animal

WARNING Temperature] setting is below the actual reading, the system could
overestimate the temperature of TEE transducer’s distal tip. This
could trigger the Auto-Cool function. If the Animal temperature
reaches or is above 37°C (98.6°F) and the [Animal Temperature]
setting is above the actual reading, the system could
underestimate the temperature of the TEE transducer's distal tip.
The Animal is exposed to excessive temperatures.

5.4 M Mode Image Optimization
5.4.1 M Mode Exam Protocol

1. Select a high-quality image during B mode scanning, and adjust to place the area of
interest in the center of the B mode image.
2. Press <M> on the control panel, and roll the trackball to adjust the sampling line.
3. Press <M> on the control panel again or <Update> to enter M mode, and then you
can observe the tissue motion along with anatomical images of B mode.
During the scanning process, you can also adjust the sampling line accordingly when
necessary.
4. Adjust the image parameters to obtain optimized images.
 If you choose "Enter 1D Mode Directly" in "[Setup]->[Image Preset]->[Other]", then
the sampling line will be displayed at all times in B mode images, and pressing <M>
will directly enter M mode.
5.4.2 M Mode Parameters

 In M mode scanning, the image parameter area in the upper left corner of the screen
displays the real-time parameter values as follows:
Display V3 IP 6 DR 65 G 45
Parameter M Speed M IP M Dynamic Range M Gain
 During M mode imaging, menus for B mode and M mode are displayed in the soft
menu at the same time, use the left/right keys of soft menu controls <4> to switch
between the menus of B mode and M mode.
 During M mode scanning, frequency and acoustic power of the probe are
synchronous with that of B mode.
 Adjustment of the depth, focus position or TGC to the B mode image will lead to
corresponding changes in M mode image.
 Press <Update> to switch between the real-time B and freezing B images.

5.4.3 M Mode Image Optimization
Gain
Description To adjust the gain of M mode image. The real-time gain value is displayed
in the image parameter area in the upper left corner of the screen.
Focus Position
Description To change the focus position in M mode, symbols as " " of which are
displayed on the right of the image.
Operation Adjust the focus position through the [Focus Position] item in the soft menu
or menu.
Time Mark
Description To show the time mark in M mode image.
Operation Turn on or off the function through [Time Mark] item in the soft menu or
menu.
Effects When time mark is displayed on the M mode image, it's much easier to
identify the cardiac cycles and detect more details.
Display Format
Description To set the display format of M mode image with B mode image.
Operation Adjust through the [Display Format] item in the soft menu or menu.
Effects Adjust according to the actual situation and obtain a desired analysis
through comparison.
Speed
Description This function is used to set the scanning speed of M mode imaging, and
the real-time speed value is displayed in the image parameter area in the
Operation Change the speed through the [Speed] item in the soft menu or menu.
Effects Speed changing makes it easier to identify disorders in cardiac cycles.

IP (Image Processing)
Description IP is a combination of several image processing parameters, which is used
for a fast image optimization. The IP combination number is displayed in
the image parameter area in the upper left corner of the screen.
The M IP combination parameters include dynamic range, edge enhance,
and M soften.
Operation Select among the IP groups through the [IP] item in the soft menu or menu.

menu.
Select the colorize map through the [Colorize Map] item in the soft menu or
menu.
Post Process
Description Post process is used to apply modifications to the image in order to
Gray This function is to reject image signals less than a certain gray scale.
Rejection


Gray Map
Description This function applies the gray correction to obtain the optimum image.
menu.
Edge Enhance
Description This function is used to increase image profile, so as to distinguish the
image boundary.
Operation Adjust through the [Edge Enhance] item in the soft menu or menu.
Impacts Larger edge enhance may lead to noise increasing.

Dynamic Range
Description This function is used to adjust the B image resolution to compress or
expand the gray display range. The real-time dynamic range value will be
displayed in the image parameter area in the upper left corner of the
screen.
M Soften
Description This feature is used to process the scan lines of M images to reject noise,
making the image details to be clearer.
Operation Adjust through the [M Soften] item in the soft menu or menu.

5.5 Color Mode Image Optimization
The Color mode is used to detect color flow information, and the color is designed to judge
the direction and speed of blood flow.
Generally, the color above the color bar indicates the flow towards the probe, while the
color below the color bar indicates the flow away from the probe; the brighter the color, the
faster the flow speed; while the darker the color, the slower the flow speed.
5.5.1 Color Mode Exam Protocol

1. Select a high-quality image during B mode scanning, and adjust to place the area of
interest in the center of the image.
2. Press <Color> to enter B+Color mode. Use the trackball and <Set> to change
position and size of the Region of Interest (ROI).
3. Adjust the image parameters during scanning to obtain optimized images.
5.5.2 Color Mode Image Optimization

 In Color mode scanning, the image parameter area in the upper left corner of the
screen displays the real-time parameter values as follows:
Display F 3.3 G38 IP 1 WF 43 PRF 0.4k

Parameter Frequency Color Color Color Wall Pulse Repetition
Gain IP Filter Frequency PRF
 In Color mode, acoustic power is synchronous with that of B mode. Adjustment of the
depth or zoom to the B mode image will lead to corresponding changes in Color mode
image.
 During Color mode imaging, menus for B mode and Color mode are displayed in the
soft menu at the same time, use the left/right keys of soft menu controls <4> to switch
the menus of B mode and Color mode.

5.5.3 Color Mode Image Optimization
Color Gain
Description Refers to the overall sensitivity to flow signals, and this function is used to
adjust the gain in Color mode. The real-time gain value is displayed in the
image parameter area in the upper left corner of the screen.
Impacts Increasing the gain will increase the flow signal presented as well as noise,
while the signals may be missing when the gain is adjusted too low.
ROI Adjustment
Description To adjust the width and position of ROI in Color mode.
Operation When the ROI box is dotted line, roll the trackball to change its size.
When the ROI box is solid line, roll the trackball to change the position.
Press <Set> to switch between the solid line and the dotted line status.
You can set the default ROI position and size in "[System Preset]->[Image
Preset]-> Color".
Impacts The larger the ROI box, the lower the frame rate, and the lower the
resolution and color sensitivity.
Frequency
Description Refers to the operating frequency in Color mode of the probe, the real-time
value of which is displayed in the image parameter area in the upper left
Operation Select the frequency value through the [Frequency] item in the soft menu
or menu.
Values of frequency vary by probes. Select the frequency value according
to the need of the detection depth and the current tissue characteristics.
Effects The higher the frequency, the worse the axial resolution, and the better the
force of penetration.
Focus Position
Description To adjust the color focus position against the ROI position.
Operation Change the position through the [Focus Position] item in the soft menu or
menu.
B Display
Description To turn on or off the B image display as Color imaging remains active.
Operation Turn on or off the function through the [B Display] item in the soft menu or
menu.

B/C Align
Description To set and constrain the maximum width of the B mode image to that of the
Color ROI.
Operation Turn on or off the function through the [B/C Align] item in the soft menu or
menu.
Impacts Frame rate will increase when the function is turned on.
Dual Live
Description This function is used to display B image and Color image synchronously.
Operation Click [Dual Live] in the soft menu or menu to turn on or off the function.
When the function is turned on, the window will be automatically switched
to the dual windows (one for B image, and the other for Color image).
Steer
Description The feature is used to adjust the ROI of color flow with different angles with
immobility of the linear probe.
Operation Adjust through the [Steer] item in the soft menu or menu, or rotate the
multifunctional knob to adjust.
Values of steering angles vary by probes.
Effects This function is used to adjust the scan angle of linear probes, so as to
change the angle between the transmitting beam and flow direction.
Impacts Steer is available only for linear probes.
Line Density
Description The function determines the quality and information of the image.
Operation Adjust through the [Line Density] item in the soft menu or menu.
Effects The higher the line density, the higher the resolution.
Impacts The higher the line density, the smaller the frame rate.
Packet Size
Description This function is an indication of the ability to detect flow, which is used to
adjust the accuracy of color flow.
Operation Adjust through the [Packet Size] item in the soft menu or menu.
Effects The higher the packet size, the more sensitive indication for low-velocity
flow.
Impacts Increasing the packet size will lead to frame rate decrease.
Flow State
Description This function is used for a fast image optimization by providing an
adjustment of 2 parameters, including scales and filters.
Operation Adjust through the [Flow State] item in the soft menu or menu.

Persistence
Description This function is to adjust the temporal smooth in Color mode to optimize
the image.
Operation Adjust through the [Persistence] item in the menu or the soft menu.
Smooth
Description This feature is used to reject noise and smooth the image.
Operation Adjust through the [Smooth] item in the soft menu or menu.
Scale
Description This function is used to adjust the speed range of color flow, which is
adjusted through PRF in the system. The real-time PRF value will be
screen.
Operation Adjust the speed range through the [Scale] item in the menu or the soft
menu.
The adjusting range varies by frequency, probe and depth; adjust
according to the actual situation.
Effects To provide a much clearer color flow image.
Use low PRF to observe low-velocity flows, and high PRF to observe
high-velocity flows.
Impacts Aliasing may occur if low velocity scale is used and high velocities are
encountered.
Low velocities may not be identified when a high velocity scale is used.
Baseline
Description Refers to the area where the velocity is zero in the scale. Adjust according
to the actual situation so as to get an optimum flow display.
Operation Adjust through the [Baseline] item in the soft menu or menu.
Positive value means to increase the signals above the baseline, and
negative value means to increase the signals below the baseline.
Invert
Description To set the display mode of the color flow, and the color scale will be
inverted when the function is turned on.
Operation Turn on or off the function through the [Invert] item in the soft menu or
menu.
Select "Auto Invert" in the "[Setup] -> [System Preset] -> [Image Preset]",
then the color bar can automatically invert when the color flow is steered to
a certain angle to accommodate operator’s habit of distinguishing flow
direction.
Map
Description This function is a combination of several image parameters, which
indicates the display effect of color image.

Operation Select among the maps through the [Map] item in the soft menu or menu.
You can also adjust through the color bar: move the cursor to the color bar
and press <Set> on the control panel to adjust.
Color IP
Description Color IP is a combination of several image processing parameters, which is
used for a fast image optimization. The IP combination number is displayed
in the image parameter area in the upper left corner of the screen.
The Color IP combination parameters include persistence and smooth.
Operation Select among the maps through the [Color IP] item in the soft menu or
menu.
WF (Wall Filter)
Description It filters out low-frequency signals to provide effective information, and this
function is used to adjust the filtered frequency. The real-time value is
screen.
Operation Select through the [WF] item in the soft menu or menu.
Impacts Flow signals may be missing.
Priority
Description This function is used to set levels of the flow display, to display the
grayscale signal or color signal.
Operation Select the value through the [Priority] item in the soft menu or menu.
Effects The higher the value, color signals are prior to be displayed; while the
lower the value, grayscale signals are prior to be displayed.
iTouch
Operation Press <iTouch> on the control panel to turn on the function, the symbol of
which will be displayed in the image parameter area of the screen.
HR Flow (High Resolution Flow)

Description This function enhances the micro vessel imaging effect, and can be used to
analyze the tissue blood supply condition.
Operations Set [HR Flow] on the menu in the top-left corner of the screen to “On” to
turn on HR Flow status.
The parameters in HR Flow mode are independent from those in Color
mode.

Smart Track
a better image effect. The angle and the position of the ROI are adjusted
after the function is enabled. The area is tracked without being affected by
the dynamic moves.
Operation Tap [Smart Track] on the soft menu under Color/Power mode. The vessels
lay in the middle of the ROI.

5.6 Power Mode Image Optimization
Power mode provides a non-directionally display of blood flow in the form of intensity as
opposed to flow velocity.
DirPower (Directional Power Mode) provides the additional information of flow direction
towards or away from the probe.
5.6.1 Power Mode Exam Protocol

1. Select a high-quality image during B mode or B+ Color scanning, and adjust to place
the area of interest in the center of the image.
2. Press <Power> to enter B+Power mode. Use the trackball and <Set> to change
position and size of the Region of Interest (ROI).
3. Adjust the image parameters to obtain optimized images.
5.6.2 Power Mode Image Parameters

 In Power mode scanning, the image parameter area in the upper left corner of the
Display F 2.5 G 38 IP 1 WF32 PRF 0.3k

Parameter Frequency Power Power Power Wall Pulse Repetition
Gain IP Filter Frequency PRF
 During Power mode imaging, menus for B mode and Power mode are displayed in
the soft menu at the same time, use the left/right keys of soft menu controls <4> to
switch between the menus of B mode and Power mode.
 In Power mode, acoustic power is synchronous with that of B mode. Adjustment of the
depth or zoom to the B mode image will lead to corresponding changes in Power
mode image.
Parameters consistent with those in Color mode and B mode are not to be introduced,
please refer to relevant section of the Color mode and B mode, while special items of the
Power mode are introduced in the following.

5.6.3 Power Mode Image Optimization
Power Gain
Description Refers to the overall sensitivity to flow signals, and this function is used to
adjust the gain in Power mode. The real-time gain value is displayed in the
image parameter area in the upper left corner of the screen.
Effects Increasing the gain will increase the flow signal presented as well as noise,
while the signals may be missing when the gain is adjusted too low.
Map
Description This feature indicates the display effect of power image. The maps in
Power mode image are grouped into two categories: Power maps and
Directional Power maps.
Operation Select the map through the [Map] item in the soft menu or menu.
The Power maps provide information of blood flow, which are highly
sensitive to the low-velocity flows.
The Directional Power maps provide information of flow direction.
Dynamic Range
Description This function is to adjust the transformation of echo intensity into color
signal.
Effects Increasing dynamic range will lead to higher sensitivity to low-power
signals, thus enhances the range of signals to display.

5.7 PW/CW Doppler Mode Optimization
PW (Pulsed Wave Doppler) mode or CW (Continuous Wave Doppler) mode is used to
provide blood flow velocity and direction utilizing a real-time spectral display. The
horizontal axis represents time, while the vertical axis represents Doppler frequency shift.
PW mode provides a function to examine flow at one specific site for its velocity, direction
and features; while CW mode proves to be much more sensitive to high velocity flow
display. Thus, a combination of both modes will contribute to a much more accurate
analysis.
5.7.1 PW / CW Mode Exam Protocol

1. Select a high-quality image during B mode or B+ Color (Power) scanning, and adjust
to place the area of interest in the center of the image.
2. Press <PW>/<CW> to enter the sampling state,
 The sampling parameters will be displayed in the image parameter area on the
left part of the screen as follows:
 The sampling correction angle value will be displayed above the image, as
described in the following table:
PW Sampling Line SV Size SV 3.0
Adjustment
Angle Angle 0
SVD SVD 10.5cm
CW Sampling Line Angle Angle 0
Adjustment
CW Focus Depth SVD 13.2cm
3. Set the SVD by rotating the trackball; adjust the angle and SV size according to the
actual situation.
4. Press <PW>/<CW> again or <Update> to enter PW/CW Mode and perform the
examination. You can also adjust the SV size, angle and depth in the real-time
scanning.
5. Adjust the image parameters during PW/CW mode scanning to obtain optimized
images.
 If you choose "Enter 1D Mode Directly" in "[Setup]->[Image Preset]->[Other]", then
the sampling line will be displayed at all times in B mode images, and pressing <PW>/
<CW> will directly enter PW/ CW mode.
5.7.2 PW/CW Mode Image Parameters

In PW/ CW mode scanning, the image parameter area in the upper left corner of the

PW Display F 2.5 G 60 PRF 3.6k WF295 SVD 8.8 SV 3.0
Frequency Gain Pulse WF SV SV Size
Repetition (Wall Position
Parameters
Frequency Filter)
PRF
CW Display F 3.3 G 30 WF407 PRF 7.3k SVD 35.0
Frequency Gain WF (Wall Pulse Repetition SV
Parameters
Filter) Frequency PRF Position
 During PW/ CW mode imaging, menus for B mode and PW/ CW mode are displayed
in the soft menu at the same time, use the left/right keys of soft menu controls <4> to
switch the among menus of B mode and PW/ CW mode.
 In PW/CW mode, acoustic power of the probe is synchronous with that of B mode.
 When you adjust the depth of the B mode image, related changes will occur in
PW/CW Mode image as well.
 Most of the parameters are the same for the PW mode and CW mode, so parameters
of the both are combined together to be introduced here.
 Press <Update> to switch between the real-time B and freezing B images.
Only phased probes support CW mode.
5.7.3 PW/CW Doppler Mode Optimization

Gain
Description This function is intended to adjust the gain of spectrum map. The real-time
gain value is displayed in the image parameter area in the upper left corner
of the screen.
Frequency
Description Refers to the operating frequency in PW mode of the probe, the real-time
value of which is displayed in the image parameter area in the upper left

Operation Select the frequency value through the [Frequency] item in the soft menu
or menu.
Values of frequency vary depending upon the probe types.
Select the frequency according to the detection depth and current tissue
characteristics.
Effects The higher the frequency, the better the resolution and sensitivity, and the
worse the force of penetration.
Scale
Description This function is used to adjust the speed range of color flow, which is
adjusted through PRF in the system. The real-time PRF value will be
screen.
Operation Adjust the speed range through the [Scale] item in the menu or the soft
menu.
The adjusting range varies by frequency, probe and depth; adjust
according to the actual situation.
Effects To provide a much clearer color flow image.
Use low PRF to observe low-velocity flows, and use high PRF to observe
high-velocity flows.
Impacts Aliasing may occur if low velocity scale is used and high velocities are
encountered.
Low velocities may not be identified when a high velocity scale is used.
iTouch
Operation Press <iTouch> on the control panel to enter the iTouch status, the symbol
of which will be displayed in the image parameter area of the screen.
You can preset the mode for iTouch function.
It is not available in the CW mode.
Auto Calculation and Auto Calculation Parameter

Description This function is used to trace the spectrum and calculate parameters of
PW/CW mode image, and the results of which are displayed in the result
window.
Operation Click [Auto Calc] in the soft menu or menu to turn on or off the function.
Select parameters in the dialogue box prompted by clicking [Auto Calc
Param].
In real-time scanning, the results displayed are derived from the calculation
of latest cardiac cycle.
In the freezing and cine status, the results displayed are calculated from
the current selected area.
You can define user-defined key for auto calculation function in "[Setup] ->
[System Preset] -> [Key Config]".

Impacts Note: heart rate value obtained by auto calculation may be of deviation,
please adopt manual measurement or ECG function (optional) to get the
precise value.
Auto Calc Cycle

Description To set the number of heart cycle for auto calculation.
Operations Click [Auto Calc Cycle] on the soft menu or the menu to select the cycle
number.
Invert
Description This function is used to set the display manner of spectrum.
Operation Turn on or off the function through the [Invert] item in the soft menu or
menu.
Select "Auto Invert" in the "[Setup] -> [System Preset] -> [Image Preset]",
then the color bar can automatically invert when the color flow is steered to
a certain angle to accommodate operator’s habit of distinguishing flow
direction.
Speed
Description This function is used to set the scanning speed of PW mode imaging.
Operation Adjust the speed through the [Speed] item in the soft menu or menu.
Effects Changing the speed makes it easier to identify the cardiac cycles and to
detect more details.
T/F Res
Description This function is used to adjust for a balance between time resolution and
spatial resolution.
Operation Adjust through the [T/F Res] item in the soft menu or menu.
WF (Wall Filter)
Description It filters out low-velocity signals to provide effective information, and this
function is used to adjust the filtered frequency. The real-time value is
screen.
Operation Select through the [WF] item in the soft menu or menu.
Impacts Flow signals may be missing.
Time Mark
Description Turn on or off the function to show the time mark in PW mode image, which
facilitates to specify the time information of special points.
Operation Turn on or off the function through [Time Mark] item in the soft menu or
menu.

Effects This function facilitates to specify the time information of special points, and
makes it easier to identify the cardiac cycles and detect more details.

menu.
Select the map through the [Colorize Map] item in the soft menu or menu.
You can define user-defined key for colorize function in "[Setup] → [System
Preset] → [Key Config]".
Trace
Trace Area To set the trace area of the Doppler wave in the spectrum map,
applicable for auto calculation, V Max and V Mean display.
Change the trace area through the [Trace Area] item in the soft menu
or menu.
Trace Smooth To set the smooth level when tracing.
Change the effect through the [Trace Smooth] item in the soft menu or
menu.
Trace This function is used to set the sensitivity of tracing V Max and V Mean
Sensitivity in the spectrum.
Adjust through the [Trace Sensitivity] item in the soft menu or menu.
V Max & V To display maximum speed and average speed in the spectrum
Mean automatically.
Click [V Max] or [V Mean] in the soft menu or menu to turn on or off the
function.
In the spectrum map, maximum speed is displayed in red curve, while
the average speed is displayed in blue curve.
Gray Map
Description This function applies the gray correction to obtain the optimum image.
menu.
Display Format
Description To set the display format of PW mode image with B mode image.
Operation Adjust through the [Display Format] item in the soft menu or menu.
Duplex/ Triplex
Description This function is used to set if B image (B+Color image) and PW image are
displayed synchronously.
Operation Turn on or off the function through the [Duplex] / [Triplex] in the soft menu
or menu.

HPRF
Description HPRF mode is used when detected velocities exceed the processing
capabilities of the currently selected PW Doppler scale or when the
selected anatomical site is too deep for the selected PW Doppler scale.
Operation Turn on or off the function through the [HPRF] item in the soft menu or
menu.
Effects HPRF enhances the range of detecting high-velocity flow.
Baseline
Description Refers to the area where the velocity is zero in the spectrum.
Operation Adjust through the [Baseline] item in the soft menu or menu.
Effects Adjust baseline according to the actual situation to change the range of
flow velocity to optimize the image.
Positive value means to enhance the signals above the baseline, and
negative value means to enhance the signals below the baseline.
Angle
Description This function is used to adjust the angle between Doppler vector and flow
to make the velocity more accurate.
The real-time adjusting angle value is displayed on the right part of the
spectrum map.
Operation Adjust through the [Angle] item in the soft menu or menu.
Quick Angle
Description To adjust the angle faster in increments of 60°, and the real-time value of
which is displayed on the right part of the spectrum map.
Operation Adjust through the [Quick Angle] item in the soft menu or menu.
Dynamic Range
Description The dynamic range conveys the information being transformed from echo
intensity to gray scale.
Audio
Description This function is used to adjust the output audio in spectrum map,
Operation Adjust through the [Audio] item in the soft menu or menu.
Or press “<Fn>+ Directional key (Up/Down)” to adjust.
Effects Audio helps to identify the feature and status of flow.

PW Steer
Description This function is used to adjust the scan angle of linear probes, so as to
change the angle between the transmitting beam and flow direction.
Operation Adjust through the [PW Steer] item in the soft menu or menu.
Values of steering angles vary by probes.
Effects This feature is used to steer the direction of the beam so as to change the
angle between the beam and flow direction with immobility of the linear
probe.
Post Process
Description Post process is used to apply modifications to the image in order to
Gray This function is to reject image signals less than a certain gray scale.
Rejection


SV
Description To adjust the SV position and size of sampling in PW mode, the real-time
value of SV and SVD are displayed in the image parameter area in the
Operation Adjust the SV size through the [SV] item in the soft menu or menu.
Roll the trackball to adjust the SV depth.
Or adjust the SV directly in the image parameter area.
Effects The smaller the SV size, the more accurate the result; and more
information can be obtained when selected large SV size.

5.8 Anatomical M Mode
Anatomical M images and Color Anatomical M images are
CAUTION: provided for reference only, not for confirming a diagnosis.
Please compare the image with that of other machines, or make
diagnosis using none-ultrasound methods.
5.8.1 Free Xros M Mode

For an image in the traditional M mode, the M-mark line goes along the beams transmitted
from the probe. Thus it is difficult to obtain a good plane for difficult-to-image Animals that
cannot be moved easily. However, in the anatomical M mode, you can manipulate the
M-mark line to move to any position at desired angles. The system supports anatomical M
scanning (including Free Xros M mode and Free Xros CM mode) in 2D imaging modes (B,
Color, Power and TVI mode).
5.8.1.1 Imaging
 Shortcut key for Free Xros M mode
Assign a user-defined shortcut key for Free Xros M: [Setup] -> [System Preset] -> [Key
Config]. Please refer to "14.1.7 Key Config" for details.
 Real-time Imaging
1. In real-time B mode or M mode, adjust the probe and image to obtain the desired
plane.
2. Click in the bottom-left corner of the screen to enter Free Xros M mode,
or press the user-defined key.
3. Adjust the M-mark (single or multiple) line to obtain optimized images and necessary
information.
In Dual-split or Quad-split mode, it is the current activated window that enters the
Free Xros M Mode.
 Imaging in Freeze Mode
1. Free Xros M imaging of images in cine memory: Click , or press the

user-defined key directly.
2. Adjust the M-mark line (single or multiple) and image parameters to obtain optimized
images and necessary information.
5.8.1.2 Free Xros M Image Parameters

 In Free Xros M mode imaging, the image parameter area in the upper left corner of
the screen displays the real-time parameter values as follows:
Display G 62 V3
Parameter Free Xros M Gain Free Xros M Speed

 During Free Xros M mode imaging, menus for B mode, Free Xros M mode and other
modes are displayed in the soft menu at the same time, use the left/right keys of soft
menu controls <4> to switch the menus.
 Parameters consistent with those in M mode are not to be introduced, please refer to
relevant section of the M mode, while special items of the Free Xros M mode will be
introduced in the following.
Display or Hide the M-mark Line

Description There are 3 M-mark lines available, each with a symbol of "A", "B" or "C" at
the one end as identification and an arrow on the other end as a mark for
direction.
Operation Click [Show A], [Show B], [Show C] in the soft menu or menu to display or
hide the sampling line, and the corresponding image will be displayed on
the screen once the related item is selected.
Impacts When there is only one M-mark line on the screen, you cannot hide it.
Switching between the M-mark Lines

Description To switch between the M-mark lines in Free Xros M mode.
Operation Press <Set> to switch between the M-mark lines or press <Cursor> to
show the cursor.
The activated M-mark line will be green and the inactivated one will be
white.
Adjustment of the M-mark Line

Description To adjust the position and angle of the M-mark line.
Operation  Position Adjustment
When the M-mark line is activated, move the trackball left and right to
adjust the position. The direction is recognized by the arrow at the end of
the line.
 Angle Adjustment
When the M-mark line is activated, move the trackball to adjust the fulcrum
of the line, and adjust the angle via the [Angle] in the soft menu or the
multifunctional knob.
The adjusting angle range is 0-360 in increments of 1.
Display
Description This function is to adjust the display of the images when there is more than
one M-mark line.
Operation Adjust through the [Display] item in the soft menu or menu.
You can choose to display image of the current M-mark line or the all.
5.8.1.3 Exit
 In Free Xros M mode, click or press or the user-defined key to exit.

5.8.2 Free Xros CM (Curved Anatomical M Mode)
Free Xros CM images are provided for reference only, not for
CAUTION: confirming a diagnosis. Please compare the image with that of
other machines, or make diagnosis using none-ultrasound
methods.
In Free Xros CM mode, distance/time curve is generated from the sample line manually
depicted at anywhere on the image. Free Xros CM mode can be entered through B, Color,
Power and TVI modes.
5.8.2.1 Basic Workflow in Free Xros CM

First accessing to Free Xros CM mode after system has been started up:
1. In 2D real time scanning mode, adjust the probe and image to get the desired image,
then fix the probe.
2. Click [Free Xros CM] on the B mode soft menu or press the user-defined key on the
control panel to enter Free Xros CM mode.
3. Roll the trackball to define the start point of the sample line on the 2D image.
The cursor displays as , and can be moved within the 2D image only.
4. Press <Set> to fix the start point, and the digital number “1” is marked beside the
point.
5. Define the next point using the trackball and <Set> (click [Undo] to cancel the current
point and activate the preview point), the system updates the time-motion curve in
real time. The sample line is displayed in green, and each point is marked with a
number in sequence.
6. Repeat Step 4 and 5 to finish the sample line.
7. Double click <Set> to end the editing, and the sample line is displayed in white.
8. Adjust the image parameters to optimize the image, obtain the interested tissue
image for data analysis, and then save the image if necessary.
9. Click [Free Xros CM] again to exit Free Xros CM mode.
Sample Line Modification

1. To enter into curve (sample line) modification status:
 For a finished sample line, set [Edit] as “On”, the sample line is editable.
2. Anchor the cursor on a certain point, press <Set> to activate the point, then roll the
trackball to drag the point for a desired sample line.
3. Double click <Set> to end the edit, and the sample line is displayed in white.
4. Click [Free Xros CM] again to exit Free Xros CM mode.
Delete the Sample Line

Click the sample line to select it, and click [Delete] to delete the selected line and you can
re-depict a new sample line.
Tips:
Parameters of Free Xros M mode and Free Xros CM mode are dependent from each
other, but their functions are the same, parameters of Free Xros CM are not to be
introduced, please refer to relevant sections of the M mode and Free Xros M mode.

5.9 TDI
TDI mode is intended to provide information of low-velocity tissue motion, specifically for
cardiac movement.
There are 4 types of TDI mode:
 Tissue Velocity Imaging (TVI): This imaging mode is used to detect tissue
movement with direction and speed information.
 Tissue Energy Imaging (TEI): This imaging mode reflects the status of cardiac
movement by displaying the intensity of tissue, the brighter the color the less the
intensity.
 Tissue Velocity Doppler Imaging (TVD): This imaging mode provides direction
and speed information of the tissue quantificationally with doppler spectrum.
 Tissue Velocity M Imaging (TVM): This function assists to observe the cardiac
motion through a direct angle. TVM mode is also called Color Tissue M mode,
refer to "5.10 Color M Mode" for details.
 Only phased probe is valid for TDI function.
5.9.1 TDI Exam Protocol

 Enter TDI
 User-defined shortcut key
a) Assign a user-defined shortcut key for TDI: the setting path is "[Setup] ->
[System Preset] -> [Key Config]". Please refer to "14.1.7 Key Config” for
details.
b) Press the user-defined key in B mode to enter TVI mode.
 In real-time mode, click in the bottom-left corner of the screen to enter
the corresponding TDI mode as follows:
 In B or B+Color mode, click [TDI] to enter TVI mode, parameters of TVI mode
will be displayed in the soft menu.
 In Power mode, click [TDI] to enter TEI mode, parameters of TEI mode will
be displayed in the soft menu.
 In PW mode, click [TDI] to enter TVD mode, parameters of TVD mode will be
displayed in the soft menu.
 In M mode, click [TDI] to enter TVM mode, parameters of TVM mode will be
displayed in the soft menu.
 Switching between the TDI modes
In TDI mode, press <Color>, <Power>, <M> or <PW> to switch between the modes.
 Exit TDI
 Click or press the user-defined key to exit TDI mode and enter
general imaging modes.
 Or, press on the control panel to return to B mode.

5.9.2 TDI Image Parameters
 In TDI mode scanning, the image parameter area in the upper left corner of the
screen will display the real-time parameter values as follows:
 TVI
Display F G IP PRF WF
Parameter Frequency Gain TVI IP PRF WF (Wall Filter)
 TEI
Display F G IP PRF WF
Parameter Frequency Gain TEI IP PRF WF (Wall Filter)
 TVD
Display F G PRF WF SVD SV

Parameter Frequency Gain PRF WF (Wall Filter) SV Position SV Size
 TVM
Image parameters combine the parameters of TVI mode and M mode.

5.9.3 TDI Image Optimization
 In TVM mode, adjustable parameters are the same as those in B, M, and TVI modes;
please refer to the relevant contents for details.
 In each TDI mode, parameters that can be adjusted are similar to those in the color
flow modes (Color, PW, and Power); please refer to relevant chapters for details. The
following is to introduce the specific items in TDI mode.
Tissue State
Description This function is used for a fast image optimization by providing an
adjustment on 2 parameters, including scale and filter.
Operation Adjust through the [Tissue State] item in the soft menu or menu.
There are 3 levels provided to adjust: L, M, H.
5.9.4 TDI Quantitative Analysis (QA)

TDI Quantitative Analysis results are provided for reference
CAUTION: only, not for confirming a diagnosis. Please compare the results
with that of other machines, or make diagnosis using
none-ultrasound methods.
TDI QA is applied for TVI original data analysis, for evaluating the velocity change of the
same cardiac muscle with cardiac cycles.
Workflow of TDI QA:
1. Perform image scanning on cardiac muscle, freeze the image and select a range of
images for analysis; or select a desired cine loop from the stored images.
Tips:
 Images from the current scan session (already in freeze mode) or from a saved
image loop can be used for TDI QA.
 TDI QA is only available for cine files. If the user has selected a single-frame
image, TDI QA function cannot be activated.
2. Click [TDI QA] on the TVI soft menu to activate TDI QA function.
3. Mark out the interesting part.
4. Save the curved image, export the data and do parameter analysis.
5. Exit TDI QA function.
 Press <Freeze> on the control panel.

5.9.4.1 TDI QA Screen Description
1---TVI Cineloop window

Sample area: indicates sampling position of the analysis curve. The sample area is
color-coded, 8 (maximum) sample areas can be indicated.
2---B Cineloop window
Tips:
 Images in the TVI cineloop window and B cineloop window are the frozen image
of the same moment; roll the trackball to review the images in the two cineloop
windows.
 Sample areas are linked in the TVI cineloop window and B cineloop window.
3---Displays analysis curve
 Y axis represents the velocity (unit: cm/s), while X axis represents the time (unit:
s).
 Frame marker: a line that perpendicular to the X axis, can be moved horizontally
left to right (right to left) by rolling the trackball.
 Click the check box beside the ROI to set if to hide or to display the TIC curve.
4---Displays ECG trace.
5.9.4.2 Basic Operations of TDI QA

Selecting TIC Analysis Image Range
A range of frames is selected for the TDI quantitative analysis in Cine mode (before
accessing TDI QA). Only the frames in this range are used for the TDI quantitative
analysis. If a range is not selected prior to accessing the TDI QA, the system uses the
default cine start and end frames as the default TDI QA start and stop frames.
Press <Cine> to enter cine review status.

 Roll the trackball to select the desired start of the cineloop; click [Start Frame] to
set the start point.
 Roll the trackball to select the desired end of the cineloop; click [End Frame] to
set the end point.
Setting ROI
Up to eight ROIs can be saved on the reference image, with the corresponding eight
traces plotted simultaneously on the graph. Each ROI display has a different color, and its
corresponding trace data is plotted using that same color.
There are two different methods for determining the shapes of the sample area: Standard
ROI and Freehand ROI.
 Standard ROI
1. Click [Standard ROI] on the soft menu.
2. When the trackball positions the image display cursor over the reference image(s), an
elliptical ROI is automatically generated and displays on the reference image(s).
The average intensity value inside the ellipse is calculated for every image in the
image analysis range and plotted in the image display area.
The ROI height, width and angle can be adjusted by [Std.Height], [Std.Width] and
[Std.Angle] on the soft menu.
3. The last generated or selected ellipse is considered the active ROI, and its trace plot
automatically updates as the user repositions it on the reference image. Old traces
are erased.
4. When scanning with an elliptical ROI, press <Set> to fix the ROI position and freeze
its corresponding trace on the plot. A new active ROI is generated whose position is
manipulated by the trackball and whose analysis curve traces will be plotted as before,
while the previous ROI and trace remain fixed at the points where they were saved at.
 Freehand ROI
1. Click [Freehand ROI] on the soft menu, when the cursor is evolved in the image
review area (TVI image review window or 2D image review window), it displays as a
color-coded ellipse.
2. Review the image to a desired frame.
3. Use the trackball to position the caliper on the reference image at the start point.
Press <Set> to fix the start point.
4. Trace the outline of the desired ROI by moving the cursor with the trackball.
5. Press and hold <Set>, and roll the trackball to depict the ROI. When a suitable ROI
has been drawn, confirm the ROI by double clicking <Set>, press <Clear> to cancel
the last point. The system will update the graphics and the data as well.
The system automatically links the start point to the end point by drawing a straight line
between them. The caliper is then free for repositioning for another freehand ROI.
You cannot go outside the image boundary when drawing a freehand ROI.
 Delete ROI
Press <Clear> to clear out the last ROI; click [Delete All] on the soft menu to clear out
all ROIs.
The corresponding traces for the deleted ROIs are erased from the plot.
Deleting an ROI causes the ROIs to be deleted from all frames in the analysis loop.
Tips:
 The saved ROIs can be a mixture of elliptical and freehand ROIs.

 Elliptical ROIs can be positioned in any manner that keeps their center within the
image boundaries. In the case that part of the ROI is outside the image boundary,
only data from within the image boundary is used for calculating the mean
intensity value.
 When the user repositions an ROI, the old trace data is erased from the plot and
the trace data for the new position re-plotted.
Hide/Show
Click [Hide] or [Show] on the soft menu to hide or display the analysis curve area.
Export/Save Trace Data

1. Click [Export] on the soft menu.
2. Select the drive and enter the file name in the displayed window.
3. Select [OK] to save the data and return to the TIC Analysis screen.
 All displayed ROI traces are saved in the exported file.
 The parameters are included in the trace file if the user has fixed a ROI.
 After the exporting is succeeded, a .BMP format image is displayed in the
thumbnail area at the lower part of the screen.
 Only data from the user selected image range is included in the exported trace
file.

5.10 Color M Mode
Color M mode provides information of color flow or tissue movement on the M mode
images to indicate cardiac motion state. It is highly sensitive to the flow or tissue
movement.
The Color M mode includes Color Flow M mode and Color Tissue M mode (also known as
TVM).
5.10.1 Enter Color M Mode

 Color Flow M mode
 In B+M Mode, press <Color>.
 In B+Color, B+ Color+ PW or B+ Color+ CW mode, press <M>.
 Color Tissue M mode(TVM)
 In Color Flow M mode, enter TDI mode.
 In B+TVI/TVD, or B+TVI+TVD mode, press <M>.
 In Color Flow M mode, click [TDI] in the soft menu or press the user-defined TDI
key.
5.10.2 Exit Color M Mode

 Press <Color> or <M> on the control panel to exit Color M mode.
 Or, press on the control panel to return to B mode.
5.10.3 Image Parameters

 In Color Flow M mode, parameters that can be adjusted are in accordance with those
in B, M and Color modes; please refer to relevant sections of B, Color and M mode for
details.
 In Color Tissue M mode, parameters that can be adjusted are in accordance with
those in B, M and TVI modes; please refer to relevant sections of B, Color and TVI
modes for details.
 ROI Adjustment
The ROI size and position determine the size and position of the color flow or color tissue
displayed in the Color M mode image.
 Set the position of the sampling line by moving the trackball left and right, and set
the ROI position by moving the trackball up and down.
 Set the ROI size by moving the trackball up and right.
 Press <Set> to switch between the cursor status between the ROI position
adjustment and ROI size adjustment.

5.11 3D/4D
Tips:
 You can select 4D optional module. 4D module includes 4D and Static 3D
functions. You can also select Smart3D optional module only.
NOTE: 3D/4D imaging is largely environment-dependent, so the images obtained are
provided for reference only, not for confirming a diagnosis. Please compare the
images with that of other machines, or make diagnosis using none-ultrasound
methods.
5.11.1 Note before Use
5.11.1.1 3D/4D Image Quality Conditions

NOTE: In accordance with the ALARA (As Low As Reasonably Achievable) principle,
please try to shorten the sweeping time after a good 3D imaging is obtained.
The quality of images rendered in the 3D/4D imaging is closely related to the fetal
condition, angle of a B tangent plane and scanning technique (Smart3D).
 Angle of a B tangent plane
The optimum tangent plane to the fetal face 3D/4D imaging is the sagittal section of
the face, or the coronal section. To ensure high image quality, you’d better scan
maximum face area and keep edge continuity.
 Image quality in B mode (2D image quality)
Before entering 3D/4D capture, optimize the B mode image to assure:
 High contrast between the desired region and the AF surrounded.
 Clear boundary of the desired region.
 Low noise of the AF area.
 Scanning technique (only for Smart3D)
 Stability: body, arm and wrist must move smoothly, otherwise the restructured 3D
image distorts.
 Slowness: move or rotate the probe slowly. The speed of linear scan is about 2
cm/s and the rotation rate of the fan scan is about 10°/s～15°/s.
 Evenness: move or rotate the probe at a steady speed or rate.
NOTE: 1. A region with qualified image in B mode may not be optimal for 3D/4D
imaging.
E.g. adequate AF isolation for one sectional plane doesn’t mean the whole
desired region is isolated by AF.
2. More practices are needed for a high success rate of qualified 3D/4D
imaging.
3. Even with good fetal condition, to acquire an approving 3D/4D image may
need more than one scanning.

5.11.2 Overview
Ultrasound data based on three-dimensional imaging methods can be used to image any
structure where a view can’t be achieved by standard 2D-mode to improve understanding
of complex structures.
4D provides continuous, high volume acquisition of 3D images. 4D adds the dimension of
“movement” to a 3D image by providing continuous, real-time displays.
 Mode definition
 Smart 3D
The operator manually moves the probe to change its position/angle when
performing the scanning. After the scanning, the system carries out image
rendering automatically, and then displays a frame of 3D image.
 Static 3D
Posit the probe at a fixed place; the probe automatically performs the scanning.
After the scanning is completed, the system carries out image rendering, and
then displays a frame of 3D image.
 4D
The probe performs the scanning automatically. During the scanning, the system
renders 3D images in real time, and all 3D images are displayed in real time.
 Terms
 Volume: a three-dimensional content.
 Volume data: the image data set of a 3D object rendered from 2D image
sequence.
 3D image: the image displayed to represent the volume data.
 View point: a position for viewing volume data/3D image.
 Section image: tangent planes of the 3D image obtained by algorithm. As shown
in the figure below, XY-paralleled plane is C-section, XZ-paralleled plane is
B-section, and YZ-paralleled plane is A-section. The probe is moved along the
X-axis.
 ROI (Region of Interest): a volume box used to determine the height and width of
scanning volume.
 VOI (Volume of Interest): a volume box used to determine the area of a sectional
plane for 3D imaging.

View point
2 3
1 4 X
6
7
5 8
 ROI and VOI

Before image acquisition after the system enters 3D/4D imaging, a B image with ROI
displays on the screen. A line (shown in the following figure) that shows the cut plane
position of VOI is inside ROI.
B
image
ROI
Cut Plane
 ROI size and position

Roll the trackball to change the ROI size and position, press the <Set> to toggle
between setting the size (dotted line) and position (solid line, with a small box at
each corner of ROI).
 Curved VOI adjustment
Roll the trackball to change the curved VOI position, press <Set> to switch
among the state of changing ROI and curved VOI.
This function is to change the curved shape of the nearest VOI section, to
facilitate observation for the interested volume data.
It can be adjusted both in acquisition preparation status, and in A, B, C sections of
review/ 4D imaging status, and a triangle of control point on the curved VOI is
displayed.
NOTE: To define a ROI, please try to cut the useless data as to reduce the volume data,
shortening the time for image storing, processing and rendering.

 3D view direction definition
You can adjust the view direction of the ROI.
a. Up/Down b. Down/Up
c. Left/Right d. Right/Left
e. Front/Back f. Back/Front
Tips: Changing the view direction only changes the 3D/4D image; images of the 3
sections do not change.
 Probe
A 2D imaging probe can be applied for Smart 3D imaging, however, to realize Static
3D imaging or 4D imaging, a volume probe should be selected.
 Sectional plane
The principle of 3D imaging is to render a 3D image from multiple 2D image
information. The following describes the spatial relation of 3 sectional planes (A, B
and C) and the 3D image.
The sectional plane can be viewed in the following status:
 3D image viewing status of Smart3D
 3D image viewing status of Static 3D
 Real time 4D or frozen 4D status
In the quad display format view, the screen displays A, B, C 3 sectional planes and
the 3D image.
A sectional plane window B sectional plane window
C sectional plane window 3D image window
The current window’s icon is highlighted, e.g., the icon shows that A window is
the current window.
A, B, C section images are illustrated as the following sections of 3D image.
 Section A: corresponds to the 2D image in B mode. Section A is the sagittal

section in fetal face up posture, as shown in the figure A above.
 Section B: it is the horizontal section in fetal face up posture, as shown in the
figure B above.
 Section C: it is the coronal section in fetal face up posture, as shown in the figure
C above.
Tips: the upper part of the 3D image in the D window is corresponding to the
orientation mark on the probe, if the fetal posture is head down (orientating the
mother’s feet), and the orientation mark is orientating the mother’s head, then the
fetus posture is head down in the 3D image, you can make the fetus head up by
rotating the 3D image by clicking [Quick Rot.] to be “180°” in the soft menu.

 Wire cage
When you view a 3D/4D image on the display monitor, it’s sometimes difficult to
recognize the orientation. To help, the system displays a three-dimensional drawing to
illustrate the orientation. Of which, the blue plane presents the image acquisition
where started, while the red plane presents the image acquisition where ended,
besides, a yellow plane in the wire cage presents the position of the sectional plane.
See the graphic below:
Wire Cage
The ultrasound images are provided for reference only, not for
CAUTION: confirming a diagnosis. Please use caution to avoid
misdiagnosis.
5.11.3 Smart 3D
5.11.3.1 Basic Procedures for Smart 3D Imaging

NOTE: In Smart 3D image scanning, if the probe orientation mark is oriented to the
operator’s finger, please perform the scanning from right to left in linear scan; or
rotate the probe from left to right in fan scanning; otherwise, the 3D image
direction is wrong.
To perform Smart 3D imaging:
1. Select the proper probe and connect it to the ultrasound system. Make sure there is
sufficient gel on the probe for scanning.
2. Select the scanning probe and exam mode, and do parameter setting if necessary.
3. Obtain a 2D image. Optimize the image as usual.
4. Enter 3D/4D imaging preparation status:
 Press the user-defined key on the control panel; or,
 Click in the bottom-left corner of the screen to enter the 3D/4D
imaging mode.
5. Switch to Smart 3D imaging by clicking [Smart 3D] on the soft menu, and define the
ROI as well as curve VOI.
6. Select a parameter package, set parameters like [Direction], [Method] (including the
range or angle to be scanned), [Display Format] in the soft menu according to your
preference.
7. Click [Start]; or, press <Update> on the control panel to begin the 3D image
acquisition. For details, please refer to “5.11.3.3 Smart 3D Image Acquisition”.

The system enters into 3D image viewing status when the acquisition is completed; or,
you can finish the acquisition ahead by clicking [Stop] in the soft menu (or press
<Freeze> or <Update> on the control panel).
In image viewing status, you can perform operations like VOI setting, image editing,
for details, please refer to “5.11.3.4 Smart 3D Image Viewing”.
8. Return to image acquisition preparation:
Press <ESC>, <Update> or <Freeze> to return to image acquisition and perform
imaging again if necessary.
9. Exit 3D/4D.
Press, 3D/4D shortcut key, or press <ESC> twice to exit Smart 3D imaging.
5.11.3.2 Smart 3D Acquisition Preparation

Select a parameter package, set parameters like [Method] (including the scanning range
and angle), [Direction], and [Disp Format].
 Method
You can capture images by Linear scan or Fan scan.
 Linear scanning
Move the probe across the surface.
 Fan scanning
Rotate the probe once from the left to the right side (or from the right to the left) to
involve the whole region desired. See the following figure.
 Parameters description:
Type Parameter Description
Start To begin image acquisition.
Acquisition
Stop To stop image acquisition.
Function: to set the fast view direction in viewing mode or
in real-time displaying mode.
Direction Selection: Up/Down, Down/ UP, Left/Right, Right/Left,
Front/Back, Back/Front.
The commonly viewed direction is Up/Down.
Function: to set the image display format in real-time
Display displaying mode (only for 4D imaging) or viewing mode.
Format
Selection: Single, Dual, Quad
Function: select the image acquisition method.
Parameter Selection: Fan, Linear.
adjusting
Linear mode: during the sweep, the probe may not be
moved parallel, the speed at which you scan should be
constant, about 2cm/s.
Fan mode: in this mode, the probe must be moved to a
Method
position where you can clearly see a middle cut of the
object you want to scan and render. Tilt the probe to about
30 degrees until the object you want to scan disappears.
Start the acquisition and tilt the probe over a distance of
around 60 degrees until the object disappears again.
During the sweep, the probe may not be moved parallel,
just tilted. The speed is about 10°/s-15°/s.

Function: to set the distance the probe covered from one
Distance end to the other end during a linear sweep.
Range: 10-200mm, in increments of 10mm.
Function: to set the angle the probe covered during a fan
Angle sweep.
Range: 10-80°, in increments of 2°.
Reserve
To reserve the VOI edge line to be plane.
Curve
Provides 5 parameter packages. The package name as
Parameter well as all the parameters can be preset. Parameter
/
package packages of each mode are independent (vary with the
imaging mode).
5.11.3.3 Smart 3D Image Acquisition

The following takes the fetal face 3D imaging as an example.
1. Optimize the 2D image of the desired region.
Make sure:
 High contrast between the desired region and the AF (amniotic fluid) surrounded.
 Clear boundary of the desired region.
 Low noise of the AF area.
2. Set ROI (Region of Interest) on the 2D image.
3. Roll the trackball to change the ROI size and position and VOI curve, press the <Set>
to toggle between setting the ROI size or position.
To set the ROI /VOI, make sure:
 Set ROI on the 2D image with the largest section area of the fetal face.
 Set ROI a little larger than the fetal head.
Take scanning the fetal face sagittally as an example, the largest ROI is set on the 2D
image acquired from the sagittally section across the center of the face (with the
largest face section area), as shown in Figure a below. If not, a smaller face section
appears and results in a smaller ROI. (The left figure below takes a 3D rendered fetal
face to indicate the fetal under exam.)
A small ROI results in an incomplete 3D image, which can be corrected by resetting
ROI after acquisition. For details, please refer to “Reset ROI”.
4. Click [Start] to begin the acquisition.
5. Perform the acquisition according to the scanning technique stated above. (Take fan
scanning as an example).
6. Viewing and adjusting 3D image.
In image viewing status, you may have to adjust the VOI and image parameters to
optimize the 3D image, refer to “5.11.3.4 Smart 3D Image Viewing” for details.
5.11.3.4 Smart 3D Image Viewing

 The system enters the Image Viewing status once image acquisition is finished:
 Clicking [Stop] in the soft menu; or,
 Pressing <Update> or <Freeze> on the control panel; or,
 Wait until the 3D acquisition automatically completed.

Entering/Exiting Image Viewing
 Exit
To return to 3D/4D image acquisition preparation status, you can,
 Click [Return] in the soft menu,
 Press <Freeze>, <Update> or <Esc>.
B Mode Parameters Adjustment

Use the left/ right keys of soft menu controls <4> to switch to the B menu, and adjust the
image effect by B image parameters.
Image Rendering Parameters

In image viewing status, you can render the image by adjusting the parameters.
Render setting parameters description:
Parameter Description
Function: set Surface as 3D image rendering mode.
This is helpful for surface imaging, such as fetus
Surface face/hand or foot.
Tips: you may have to adjust the threshold to obtain a
clear body boundary.
Function: set Max as 3D image rendering mode, displays
Max the maximum intensity of gray values in the ROI.
This is helpful for viewing bony structures.
Function: set Min as 3D image rendering mode, displays
Min the minimum number of gray values in the ROI.
Render This is helpful for viewing vessels and hollow structures.
Gray/Inversion
Function: set X-ray as 3D image rendering mode.
Displays the average value of all gray values in the ROI.
X-ray
X Ray: used for imaging tissues with different structure
inside or tissues with tumor.
The above four rendering manners can be applied to both gray and
inversion modes.
Where, inversion is to inverse the grayscale of the image, so as to
enhance observation for low-echo region, applicable for vessel, cyst
and etc.
When the function is turned on, the rendering mode parameters
change into the corresponding inverse parameters.
Function: to set the threshold for 3D image rendering. 3D image is
rendered using the signal between the high and low thresholds.
Threshold
Range: 0%-100%, in increments of 1%.
Only used in surface imaging.

Function: to set the transparency value for 3D image rendering.
Transparency The higher the number, the more transparent the gray scale
information.
Only used in surface imaging.
Function: to set the smoothness of 3D image.
Selection: 0-20. 0 refers to no smooth effect, 0-20 present 21 effects in
Smooth incremental order.
Tips: insufficient smoothness can result in a fuzzy image; however,
over smoothness will lead to image distortion.
Function: to set the brightness of 3D image.
Brightness Range: 0%-100%, in increments of 2%. 0% presents the minimum
brightness, while 100% the maximum.
Function: to set the contrast of 3D image.
Contrast
Function: using the lines to show the position information of the other
sections on a section image or 3D image.
MPR Line Selection: Entire, Partial, Off. Entire means to display the whole line
crossing the section image. Partial means to display part of the line at
both ends of the MPR line.
Colorize/Colorize
Switch on/off colorize map, selection: Off, 1-5.
Map
To quick rotation the 3D image.
Quick Rot.
Selection: 0°, 90°, 180°, 270°.
Display Format
Image display format: click [Display Format] in the soft menu to set the image display
format, each adjustment cycles you to the next setting. Here,
 Select [Single], the system displays one image, which can be a section image or a 3D
image.
 Select [Dual], system displays two images left and right. (The left one can be section
A, section B or section C image, and the right one is 3D image.)
Or directly press <Dual> on the control panel.
 Select [Quad], system displays four images. (The upper left one is section A image,
the lower left one is sectional C image, the upper right one is section B image, and the
lower right one is 3D image.)
Or directly press <Quad> on the control panel.
Adjust VOI
 Function
Adjusting the VOI box size and position is to select the volume data needed to
re-render the 3D image and improve the re-render effect.
 Procedures
(1) In image viewing mode, click [Accept VOI] to be “Off”.

(2) Select a desired sectional plane by clicking [Current Window X]. Then VOI on
section A, B and C are adjustable.
(3) Roll the trackball to change the ROI size and position as well as VOI curve, press
the <Set> to toggle among setting the ROI size, position and VOI curve, or, rotate
the multifunction knob to change the position of VOI.
 Click [Accept VOI] to be “On” to exit VOI adjusting. In Accept VOI, a green dotted-line
is displayed presenting the position of the section plane, using the trackball to move
the reference point on the MPR to slicing, and the point is the rotation center. Roll the
trackball to view a section image; you can see the corresponding MPR lines are
moving.
Section Image Viewing

The principle of 3D imaging is to render a 3D image from multiple 2D image information.
You can move the MPR line to view the different position of the section image.
 Sectional plane position
In the quad display format view, there are 3 sectional planes (A, B and C) and the 3D
image.
To understand the sectional plane, please refer to “5.11.2 Overview”.
 Procedures
(1) Set a section (A, B or C) as the current window.
(2) Click [Adjusting VOI] to be “Off” to enter the sectional plane viewing.
(3) Roll the trackball to view the sectional plane.
Positions of the other two sectional planes are indicated in the selected plane. You
can roll the trackball to change the position. As shown in the figure below.
Sectional A Sectional B Sectional C

E.g. select A as the current window and roll the trackball, MRP lines (indicating the
position of section A) in the B and C windows move, and image in A window changes.

Tips:
 In actual system displaying, different colors of the window box and the section
lines are used to identify the section A, B and C. Here, three types of line are
used.
Section A MPR line=blue
Section B MPR line=yellow
Section C MPR line=orange
 Scanning plane and the probe movement
Move the probe across the body surface.
Arrow in the figure below indicates the movement of the probe (you can move the
probe in the contrary direction of the arrow.).
Rotating the Image

The system supports the following rotation modes:
 Sphere center rotation
 Axial rotation
 Auto rotation
 Sphere center rotation
Rotate the 3D image around the center point of the 3D image.
 Procedures
a) Set 3D image window as the current window.
Click [Current Window] to be “3D” in the soft menu; or, press <Cursor> on the
control panel to show the cursor, then move the cursor onto 3D image window,
and press <Set> to select the 3D image window as the current window.
b) The system actives sphere center rotation mode by default. You can roll the
trackball to rotate the 3D image.
In sphere center rotation, the three sectional planes will change in real-time with
the rotation of 3D image.
 Axial rotation
Axial rotation is to rotate the 3D image around the X, Y or Z axis.
 Procedures
a) Set 3D image window as the current window. The procedures are the same
as described in sphere center rotation.
b) Rotate the corresponding knobs to make the image rotate, here,

 To rotate along X-axis: click [X Rotation].
 To rotate along Y-axis: click [Y Rotation].
 To rotate along Z-axis: click [Z Rotation].
You can also move the cursor to click [X Rotation], [Y Rotation], [Z Rotation], and then
rotate multifunctional knob to adjust.
 Auto rotation:
1. In 3D viewing mode, click [Auto Rot.], the system enters auto rotation preparation
state, and there displays the 3D image only.
2. Click [Direction] to set the auto rotation direction.
3. Click [Repeat Mode] to set the auto rotation mode.
4. Click [Speed] or rotate the corresponding knob to set the rotate speed.
5. Set Start position and End position:
Start position: roll the trackball to view to a certain position, click [Set Start Pos].
End position: roll the trackball to view to a certain position (after you rotate the image),
click [Set End Pos].
6. Click [Auto Rot.] to be “On” begin the rotation, and you can also adjust the above
parameters during the rotation.
7. Click [Save AVI to USB] to save images to the connected peripheral storage devices
in AVI format.
8. Exit auto rotation:
Click [Exit] or press <ESC> on the control panel.
NOTE: You can view the back of the 3D image by rotating it 180°, but the back view
image may not as vivid as the front. (Here we call the initial view of the 3D
image you see as “front”). It’s recommended to re-capture than to rotate the 3D
image remarkably if a certain region desired is blocked in the 3D image.
Image Zooming
 Function
Adjust the zoom factor of 3D image; the section images will be zoomed in/out
accordingly.
 Operation
Set 3D image window as current window, Press <Zoom> on the control panel to enter
the image magnification status; rotate the multifunctional knob to increase or
decrease the magnification factor.
 Range
The magnification factor can be 0.2-4, in increments of 0.2. The initial factor is 1.
 Image relationship
 When the 3D image is zoomed in or out, the sectional plane images are changed
along with it.
 In “Adjusting VOI” to be “On” status, both the VOI box size and position are fixed.
In “Adjust VOI” to be “Off” status, roll the trackball, the sectional planes are shifted
along with it.
Comment and Body Mark

 Function:
Add comment and body mark to the sectional planes and 3D image.

 Operation:
The operation is the same as adding comment and body mark in B image mode.
Image Edit
 Function
Image editing is a more elaborate function than VOI adjusting to optimize the 3D by
clipping (removing) the part blocked the region of interests.
Tips:
 In image edit status, no image parameter can be changed. There displays a
cutting cursor or an eraser cursor .
 The editing function is only available on a 3D rendered image.
 Editing of the 3D image does not affect the sectional plane of A, B and C window
 Procedures
(1) Enter image editing status by clicking [Edit].
(2) Select an edit type.
(3) Set cut depth.
(4) Roll the trackball and press the <Set> to position the start point, roll the trackball
to set a region and press the <Set> again, the selected region will be cut from the
3D rendered image.
If the Inside Contour/Outside Contour/Inside Polygon/Outside Polygon is selected,
the region that will be cut is defined when the start point and the end point
coincide.
If the eraser is selected, with the eraser moving the region that will be cut is
defined in real time
To undo the last cutting, click [Undo] in the soft menu.
To restore the cut region, click [Redo].
To undo all cuttings, click [Undo All].
Click [Done] to confirm the cutting.
(5) Click [Exit] to exit image editing.
The image cutting parameters are described as follows:
Type Parameters Description
Allows you to trace the portion of the image you want to cut.
Contour. In Inside Contour removes all portions of the image that fall
inside your traced region.
Allows you to trace the portion of the image you want to cut.
Contour. Out Outside Contour removes all portions of the image that fall
outside your traced region.
Displays a box you can use to define the portion of the
Rect. In image you want to cut. Inside Rect removes all portions of
Edit Type the image that fall inside of the box.
Displays a box you can use to define the portion of the
Rect. Out image you want to cut. Outside Rect removes all portions of
the image that fall outside of the box.
Provides a big eraser tool you can use to define the portion
Eraser. Big
of the image to cut by hand.
Eraser. Provides a small eraser tool you can use to define the
Small portion of the image to cut by hand.

Type Parameters Description
Allows you to trace a polygon on the image you want to cut.
Polygon. In Inside Polygon removes all portions of the image that fall
inside your traced region.
Allows you to trace a polygon on the image you want to cut.
Polygon. Out Outside Polygon removes all portions of the image that fall
outside your traced region.
Function: allows you to define the image depth to be cut. 3D
image changes in real time along with the depth.
Full: the full depth of the selected region will be cut.
Edit Depth Depth
Define: allow you to define the depth to be cut. When [Full
Depth] is “Off”, you can define the depth by clicking [Edit
Depth]. The range is 0%-100%, in increments of 5%.
Undo To undo the last cut only.
Other Redo To restore the cut region.

Operations Undo All To undo all cuts since you entered image edit mode.
Done Click to confirm the edit.
Tips: when reset ROI, entering cine review, exiting “Accept VOI”, unfreezing the system,
or entering acquisition preparation, the system will confirm with you “This operation will
clear all edit effect, are you sure to continue?”.
Reset ROI
 Function
Reset ROI is to reset the region of interest to re-render the 3D image.
It’s performed on frozen images.
NOTE: 1. Resetting ROI is not to re-capture images but to re-render 3D image with the
image data acquired already. Usually, if the ROI set before capture is not the
optimal one (e.g. the one contains the largest fetal face section area), you
can reset it to improve the 3D imaging effect.
2. Resetting ROI cannot improve 3D image with a bad imaging condition, such
as the un-optimal fetal posture s or lack of amniotic fluid, etc.
 Procedures
(1) Enter reset ROI mode: in Smart 3D image viewing mode, click [Reset ROI] in the
soft menu or the menu. There displays the original B-mode images marking with
ROI/VOI and progress bar.
(2) Adjust the ROI /VOI in size and position, for details; please refer to “Adjust VOI”.
(3) Set first frame/end frame: roll the trackball to view to a certain 2D image, click
[Set First Frame]/ [Set First Frame].
(4) After the ROI is reset, click [ReImaging] item in the soft menu to enter the 3D
viewing screen. The system will create a new 3D image based on the reset ROI.
In ROI resetting status, the parameters in the soft menu can be divided into image
acquisition parameter and image viewing parameter. Here,
 3 image acquisition parameters: Method, Distance or Angle, reset curve, their
functions and adjusting method are the same as the parameters in “Smart3D
Acquisition Preparation”.

 3 image viewing parameters: Set First Frame, Set End Frame, Auto Play, their
functions and adjusting method are the same as the parameters in “Cine Review”.
5.11.3.5 Image Saving and Reviewing in Smart 3D

 Image saving
 In the 3D viewing mode, press the image-saving key (Save Image to hard drive)
to save the current image to the Animal information management system in the
set format and image size.
 Save clip: in 3D viewing mode, press the cine-saving key (Save Clip
(Retrospective) to hard drive) to save CIN-format clip to the hard drive.
 Save AVI as USB: in auto rotation mode, click [Save AVI as USB] to save the auto
rotation images to the USB disk.
 Image review
Open an image file to enter the image review mode. In this mode, you can perform
the same operations as what you can do in 3D image viewing mode.
5.11.4 4D
4D provides continuous, high volume acquisition of 3D images.
Make sure to perform 4D imaging with an appropriate 4D-compatible probe. Only if the
current probe is an effective one, can the system enters 4D imaging mode. During the
scanning, the probe performs the scanning automatically.
5.11.4.1 Basic Procedures for 4D Imaging

1. Select the appropriate probe and connect it to the ultrasound system (the leftmost
port). Make sure there is sufficient gel on the probe for scanning.
Tips: if the current probe doesn’t support 4D imaging, then [4D] button in the soft
menu is disabled when entered 3D/4D imaging.
2. Select the scanning probe and exam mode, and do parameter preset if necessary.
imaging mode.
5. Switch to 4D imaging by clicking [4D], and define the ROI as well as curve VOI. For
details, please refer to “5.11.3.1 Basic Procedures for Smart 3D Imaging”.
To set a ROI, please try to cut the useless data as to reduce the volume data,
shortening the time for image storing, processing and reconstruction.
6. Select a parameter pack, set parameters like [Direction], [Angle], [Image Quality],
[Display Format] in the soft menu accordingly.
7. Click [Start]; or, press <Update> on the control panel to enter the 4D image real-time
displaying status.
8. Press <Freeze> on the control panel to freeze the image. Do image cutting, rotation,
annotation, image saving if necessary. For the detailed operations, please refer to
“5.11.3.4 Smart 3D Image Viewing”.
9. Exit 4D.
Click [Exit]; or, press <ESC> on the control panel, to exit 4D imaging.

5.11.4.2 4D Acquisition Preparation
Click [4D] on the 3D/4D page to enter 4D acquisition preparation status.In 4D imaging,
you may have to set [Quality] and [Angle] except all other items in Smart 3D imaging.
 Angle
 Function: to set the range for 4D imaging.
 Adjusting range: 10°-70°, in increment of 5°.
 Quality
 Function: to adjust the image quality by changing the line density. Image quality
can affect the imaging speed that the better the image quality, the lower the speed,
so the frame rate is lower.
 Range: Low2, Low1, Mid, High1, High2
Other parameters are the same as that of Smart 3D, for details; please refer to
“5.11.3.2 Smart 3D Acquisition Preparation”.
5.11.4.3 4D Real-time Display

In 4D real-time display status, the following operations can be performed (for the details,
please refer to the corresponding contents in Smart 3D.).
 Set [Quality] and [Angle].
 Set the image display format. The system can support three formats: Single, Dual
and Quad.
 Set 3D image view direction by clicking [Direction].
 Select section image to define the VOI.
 Set the brightness, contrast and colorize map for 3D image.
 Rotate and shift the 3D images, and reset the images to original status by clicking
[Reset].
 View section image and 3D image.
 Set [Colorize Map].
 Image rendering setting.
 Save single frame image by a user-defined save key.
 Other general operations like zooming, comment and body mark.
5.11.4.4 4D Cine Reviewing

Press <Freeze> on the control panel to enter cine review status.
Cine review parameters are described as follows:
Skip to First Skip to the first frame of image.
Skip to Last Skip to the last frame of image.
To set the current frame as the start frame for a cine to be saved.
Set First Frame
Method: review to a certain frame, and click [Set First Frame].
To set the current frame as the end frame for a cine to be saved.
Set End Frame
Method: review to a certain frame, and click [Set End Frame].
Auto Play Activate auto play, and set the cine review speed.
Tips: when system is frozen, or when open a 4D cine file, rolling the trackball left/right
controls the cine frame backward/forward, while rolling the trackball up/down (a range
more than 45°) makes the 3D image move forward/backward around Z-axis. Press <Set>
or click soft menu item, the system returns to image viewing status.

5.11.4.5 4D Image Saving
 In the 3D viewing mode, press the image-saving key (Save Image to hard drive) to
save the current image to the Animal information management system in the set
format and image size.
 Save clip: in 3D viewing mode, press the cine-saving key (Save Clip (Retrospective)
to hard drive) to save CIN-format clip to the hard drive.
 Save as AVI: in auto rotation mode (freeze mode), click [Save AVI to USB] to save the
auto rotation images to the USB disk.
5.11.5 Static 3D
Static 3D provides single frame image acquisition of 3D images. Make sure to perform
Static 3D imaging with an appropriate Static 3D-compatible probe—4D probe. Only if the
current probe is an effective one, can the system enters Static 3D imaging mode. During
the scanning, the probe performs the scanning automatically.
5.11.5.1 Basic Procedures for Static 3D Imaging

To perform Static 3D imaging:
1. Select the appropriate Static 3D-compatible probe and connect it to the ultrasound
system (the leftmost port). Make sure there is sufficient gel on the probe for scanning.
Tips: if the current probe doesn’t support Static 3D imaging, the [Static 3D] item in the
soft menu is disabled when entered 3D/4D imaging.
2. Select the scanning probe and exam mode, and do parameter preset if necessary.
imaging mode.
5. Switch to Static 3D imaging by clicking [Static 3D], and define the ROI.
For details, please refer to “5.11.3.1 Basic Procedures for Smart 3D Imaging”.
To set a ROI, please try to cut the useless data as to reduce the volume data,
shortening the time for image storing, processing and reconstruction.
6. Select a parameter pack, set parameters like [Direction], [Angle], [Image Quality],
[Display Format] in the soft menu accordingly.
7. Click [Start]; or, press <Update> on the control panel to begin the 3D image
acquisition.
The system enters into 3D image viewing status when the acquisition is completed; or,
you can finish the acquisition ahead by clicking [Stop] in the soft menu.
In image viewing status, you can perform all operations (except reset ROI) that can
be performed in Smart 3D. For details, please refer to “5.11.3.4 Smart 3D Image
Viewing”.
8. Return to image acquisition preparation:
Press <ESC>, <Update> or <Freeze> to return to image acquisition and perform
imaging again if necessary.
9. Exit 3D/4D.
Press, 3D/4D shortcut key, or press <ESC> twice to exit Smart 3D imaging.

5.11.5.2 Static 3D Acquisition Preparation
Click [Static 3D] in the soft menu to enter the Static 3D acquisition preparation status.
Adjustable parameters in Static 3D acquisition preparation status are the same as that of
Smart 3D and 4D, for details, please refer to the corresponding contents in “Smart 3D”
and “4D”.
5.11.5.3 Static 3D Image Acquisition

Image acquisition operations are basically similar with that of 4D, the only difference is: in
Static 3D imaging, only a single frame 3D image is captured, while in 4D imaging,
continuous, high volume acquisition of 3D images are provided. The system enters Static
3D image viewing status when the acquisition is completed.
5.11.5.4 Static 3D Image Viewing

All functions (except ROI reset) in Smart 3D image viewing mode are available in Static
3D image viewing mode, for details; please refer to “5.11.3.4 Smart 3D Image Viewing”.
5.11.5.5 Static 3D Image Saving

For details, please refer to “5.11.3.5 Image Saving and Reviewing in Smart 3D”.

5.12 iScape
The iScape panoramic imaging feature extends your field of view by piecing together
multiple B images into a single, extended B image. Use this feature, for example, to view a
complete hand or thyroid.
When scanning, you move the probe linearly and acquire a series of B images, the system
piece these images together into single, extended B image in real time. Besides, the
system supports out-and-back image piecing.
After you obtain the extended image, you can rotate it, move it linearly, magnify it, add
comments or body marks, or perform measurements on the extended image.
You can perform the iScape panoramic imaging feature on B real time images using all
linear and convex (including 4D probes) probes.
iScape panoramic imaging constructs an extended image
CAUTION: from individual image frames. The quality of the resulting
image is user-dependent and requires operator skill and
additional practice to become fully proficient. Therefore, the
measurement results can be inaccurate. Exercise caution
when you perform measurements in the iScape mode.
Smooth even speed will help produce optimal image results.
Tips:
 iScape is an optional module, the function is available only if the module has
been installed on the ultrasound system.
 The display of the biopsy guideline is not allowed in iScape mode.
5.12.1 Basic Procedures for iScape Imaging

To perform iScape imaging:
1. Connect an appropriate iScape-compatible probe. Make sure that there is enough
coupling gel along the scan path. Set parameters if necessary, for details; please refer
to “5.12.2 iScape Preset ”.
2. Enter iScape:
 Click [iScape] in the soft menu in B-mode; or,
 Click in the bottom-left corner of the screen.
3. Optimize the B mode image:
In the acquisition preparation status, click [B] page tab to go for the B mode image
optimization.
Tips: in iScape mode, [FOV] is limited to “W”.
4. Image acquisition:
Click [iScape] page tab to enter the iScape acquisition preparation status. Click [Start
Capture] or press <Update> on the control panel to begin the acquisition. For details,
please refer to “5.12.3 Image Acquisition”.

The system enters into image viewing status when the acquisition is completed. You
can perform operations like parameter adjusting. For details, please refer to “5.12.4
iScape Viewing”.
5. Exit iScape
 Click [Return], or press <Esc> to return to iScape preparation; or press to
return to B mode.If it is in the capture status, click [Exit] in the menu; or, press the
<Esc>; or, press on the control panel.
5.12.2 iScape Preset

 Shortcut key preset
The system supports shortcut key to enter iScape mode. Assign a key as
user-defined iScape key: [Setup] → [System] → [Key Config]. Refer to “14.1.7 Key
Config” for details.
 Parameter preset
 iScape ruler display
Function: to set if to display the ruler on the edge of the extended image.
Method: open Image Preset page via “[Setup] → [System Preset] → [Image
Preset]”, and then check “iScape Ruler Display”.
Tips: when there are abrupt changes in speed of motion, the ruler will not entirely
match with the edge of the merged image.
 Menu preset
To set displayed menu and soft menu items in image capture, iScape viewing and
image review, refer to section “5.16.2 Soft Menu and Menu Preset” for details.
5.12.3 Image Acquisition

To create an iScape image, you start with an optimized 2D image. The 2D image serves
as the mid-line for the resulting iScape image.
1. Press the <Update> or click [Start Capture] in the soft menu to start the iScape image
capture.
2. Scan slowly to obtain a single extended field of view image; you can also perform
erasing and retracing if the image is not satisfied.
To end image acquisition and exit iScape: press <Esc>; or, press ; or, press the
user-defined key on the control panel.
3. End image capture:
To end the image capture:
 Click [Stop Capture] in the soft menu; or,
 Press the <Update>; or,
 Press <Freeze>; or,
 Wait until the acquisition is finished automatically.
After the acquisition is completed, the panoramic image will be displayed. And the
system enters iScape viewing mode.
Tips:
 During the image acquisition, no parameter is adjustable, and functions like
measurement, comment and body mark are not available.
 ROI: a green box on the image indicating the boundary between the merged
images and the unfinished images.

 Tips about the probe speed: during image slicing, the system gives feedbacks
about the probe moving speed in the form of color and words, the relations are
listed as follows:
Status ROI Color Tips
Speed too low Blue Moving speed of the probe is too low.
Appropriate Green None
Speed too high Red Moving speed of the probe is too high.
Guidance and precautions for uniform motion:
 Make sure that there is enough coupling gel along the scan path.
 Always move the probe slowly and steadily. Best results are achieved by moving
the probe with 1cm/s - 3cm/s).
 Continuous contact is required throughout the length of the extended image.
Don’t lift the probe from the skin surface.
 Always keep the probe perpendicular to the skin surface. Don’t rock, rotate or tilt
the probe during the scan.
 The system accommodates a reasonable range of motion velocity. Don’t make
abrupt changes in speed of motion.
 Deeper scans generally require reduced acquisition speed.
5.12.4 iScape Viewing

After completing the image acquisition, the system performs image splicing and then
enters the iScape viewing mode.
In iScape viewing mode, you can perform the following functions:
 Image parameters setting, for details, please refer to “5.12.4.1 Image Parameters ”.
 Image zooming, for details, please refer to “5.12.4.2 Image Zooming”.
 Image rotation, for details, please refer to “5.12.4.3 Rotating the Image”.
 Measurement, comment, and body mark, for details, please refer to “5.12.4.4
Measurement, Comment, and Body Mark”.
5.12.4.1 Image Parameters Setting

In image viewing mode, you can adjust the following parameters:
 Image size
Click [Actual Size] to display the image in its actual size.
Click [Fit Size] to display the image in an appropriate size according to the current
window. Also this is the system default format.
 Colorize and colorize map
Click [Colorize] to activate the colorize function, and then change the effect by clicking
[Colorize Map] in the soft menu.
 Ruler
Click [Ruler] to turn on or off the ruler display on the image.
5.12.4.2 Image Zooming

Press <Zoom> on the control panel to enter image zooming mode. Rotate the
multifunctional knob to zoom in/out the panoramic image.
 Rotate the knob clockwise to zoom in the image, the maximum factor is 4.

 Rotate the knob anticlockwise to zoom out the image, the minimum factor is 0.01.
 Roll the trackball to change position of the magnified image.
 Press the <Zoom> again to exit the zoom mode.
 When image displayed is bigger than the image area, the thumbnail is
automatically displayed.
5.12.4.3 Rotating the Image

For the convenience of viewing the image, you can rotate the image by clicking [Rotation]
in the soft menu.
5.12.4.4 Measurement, Comment, and Body Mark

In iScape image viewing status, you can perform measurement, comment, and body mark.
The operations are the same as that of B mode.
NOTE: 1. The measurement accuracy for the spliced image may be degraded,
exercise caution when measurements are performed on an iScape image.
2. If there is a trace during the retracing, please don’t perform measurement
across the trace.
5.12.4.5 Evaluate Image Quality

Many variables may affect the overall image quality. It is important to evaluate the image
content and quality before an image is used for diagnosis or measurements.
NOTE: iScape panoramic imaging is intended for well-trained ultrasound operators or

physicians. The operator must recognize image artifacts that will produce a
sub-optimal or unreliable image.
The following artifacts may produce a sub-optimal image. If the image quality cannot meet
the following criteria, you shall delete the image and do image acquisition again.
 The Image must be continuous (no part of an image moves suddenly or
disappears.)
 No shadow or absent signal along the scan plane.
 Clear profile of anatomy through the entire scan plane without distortion.
 Skin line is continuous.
 The images are captured from the same plane.
 There is no large black area in the image.
5.12.5 Cine Review

Click [Review Cine] in the soft menu in panoramic image viewing status to enter cine
reviewing mode.
In cine review status:
 Roll the trackball to review the captured images frame by frame.
 Click [Auto Play] to start or end auto play.
 In auto play mode, click [Auto Play] in the soft menu; or, press/rotate the
corresponding knob to change the play speed. When the speed is 0, the system
exits auto play mode.
 Review to a certain image; click [Set First Frame] to set the start point. Review to
another image; click [Set End Frame] to set the end point. In auto play mode, the
review region is confined to the set start point and end point.

 Click [iScape] item in the soft menu to exit the cine review mode, and there
displays the panoramic image.
 In cine review mode, press <Freeze> on the control panel to return to the
acquisition preparation status.
 Click [Save Cine] to save the images.
5.12.6 Save Image

 Panoramic image viewing mode:
 Press <Save> (with user-defined saving function) to save the extended image to
the default position in the format of FRM.
 Click [Save Cine] item in the soft menu to save the extended image and its series
of images acquired in the format of CIN.
 Cine reviewing mode:
 Press <Save> (with user-defined saving function) to save the single-frame image
to the default position, in the format of FRM.
 Click [Save Cine] to save the extended image and its series of images acquired in
the format of CIN.

5.13 Stress Echo
Stress echo data are provided for reference only, not for
CAUTION: confirming a diagnosis.
5.13.1 About the Stress Echo Feature

The optional Stress Echo feature allows you to capture and review cardiac loops for
multiple-phase (multiple-stage) Stress Echo protocols. It provides tools for ECG-triggered
acquisition, display, selection, comparison, evaluation, and archiving of multiple cardiac
loops during various stages of the Stress Echo portion of an Animal examination.
5.13.2 Acquisition of Stress Echo Loops

A loop is a clip that displays motion of a whole heart cycle or from beginning systole to end
systole, as indicated by the R-wave of the ECG trace and determined by the QT – Time
Table in the Maintenance dialog box.
The loops in a given protocol are acquired by stages (phases), according to stage
configuration (continuous (prospective) or retrospective (non-continuous)).
Loops in non-continuous stages are limited to a specified loop-per-view maximum (such
as four). View labels can be selected only in the configured order. Acquisition is
retrospective; when you click [Save Clip] key or press <Save> on the control panel, the
system saves the previously acquired images.
For an alternative workflow, you can configure stages in Stress Echo protocols using the
Clip Capture option. Loops in continuous stages are limited by time rather than a
maximum number of loops—the system stops acquisition after two minutes. Acquisition is
prospective; when you select the stage label and then press <Save> on the control panel,
the system starts saving newly acquired images. With this workflow, you assign view
labels to the loops after acquisition is complete, using controls in the Stress Echo screen
to select the "preferred" loop for each view.
Tips:
For continuous stage loops, you must assign view labels to use the wall motion scoring
function in the Stress Echo screen.
When you save images, the system places a green checkmark to the right of the view or
continuous stage and then shifts the red arrow to the next view or continuous stage.
To acquire Stress Echo loops:

To acquire Stress Echo loops that are based on the systolic cycle, enable the ECG option.
ECG must be enabled for continuous stages.
1. Click icon on the lower left corner of the screen.
2. The system displays the Select Protocol window with protocol selections. Select the
desired protocol and then click [OK].
The system displays the real-time imaging screen.

If the Stress Echo manual ROI option is selected in the Maintenance dialog box, then
the system also displays a region of interest (ROI). If Acquire Mode is set as
Full-screen in Maintenance, then no ROI box is displayed.
3. If an ROI is displayed, adjust the ROI size and position, click [Fix ROI] or press
<Update> on the control panel to confirm the ROI.
Tips: When you confirm the ROI size by pressing <Update> or click [Fix ROI], you
cannot adjust the ROI size during acquisition but only adjust ROI position through
trackball.
4. Press <Save> on the control panel to start acquisition.
The system displays the Protocol window on the left of the screen, listing the phases
for the selected protocol along with the views of the first phase (Phases are stages).
The system selects the first view for acquisition by default, indicating view selection
by placement of a red mark to the right of the view name.
5. Proceed through each view in each stage using the following instructions (for
non-continuous stages):
 To save acquired images for the selected view, click [Save Clip] on the soft menu
or press <Save> on the control panel, and the system goes to the next view for
acquisition by default.
 To skip the selected view, click [Skip View].
 To skip the selected stage, click [Skip Stage].
 Click [Stages XXX] and [Views XXX] to select the stage and view for image
acquisition (or reacquisition), press <Save> to start acquisition.
Tips: views can be re-acquired until you click [End Acquisition].
At completion of acquisition for each stage, the system advances to the next stage. If
the stage is non-continuous, then the system displays the views of the stage. When
image acquisition is completed for all views and continuous stages, click [End
Acquisition].
If the protocol contains continuous stages (for alternative workflow), then proceed
through each continuous stage using the following instructions:
 To begin saving acquired images for the selected stage, press <Save> on the
control panel or click [Save Clip] on the soft menu.
The system displays a percentage marker below the selected stage indicating the
progress of the continuous capture.
 To stop saving acquired images for the selected stage (before the system
automatically completes the continuous capture), click [Pause Acquisition] or
press <Freeze>, the percentage stops to increase, and you can click [Continue
Acquisition] or press <Freeze> again to continue. To end the current acquisition,
press <Save> on the control panel.
 To skip the selected stage, click the [Skip Stage] on the soft menu.
 To select another continuous stage, position the trackball pointer over the stage
and then press the <Set> on the control panel, or click [Stage XXX] on the soft
menu.
At completion of acquisition for each stage, the system advances to the next stage. If
the stage is non-continuous, then the system displays the views of the stage. When
image acquisition is completed for all views and continuous stages, the system shifts
the red mark to the Stop Grabbing selection in the Protocol window.
6. To start or restart the timer, click [Stage Timer] / [Exam Timer] on the soft menu.
Stage time is displayed at the right side of each stage in the protocol list, while Exam
time is displayed on the left side of the monitor.

Each saved image will be marked with two times T1 and T2, T1 refers to the total time
of the whole acquisition, while T2 means the time the acquisition lasted for a certain
stage.
7. To review loops before ending acquisition, click [Review] icon on the lower left part of
the screen. You can redisplay the real-time imaging screen to continue acquisition by
clicking in the toolbar on the upper part of the screen.
8. To end acquisition and review the acquired images, click [End Acquisition] or press
<End Exam>.
When the acquisition is ended, no stress echo image acquisition can be performed for
the same exam.
5.13.3 Navigation Toolbar
The function of the buttons from left to right separately is:
 : Acquire Mode, return to live imaging from stress echo review screen. Only
available when stress echo acquisition is not yet complete.
 : Select Mode, enables selection of preferred loops.
 : Review Mode, return to stress echo review.
 : Wall Motion Scoring Mode, assign wall motion scores to specific segments
within each view.
 : Indication, enter indications or comments as text or as predefined terms.
 : Save Examination, saves stress echo data with all loops (for each view and
continuous stage).
 : Save Examination (only selected loops), saves only stress echo loops
selected as preferred (one loop for each view).
 : Report Preview, displays report for current mode when available.
 : Print Report, prints report for current mode. Reports are in a PDF format.
 : PrintPdf, export the report in PDF format.
 : Maintenance, displays Maintenance dialog box for protocol customization.
 : Exit, closes stress echo screen and exits stress echo feature.
1 2 3 4 5
 1. Toggle Play.
 2. Frame-by-frame loop review or direct access to first/last loop in series.
 3. Decrease Speed/Increase Speed: Decrease or increase playback speed.

 4. Sweeping Play: Continuous sweeping playback of loops
forward-backward-forward.
 5. Labels on/off: hide/display graphics on loops.


 Specifies loop segment of display.
1 2 3 4
5 6
7 8
 Bookmark Review: turns on/off the bookmark function.

 Scroll Up: Displays loops in previous view.
 Scroll Down: Displays loops in next view.
 Quad/Single: to display all loops of the exam.
 Home: Selects first loop in currently displayed view.
 To Left: Selects previous loop in currently displayed view.
 To Right: Selects the next loop in currently displayed view.
 End: Selects last loop in currently displayed view.
Tips:
1. For a Continuous stage, Scroll Up and Scroll Down buttons display the
preferred loop for the view. If no loop is designated as preferred for the selected view,
these buttons will have no effect.
2. For a Continuous stage, the Home, To Left, To Right and End buttons display loops
saved for the stage (not view).
5.13.4 Selecting Preferred Stress Echo Loops (Select

Mode)
The selected clips are used for analysis in the review mode and wall motion scoring mode.
Select Mode is used for the selection of the best loops of the examination.
When acquisition is ended, select mode is enabled automatically, or, select the Select
Mode toolbar button at the left corner of the screen.
In Select Mode, you can select the representative loop (“preferred” loop) for each view. If
you activate Review Mode without first selecting preferred loops, then the system uses the
default loop selection to represent each view (for non-continuous stages). The default
loop selection is the loop acquired immediately prior to the last loop. For example, if four
loops are acquired for every view, then the default loop selection is the third loop.
Loops for views in non-continuous stages are labeled with the view name at acquisition.
Loops for views in continuous stages are labeled with the view name when you select the
“preferred” loop.

To select “preferred” loops:
1. Activate Select Mode by clicking Select Mode icon on the top of the screen.
The system displays the acquired loops for the first view in the protocol (for
non-continuous stages). If the first stage is continuous, then the system displays the
first set of acquired loops for that stage.
2. Select the loop. Use the buttons displayed during Select Mode to designate another
loop or another view for display.
The system outlines the selected loop in blue graphical boarder to indicate selection
and click the selected loop to cancel its “selected state”.
 Double click a clip, the clip will be selected, and the system will go for clip
selection of the next view.
 Click [Next], [Previous], [First], [Last] to display another loop in the current view.
For a continuous stage, the [Next], [Previous], [First], [Last] buttons display loops
saved for the stage (not the view).
 Select Scroll Up or Scroll Down to display another view.
For a continuous stage, click the Scroll Up and Scroll Down buttons to
display the preferred loop for the view. If no loop is designated as preferred for
the selected view, then these buttons have no effect.
3. Select the stage and view to display all loops for the view and then continue
designating the “preferred” loop for each displayed view until all views are completed.
Description of select mode pertinent soft menu keys:

Selection Description
1.Clip/2.Clip/3.Clip/4.Clip For selecting views in the selected stage.
Next Next four Clips.
Previous Previous four Clips.
First Go to “first” Clips.
Last Go to “last” Clips.
Text “On”/“Off” Function that turns on screen graphic text “On”/“Off”. The
function is the same as Labels on/off icon on the top of the
screen.
Information includes: name of level, name of view, heart rate,
time stamp acquisition, timers, frame slider, loop ID, clip
control. For the cine without distributed view, name of level,
name of view are displayed in “---”.
Apply edit all Clip edit applied to all clips taken.
Bookmark For continuous acquisition, when bookmark is set “On”, only
the selected loops for the current view can be displayed.
Clip Length Set the clip length: Systole, User Defined.
Save Selected Saves only the selected clips for the study.
Save All Saves all the clips acquired for the study.

Selection Description
Suspend Pause the stress echo exam but not end the stress echo
exam.
When stress echo exam is suspended, the user can perform
image acquisition of all other imaging modes, or perform
operations like measurement.
End End the stress echo exam.
Stage To find the stage and press it to select.
View To find the view and press it to select.
Full Screen Select whether to display all loops of the exam or not.
5.13.5 Review Mode

Review mode is used by cardiologist to evaluate clips for cardiac wall motion
abnormalities. Different views, from different stages, will be selected to display to compare
in a wide variety of combinations. The most common workflow is to compare “same views”
but at “different stages” of the exam (Example: PSLA view, Rest stage compared to PSLA
view, Post exercise stage).
 Enter review mode
Select the Review Mode toolbar button at the top of the screen. Or, click
[Review] on the lower left corner of the screen.
 To restrict the display to a selected phase or view
1. Set [Shuffle] as “On” on the soft menu, or select shuffle mode icon on the
monitor.
2. Select the label of the phase or view (for example, Rest or Long Axis).
The system displays all loops that represent the selected phase or view.
 To display phases side by side for the selected view(s)
1. The system include all phase or view in display, select the rightmost, gray box to the
left of each required phase and/or view.
The system inserts a checkmark into each selected gray box.
2. To exclude a phase or view from display, select the rightmost, blue box to the left of
each required phase and/or view.
The system inserts a red X into each selected blue box.
3. Select the Display Selected Loops button on the right.
The system displays selected phases for each selected view side by side.
 To display all views for a specific phase:
Select the phase label (for example, Rest).
 To display all phases for a specific view:
Select the view label (for example, Long Axis).
The system displays all phases for the selected view. If fewer than four phases exist,
then the system also displays phases for the next view.

 To display a loop in full-screen format:
1. Select the loop to activate it.
The system outlines the loop in blue to indicate activation.
2. Select the loop again.
The system displays the loop in full-screen format.
3. To display the loop in its initial size, select the loop again.
Description of review mode pertinent keys (the keys with the same function as in select
mode will not be described below):
Key Description
Perform side by side comparison of same views by different stages
(PSSA, PSLA, 4CH, 2CH at “Rest” compared to PSSA, PSLA, 4CH,
Shuffle 2CH “Post Exercise”). Clips are synchronized.
Selection: On, Off
Shuffle Displays next view when that view is not deselected. (Available only
Forward when the Display Selected Loops button is disabled.)
Shuffle Back Displays previous view when that view is not deselected. (Available only
when the Display Selected Loops button is disabled.)
Display Display loops of all the stages and views selected.
Selected
Indication Open the Indication page for Animal indication.
Select Select the dog ear controls on screen (a dog ear will appear on the right
Bookmarked upper corner of the view if there is more than one loop for a view) or use
the soft menu change/review the bookmarked views. One can quickly
change to the various bookmark clips saved for each view.
Toggle Play: play all loops.
Start of sequence/ End of sequence: direct access to first/last loop in

or series.
Step backward/Step forward: frame-by-frame loop review.

or
Decrease speed/increase speed: decrease or increase playback speed.

or
Sweeping play: continuous sweeping playback of loops

forward-backward-forward.
5.13.5.1 Playing Back Loops

You can play back loops in the Stress Echo screen. By default, the system plays back
loops in the forward direction only, from beginning systole to end systole (end diastole to
end systole). You can play back the loops in both directions, forward from beginning

systole to end systole and then reversed from end systole to beginning systole. You can
change the speed of playback and you can display a specific frame.
 To playback the displayed loops
1. Select the Toggle Play toolbar button at the top of the screen (highlighted).
The system plays the displayed loops in one direction, from beginning systole to end
systole. When the last frame is played, the system restarts playback from the first
frame.
2. To stop playing the displayed loops, select the Toggle Play toolbar button again.
 To playback the displayed loops in both directions (from diastole to systole and then
back to diastole)
Select the Sweeping play toolbar button at the top of the screen (highlighted).
The system initially plays the displayed loops in one direction, from beginning systole
to end systole. When the last frame is played, the system reverses the playback
direction, playing the displayed loops from end systole to beginning systole.
 To change the playback speed
Select the Decrease Speed toolbar button or the Increase Speed toolbar button at the
top of the screen .
 To display a specific frame in the loops
Select one of the following toolbar buttons at the top of the screen :
Start of sequence – displays the first frame of each loop.
Step backward – displays the previous frame of each loop.
Step forward – displays the next frame of each loop.
End of sequence – displays the last frame of each loop.
 To set the cine segment
Drag the inverted triangle on the cine slider . Click [Apply
Edit All] and the edit is applied to all clips.
5.13.6 Wall Motion Scoring and Reports

The WMS-Report lists user-assigned wall motion scores and associated data. Reports
contain the entered indication, if any; and report also contains any entered comments that
are specific to the report. You can include or exclude data from specific phase(s). You can
preview and print the report for the currently selected mode. You can also enable colored
report printing in Maintenance.
Stress echo exam data and the reports can be sent to DICOM.
On the iStation page, if stress echo exam was performed on the Animal, the Animal exam
record will be marked with a tick in the SE Exam list.
5.13.6.1 Entering Indications or Comments for the Reports

You can enter an indication for display in Stress Echo reports.
To enter an indication:

1. Select [Indication] on the soft menu.
2. Use the keyboard to enter text into the Indication dialog box and then click [OK].
Besides, you can insert text for indication:
1. Select [Indication] on the soft menu.
2. Click [Insert Text] on the Indication dialog box to pop up the Select Text to Insert
dialogue box.
3. Select the available texts.
Besides, you can:
 Edit a selected text by clicking [Edit].
 Delete a selected text by clicking [Delete].
 Create a new text by clicking [New].
 Restore the factory-default texts by clicking [Default].
4. Select the text position and choose whether to insert the text in a separate line.
5. Click [OK] to insert the text.
5.13.6.2 Wall Motion Scoring

The Wall Motion Score (WMS) measurement is an application prepared for assisting in
stress echo semi-quantitative evaluations of abnormalities with left ventricular wall motion
or changes in wall thickness. The left ventricle is divided into segments to score each
segment to evaluate the degree of abnormality using the motion of the walls of entire left
ventricle from the sum of scores in each segment. Scoring is displayed in the report.
You can assign wall motion scores to specific portions within each view (representative
loop). You can also assign a normal wall motion score (WMS) to the currently selected
view or to all displayed views.
ASE 16 and ASE 17 two methods of chamber segments divisions are supported. In
addition, each segment can be done 4, 5 and 7 points scoring.
To assign a wall motion score (WMS):
1. Select the Wall Motion Scoring Mode toolbar button at the top of the screen to
activate Wall Motion Scoring Mode.
2. Select a colored number in the lower-right area of the screen.
The signification and color used in segments are listed in the table below.
Score Signification Color
1 Normal Green
2 Hypokinesis Yellow
2.5 SevereHypokinesis Khaki
3 Akinesis Blue
4 Dyskinesis Red
5 Aneurysm Purple
3. Select a loop.
The system outlines the loop in gray to indicate selection.
4. Select the required portion of the WMS graphic that corresponds to the selected loop.

 To assign a normal wall motion score (WMS) to all currently displayed loops:
Select [Set All Normal] on the soft menu or click on the right part of the screen.
 To assign a normal wall motion score (WMS) to the currently selected loop:
Select [Set Current Nomal] on the soft menu or click on the right part of the
screen.
 To switch the position of WMS schemas and the clips:
Select on the lower right of the screen to switch the position of WMS schemas
and the clips.
5.13.6.3 Designating Stages for Inclusion in Reports

You can designate phase data for inclusion in or exclusion from a report.
The following information is always included in WMS-Reports: Animal name, ID, BOD,
gender, date of Stress Echo examination, and any user-entered indication or
report-specific comment, wall-motion scores for each segment, along with the sum and
average for each phase.
To include data for a specific phase:
1. Activate Wall Motion Scoring Mode.
2. Select (highlight) the printer graphic to the left of the phase.
3. To exclude the phase’s data from the report, select the printer graphic again.
5.13.6.4 Previewing and Printing Reports

You can preview and print the report for the currently selected mode.
 To preview the report for the currently selected mode
The Report Preview toolbar button is available only when a printer driver is installed.
Select the Report Preview toolbar button at the top of the screen.
 To print the report for the currently selected mode
The Print toolbar button is available only when a laser printer is connected.
Select the Print toolbar button at the top of the screen.

To exclude stage’s report from printing, click the printer icon (set it as gray in color) at
the left side of the stage.
5.13.7 Maintenance and Protocol
5.13.7.1 Maintenance
You can access the Maintenance dialogue box by clicking the Maintenance toolbar button
at the top of the screen. As shown in the figure below:

Item Function Description
Acquire mode Set the type of ROI: manual ROI or full-screen.
Image compression Set image compression level.
Overlay Select the items to be labeled on each loop.
WMS type Set the methods of chamber segments division.
Printer Set the printer used for report printing.
To customize the length of systolic duration acquired for a specific
heart rate. If “Trigger” of “R-R Systolic” is selected in Protocol
QT-Time Table
Editor. You can add and remove entries in this table. You can also
load the factory defaults.
Heart rate Enter the heart rate.
Syst. duration Enter the systolic duration.
Beep during
Set if to beep during the acquisition.
acquisition
Reset table To reset the QT time table.
QT-Time Table Operation:

 To add an entry:
Enter a heart rate and the referring systolic duration and then click [Update].

 To delete an entry:
Select the required heart rate and systolic duration pair from the QT – Time Table and
then click [Delete].
 To load the factory defaults:
Select the [Factory Settings] button.
5.13.7.2 Protocol Edit

You can create, edit, and delete Stress Echo protocols using the Protocol Editor dialog
box. Your changes will display in the Select Protocol to Load window the next time you
activate the Stress Echo feature.
Access the Protocol Editor dialog box by clicking [Protocol] in Maintenance; or clicking
[Protocol Editor] on the Select Protocol screen. As shown in the figure below:

Protocol name Enter the protocol name.
Stage Set stages for the protocol.
Trigger Set the trigger type.
WMS model Set the methods of chamber segments division.
Displays the acquired loop number as well as the total usable loop
Loop usage
number.
View Set the views for the each stage.
Standard views Set the standard view.
Import Import a protocol.
Export Export a protocol.
New Create a new protocol.
Load Load an existing protocol.
Save Save the change (s) for the protocol.

Delete Delete the protocol.
Quit To remove the Protocol Editor dialogue box.
Creating a Stress Echo Protocol

To create a stress echo protocol:
1. Click [New] button on the right of the Protocol Editor dialog box.
2. Enter the protocol name in the Protocol Name box at the top.
3. For each phase in the protocol:
Select “new” in the Stage list.
Enter a phase name in the Description box.
Select the required option from the Clip Capture drop-down list.
Select the number of loops to acquire (per view in the selected phase) in the Loops
list (for non-continuous stages).
Select the type: exercise or drug.
4. For each view (all views display for each phase):
Select “new” in the View list.
Select a standard view from the Standard View list.
5. Click [Save] to save changes and then click [Quit] to remove the Protocol Editor
dialog box from the screen.
Editing or Deleting a Stress Echo Protocol

To delete a protocol:
Select the protocol or one of its component phases or views and then click [Delete].
To Edit a Stress Echo Protocol:

You cannot edit a protocol during Acquire Mode.
Method one:
1. Select the [Load] button on the right.
The system displays the Select Protocol to load window.
2. Select the protocol and then click [OK].
The system displays the name of the selected protocol in the Protocol Name box and
lists the protocol's phases and views.
3. To change the name of the protocol, enter the required name in the Protocol Name
box.
4. To change the name of a phase, select the phase and then enter the required name
in the Description box.
5. To change the type of clip capture (continuous or retrospective), select the
appropriate option from the Clip Capture drop-down list.
6. To change the number of loops acquired for each view in a phase, select the phase
and then select the required number from the Loops list (for retrospective stages).
7. To change the type of stage, select exercise or drug in the drop-down list.

8. To delete a phase or view, select the phase or view and then press the <Del> on the
keyboard.
9. Click [Save] to save changes and then click [Quit] to remove the Protocol Editor
dialog box from the screen.
Method two:
1. Click an available protocol on the Select Protocol screen.
2. Click [Protocol Editor] to enter the Protocol Editor screen.
3. Follow the steps 3-8 above to finish the protocol editing.
5.13.8 Saving Stress Echo Data

Stress Echo data consists of Stress Echo loops, wall motion scores, and all other
information pertaining to the Stress Echo portion of a Animal examination. You can save
all acquired loops (all loops acquired for each view) or you can just save the preferred
loops (the single representative loop for each view).
 To save all acquired loops
Select the Save Examination toolbar button .

The system saves the stress echo data, including all acquired loops, to the storage
device designated in system presets.
 To save the preferred loops only
You must select preferred loops for the continuous stages before using this save
method.
Select the Save Examination (only selected loops) toolbar button .

The system saves the stress echo data, with only the selected “preferred” loops, to
the storage device designated in system presets.
5.13.9 Exiting the Stress Echo Feature

When you exit the Stress Echo feature, the system removes the display of the Stress
Echo screen and displays the Animal Info screen for entering new Animal information.
If later review of the stress echo data is required, then you must save the stress echo data
before exiting the Stress Echo feature.
To exit the Stress Echo feature:
 Select the Exit toolbar button ; Or,
 Press <End Exam> on the control panel.
5.13.10 Measurement
Suspend the stress echo exam by clicking [Suspend Exam] on the soft menu, press
measurement related keys or buttons to enter cardiology measurement. For details,
please refer to the [Advanced Volume].

5.14 Contrast Imaging
2D contrast imaging is used in conjunction with ultrasound contrast agents to enhance the
imaging of blood flow and microcirculation. Injected contrast agents re-emit incident
acoustic energy at a harmonic frequency which is much more efficient than the
surrounding tissue. Blood containing the contrast agent stands out brightly against a dark
background of normal tissue.
Contrast imaging is an option.
Set MI index by instructions in the contrast agent accompanied
CAUTION: manual.
Read contrast agent accompanied manual carefully before using
contrast function.
NOTE: Be sure to finish setting the parameters before injecting the agent into the
Animal to avoid affecting the image consistency. This is because the agent's
acting time is limited.
The contrast agent used must comply with the relevant local regulations.
5.14.1 Basic Procedures for Contrast Imaging

To perform successful contrast imaging, start with an optimized B image and have the
target region in mind. To perform contrast imaging:
1. Select an appropriate probe and exam mode. Perform 2D imaging to obtain the target
image, then fix the probe.
2. Enter Contrast mode: click [Contrast Imaging] on the soft menu or press the
user-defined Contrast key directly.
3. Adjust the acoustic power experientially to obtain a good image.
Observe the tissue image to find the target view.
4. Inject the contrast agent, and set [Timer 1] to “ON” to start the contrast timing. When
the timer begins to work, the time will be displayed on the screen.
5. Observe the image. Use the [Pro Capture] and [Retro Capture] on the soft menu or
the user-defined keys (defined as prospective capturing and retrospective capturing)
to save the images. Click those soft menu controls again or press <Freeze> to end
the live capture.
Perform several live captures if there are more than one sections of interest.
6. At the end of contrast imaging, set [Timer 1] to “OFF” to exit the timing function.
Perform procedures 3-5 if necessary.
For every single contrast imaging procedure, use [Timer 2] for timing.
If necessary, activate the destruction function by clicking [Destruct] to turn it to “ON”
and destruct the micro-bubbles left by the last contrast imaging, or to observe the
reinfusion effect in a continuous agent injecting process.
7. Exit contrast imaging.

Click [Exit] on the menu in the top-left part of the screen to exit contrast imaging mode,
or press to return to B mode.
5.14.2 Contrast Image Parameters

Parameter Area Display
When entering contrast imaging mode, the screen displays the contrast image. If the [Dual
Live] on the soft menu is “ON”, both the contrast image (marked with “ ”) and tissue
image (marked with “ ”) are displayed (the two window positions can be changed).
Parameter area displays as follows:
FCH Contrast frequency.
D Depth.
G Gain.
Contrast
FR Frame rate.
IP Post processing parameter
DR Dynamic Range.
G Gain
Tissue IP Post processing parameter
DR Dynamic Range.
In real-time mode, the time displayed is the elapsed
Timing (if timer is time.
/
“ON”) In freeze mode, the timer stops working and the
elapsed time is displayed.
Image Optimization
To adjust the contrast image as well as the tissue image, use the left/right keys of soft
menu controls <4> to switch between the menus of tissue image and contrast image.
The parameters in Contrast mode are similar to those in B mode. See chapter B for details.
Special Contrast imaging parameters are introduced below.
Timer
The two timers are used to record the total time of the contrast imaging and the single time
of one contrast exam.
After the image is frozen, Timer 1 is still running, and after unfreezing the image, the
corresponding time can be seen.
Timer 2 stops timing when a contrast exam is frozen, and after unfreezing the image
Timer 2 is off.
NOTE: The starting time displayed may be inconsistent with the actual one due to
system error or some other human error. Check the agent-injecting time.
Set [Timer 1(2)] to “ON” to start timing from the moment you inject the contrast agent. The
screen displays the times in the bottom-right corner.

 The time begins at 0.
 In live mode, the elapsed time is displayed. For example, means the
elapsed time is 8 seconds.
 If the image is frozen during timing, the timer stops working and the elapsed time will
be displayed after defreezing the image.
 Set [Timer 1] or [Timer 2] to “OFF” and the timer stops running.
Micro-bubble Destruction
Function: to destroy the micro-bubbles left by the previous contrast imaging, or observe
the reinfusion effect in a continuous agent injecting process.
 Entering: click [Destruct] on the soft menu to enable the micro-bubble destruction
function.
 Parameters: set the parameters using the soft menu.
 DestructAP: adjust the destruct acoustic power.
 Destruct Time: adjust the destruct time with the adjusting range of 100-2000ms
Dual Live
In live mode or freeze mode, set the soft menu item [DualLive] to “ON” to enable the dual
live function. Both the contrast image (marked with “ ”) and the tissue image (marked
with “ ”) are displayed (the position can be changed). Use the left/right keys of soft menu
controls <4> to switch between the menus of tissue image and contrast image so that you
can adjust the corresponding parameter.
Tip:
 In dual live mode, the screen displays the contrast image and tissue image
 In freeze mode, only one cine review progress bar displays as the contrast image
and tissue image are reviewed synchronously.
 Image position
Use [CEUSPos: XX] to adjust the position of the contrast image.
When it is selected as “Left”, the image displays at the left side of the screen.
Image Saving
 Live capture
In live mode, you can save the images of interest by clicking [Pro Capture] and [Retro
Capture] or press the user-defined save key.
 Cine saving
In live mode, press the <Freeze> key on the control panel to enter cine review status.
5.14.3 Measurement, Comments and Body Marks

The system supports image measurement, comment and body mark functions. For details,
see the relevant sections.

5.15 Elastography
Elastography images are provided for reference only, not for
CAUTION: confirming diagnoses.
Elastography imaging is an option.
5.15.1 Basic Procedure for Elastography

1. Perform a B scan to locate the region.
2. Select the appropriate probe and exam mode.
3. Click [Elasto] on the soft menu or press the user-defined key to enter the mode.
Adjust the ROI according to the actual situation.
4. Select the probe according to the experience and actual situation.
5. Adjust the image parameters to obtain the optimized image and necessary
information.
6. Adjust the ROI on the frozen image if necessary.
7. Save the image or review the image if necessary.
8. Perform measurement or add comments/body marks to the image if necessary.
9. Estimate the hardness of lesions according to the results.
10. Press to return to B mode.
5.15.2 Pressure Hint Curve

The screen displays the pressure curve in real time:
The X-axis represents time and the Y-axis represents pressure.
ROI Adjustment
Description To adjust the width and position of the ROI in Elasto imaging.
Operation When the ROI box is solid line, roll the trackball to change its position.
When the ROI box is a dotted line, roll the trackball to change the size.
Press <Set> to switch between the solid line and the dotted line status.
Smooth
Description To adjust the smooth feature of the Elasto image.
Operation To adjust the image smoothness. Adjust using the [Smooth] on the soft
menu.

Opacity
Description To adjust the opacity feature of the Elasto image.
Operation Use [Opacity] on the soft menu.
Invert
Description To invert the E color bar and therefore invert the colors of benign and
malignant tissue.
Operation Click [Invert] on the soft menu.
Single E
Description To switch between the B+E dual window and the single E window.
E represents the Elastography image.
Operation Click [Single E] on the soft menu. When the button is highlighted in green,
the screen displays the single window E image.
Map
Description To select different maps for observation.
Operation Use [Map] on the soft menu to select the map.
5.15.3 Mass Measurement

Press <Measure> to enter measurement status.
You can measure shell thick, strain ratio, strain-hist, etc.
For details, see [Advanced Volume].
5.15.4 Cine Review

Press <Freeze> or open an elastography imaging cine file to enter cine review status.

5.16 Image Preset
In the Image Preset interface, you can preset image parameters of exam modes and soft
menu and menu layout of imaging modes.
5.16.1 Image Preset

The image preset is used to set image parameters for all the probes and a specific probe
in a specific exam mode. The setting methods are similar although parameter items are
different in each image mode.
1. Press <Setup> on the keyboard to enter the Setup menu.
2. Select [Image Preset] to enter the B mode parameters preset.
3. Select the exam mode and probe.
 Select “Adult ABD” from the “Exam Mode” drop-down list.
 Select a probe from the “Probe” drop-down list.
4. Image parameter preset
 The [Adult ABD-All Probe] field on the left side of the screen displays the
parameter preset for all probes in Adult ABD exam mode.
Parameter Type Description
Acoustic
Drop-down list To set the default acoustic power.
Power
TIC, TIB, TIS, to choose the item to be displayed on the
Thermal index Radio button
screen.
To set the default status of colorize function in B mode,
Colorize Check box
to turn on or off.
Colorize Map Drop-down list To set the default colorize map in B mode.
TSI Drop-down list To set the default TSI mode for B mode.
iTouch Drop-down list To set the default gain of iTouch in B mode.
iTouch Bright Drop-down list To set the default brightness of iTouch.
 The [Adult ABD] field on the right side of the screen displays the parameter preset
for the probe in Adult ABD exam mode.
Drop-down
Depth To set the default depth in B mode.
list
Drop-down
Frequency To set the default frequency of the probe.
list
Drop-down
FOV To set the default FOV in B mode.
list
Drop-down
Focus Position To set the default focus position in B mode.
list
Drop-down
Focus Number To set the default focus number in B mode.
list

Drop-down To set the default steer angle for the linear probe in B
Steer
list mode.
To set if ExFOV(Trapezoid) function is default to be
ExFOV(/Trapezoid) Check box
open for the probe in B mode.
Drop-down
Line Density To set the default line density in B mode.
list
Drop-down
B Gain To set the default gain value in B mode.
list
Drop-down
THI gain To set the default THI gain value in B mode.
list
Drop-down
B Gray Map To set the default gray map in B mode.
list
Drop-down
THI Gray Map To set the default gray map in THI mode.
list
Drop-down To set the default iBeam value for the probe in B
iBeam
list mode.
Radio To set the default horizontal flipping mode: Left or
L/R Flip
button Right.
Radio
U/D Flip To set the default vertical flipping mode: Up or Down.
button
Drop-down
Rotation To set the default rotate angle in B mode.
list
Drop-down
B IP list To set the default B IP value.
Button
Drop-down
THI IP list To set the THI IP parameters.
Button
High FR Check box To set if high FR is turned on by default.
 Click [Record Current] to record all the currently-used setting and values for each
preset image parameter.
 Click [Load Factory] to restore the settings to the original factory default.
5. Exit:
 Click [OK] to save the settings and exit.
 Click [Cancel] to abandon the settings and exit.
5.16.2 Soft Menu and Menu Preset

Click [Menu Preset] on the Image Preset screen to open the Menu Preset page. The
default is the currently-used probe in the current imaging mode.
The system supports menu preset of all image modes including image freeze, cine review
and sub modes (3D View, Static 3D, 4D, Smart 3D, Reset ROI, etc.) with all probe types.
Menu items in cine reviewing of all image modes are the same.

Since the preset operations are the same for different image modes and status, the
following case (linear probe in real time B mode) is taken as an example.
5.16.2.1 Soft Menu Preset

The soft menu preset screen is shown as the figure below:
1. Select the probe type: select “Linear” in the corresponding drop-down list.
2. Select image mode: select “B” in the drop-down list.
3. Select image status: [Active] or [Freeze].
4. Click [Softkey] on the right side of screen to begin the setting.
 Add the item (s)
Select an item in the Available Item list, and click to add the item to the
soft menu.
Double click the item in the Available Item list continuously to add the items one
by one.
Click to select all items in the Available Item list to the soft menu.
 Withdraw the item (s)
Select an item in the soft menu page, and click to delete the item in the
soft menu.
Click to delete all the selected items in the soft menu.
 Position adjusting
Position interchange: select an item in the soft key page, and then click a blank
button or a different item to interchange the position.
Change position of the selected items: select an item on the right side box and
click [Up], [Down], [Left] or [Right] button to move the position of the item.

Blank line
Click [Add Blank Line] to add a new blank line.
Click [Del Blank Line] to delete an extra line.
5. Click [OK] to complete the setting.
5.16.2.2 Menu Preset

On Menu Preset page, click Menu on the right side to enter the menu preset page.
1. Click [Image Params] page tab to enter image parameter setting page.
2. Select the probe type: select “Linear” in the corresponding drop-down list.
3. Select image mode: select “B” in the drop-down list.
4. Select image status: select [Active] or [Freeze].
5. Click [Menu] on the right side of screen to begin the setting.
 Add/withdraw item(s)
Click to add the selected item in the Available Item list to Menu page;
or, double click the item in the Available Item list continuously to add the items
one by one.
Click to add all items in the Available Item list to Menu page.
Click to withdraw the selected item in the Menu page to the Available
Item list.
Click to withdraw all the items on the Menu page to the Available Item
list.
 Change position of an item
To change position of an item, select the item in the right side box and click [Move
Up] or [Move Down].
6. Click [OK] to confirm the setting and exit Menu Preset page.

6 Display & Cine Review
6.1 Image Display
6.1.1 Splitting Display

The system supports dual-split and quad-split display format. However, only one window
is active at one time.
 Dual-split: press <Dual> on the control panel to enter the dual-split mode, and
using <Dual> to switch between the two images; press on the control panel
to exit.
 Quad-split: press <Quad> on the control panel to enter the dual-split mode, and
using <Quad> to switch between the two images; press on the control panel
to exit.
Imaging modes support splitting display: B mode, Color mode, Power mode, TVI
mode, TEI mode.
6.1.2 Spot
Procedures:
1. In image scanning mode, press <Zoom> to enter the sample volume definition status.
2. Define the sample volume: roll the trackball to change the box size and position,
press <Set> to toggle between setting the size and position. And after sample volume
is set, press <Zoom> again to enter spot zoom status.
3. Click [Magnify] on the soft menu to change the magnification factor. The system
provides a zoom range of 1-10. Roll the trackball to move the magnified image.
4. Exit: in spot zooming status, press <Zoom> again exit image magnification.
Tips:
 Spot zooming only can be realized on a scanning image.
 The size and position of sample volume box will be changed along with scanning
depth and area.
6.1.3 Pan
Procedures:
1. Click [Magnify] on the soft menu to directly enter the pan zooming status; or press
<Zoom> in freezing status. Image-in-image is displayed.
2. Click [Magnify] on the soft menu or rotate the multifunctional knob to change the
magnification factor. The system provides a zoom range of 1-10.
3. Exit pan zooming: press <Zoom> knob.
Display & Cine Review 6-1

6.1.4 iZoom (Full-screen Zooming)
 Function: to magnify the image in full screen.
According to the region to be zoomed, the system supports two types of full-screen
zooming:
The first type is to zoom in the standard area, including image area, parameter
area, image banner and so on.
 The second type is to zoom in the image area only.
 Manner:
1. User-defined key setting:
(1) Enter "[Setup] -> [System Preset] -> [Key Config]".
(2) Select a function-free key in the function list.
(3) Select "iZoom" in the "Other" page.
(4) Click [OK] to complete the setting.
2. Open the image (or the under scanning image), press the user-defined iZoom key
once to zoom in image in the way of the first type, and then press the key again to
zoom in the image in the way of the second type.
3. Press the user-defined key again to return to normal status.
 In iZoom status:
Press any key of the soft menu controls, the soft menu will appear in the screen for
image adjustment.
Measurements, adding comments and body marks are allowed in the status.
It is the currently zooming region that is used for video output, image saving and print
functions.
Press <Exam>, <Patient>, <iStation>, <Review> or enter Report or Preset, the
system will exit zoom status.
6.1.5 Freeze/ Unfreeze the Image

Press <Freeze> on the control panel to freeze a scanning image. In freeze mode, the
probe stops transmitting acoustic power, and all images as well as the parameters are
kept still.
Tip: after freezing an image, the system may enter cine review, measure, comment adding,
or body mark mode, which is dependent upon preset. (Setting path: [Setup] -> [System
Preset] -> [Image Preset] -> "Freeze Config")
Press <Freeze> in freeze mode to unfreeze the image, the system continues image
scanning.
6.1.5.1 Imaging Mode Switching When Frozen

Imaging mode switching in freeze mode follows the following principles:
 In splitting display B mode, press to exit splitting display mode and display
the image of the currently activated window in full screen.
 In freeze mode, the system supports imaging mode switching between the
sub-modes (only for the activated window). For example, if the frozen image is of
B+C+PW mode, then the system supports imaging mode switching between
B+C+PW, B+C, B+PW and B.
6-2 Display & Cine Review

 The imaging mode and parameters of an unfrozen image is the same as the
corresponding one that before frozen; but the display format is the same as the
one before unfrozen.
6.1.5.2 Imaging Display Format Switching When Frozen

Image display format switching in freeze mode follows the following principles:
 2D＋M/PW (Press <Freeze> in 2D＋M/PW scanning mode)
If the imaging mode before frozen is 2D (frozen) +M/PW (real time) or 2D (real time)
+M/PW (frozen), then in freeze mode, you can switch between 2D (frozen) +PW
(activated) or 2D (activated) +PW (frozen) (2D(real time)+M(real time) or
2D(frozen)+M(real time)) by pressing <Update> on the control panel.
 Dual/quad splitting display mode (Press <Freeze> in dual/quad splitting display
mode)
 When enters freeze mode, the default activated window is the real-time window
before frozen. Other image windows display the corresponding cine memories, if
a certain cine memory is empty, then no image is displayed.
 Press <Dual> or <Quad> to switch between dual-splitting and quad-splitting
modes.
 Press on the control panel to enter the single display format, which displays
the currently activated window. In single display format, press <Dual> or <Quad>
to switch between dual-splitting and quad-splitting mode.
 Unfrozen: in splitting display status, when you unfreeze the image you can only
unfreeze the image in the activated window, other images still keep frozen. In
single-window display status, the system displays single image after being
unfrozen.
6.2 Cine Review

After you press <Freeze>, the system allows you to review and edit the images prior to the
image frozen. This function is known as cine review. The magnified images can also be
reviewed after <Freeze> is pressed, and the operating method is the same. You can
perform post process operations, measurements, comments adding and body marks on
the images being reviewed.
The system supports manual review as well as automatic review. The default mode is
Manual Cine, but you can switch between Auto Cine and Manual Cine.
In addition, the system supports the images reviewed along with physiological waveforms,
if the detection of physiological waveforms is performed.
1. Cine Review images can be inadvertently combined
CAUTION: in-between separate Animal scans. The cine memory
must be cleared at the end of the current Animal and the
onset of the next new Animal by selecting the <End
Exam> on the control panel.
2. Cine files stored in the system’s hard drive shall contain
Animal information, to avoid the selection of an incorrect
image file and potential misdiagnosis.

6.2.1 Entering/ Exiting Cine Review
 To enter cine review:
 Enter "[Setup] -> [System Preset] -> [Image Preset]" and set "Status after Freeze"
to be "Cine". Press <Freeze> to freeze the image and enter the cine status, the
<Cine> indicator lights on automatically.
 Open cine files in thumbnail, iStation or Review, the system enters automatic cine
review status.
 To exit cine review:
 Press <Freeze> again, the system will return to image scanning and exit cine
review.
 Press <Cine> or <Esc>, the images are still frozen but the system exits cine
review status.
6.2.2 Cine Review in 2D Mode

 Manual cine review
After entering the cine review of 2D mode, rolling the trackball or rotating the
multifunctional knob will display the cine images on the screen one by one.
If you roll the trackball to the left, the review sequence is reversed to the
image-storing sequence, thus the images are displayed in descending order.
Whereas, if you roll the trackball to the right, the review sequence is the same as the
image-storing sequence, thus the images are displayed in ascending order. When the
reviewing image reaches the first or the last frame, further rolling the trackball will
display the last or first frame.
The cine progress bar at the bottom of the screen (as shown in the figure below):
 Auto Review
 Reviewing all
a) In the manual cine review status, click [Auto Play] in the soft menu to activate
auto cine review.
b) Reviewing speed: In the auto cine review status, click [Auto Play] in the soft
menu to adjust the review speed. The available values are ×0, ×1/10, ×1/5,
×1/4, ×1/3, 1/2, ×1, ×2, and × 3.
c) In auto review status, Click [Auto Play] to be 0, or roll the trackball to enter
manual review, or press <Cine> to exit cine reviewing.
 Setting Region of Auto Review
You can set a segment of cine loop which can be reviewed automatically. After the
auto review region is set, the auto cine review can only be performed within this

region; but the manual cine review can be performed beyond this region. When the
cine file is saved, only the images within this region are saved.
a) Set first frame: Manually review the images until the frame which you want to
set it as start point, and then click [Set First Frame] to set it as the start point.
b) Set end frame: Manually review the images until the frame which you want to
set it as end point, and then click [Set End Frame] to set it as the end point.
c) Use the soft menu control to click [Auto Play] to set the value (except 0), then
the system enters the auto cine status, and use this control to adjust speed.
d) Click [Auto Play] again or roll the trackball to enter manual review status; or
press <Cine> to exit cine reviewing.
e) Click [Skip to First]/ [Skip to Last] to review the first or last image.
f) Click [Save Cine] in the soft menu to save the cine images of the set region.
Tips: you can perform cine review on each image window in the dual/ quad
splitting mode.
6.2.3 Cine Review in M or D Mode

Enter cine review in M or D mode, and then roll the trackball or rotating the multifunctional
knob, the cine images are displayed on the screen one by one.
Roll the trackball to the left, the review progress slider moves to the left, the images moves
to the right, and the earlier stored images are invoked. Whereas roll the trackball to the
right, the review progress slider moves to the right, and the images move to the left, the
recently stored images are invoked. When you review the images until the earliest or the
latest frame, further rolling the trackball will display the last or first frame.
The cine progress bar at the bottom of the screen (as shown in the figure below):
Cine review operations are the same as those of 2D mode.
6.2.4 Linked Cine Review

The linked cine review refers to review of the images captured at the same moment.
 Dual live mode(B+C)
 B+M
 PW+B duplex mode
 PW+C+B triplex mode
There displays the frame mark on the time mark of M/PW image indicating the current
2D image. In statuses other than duplex or triplex mode, you can only review images of
the currently active window, use the <Update> to switch the window (if it is in Dual-split or
Quad-split window, use <Dual> or <Quad>).

6.2.5 Review Play
The system provides auto-play of cine file in the review screen.
1. Activate the feature by selecting “Enable Play” in the path: [Setup] -> [System Preset]
-> [General].
2. Enter Review screen.
3. Select different values for “Layout” to change cine file display.
4. Select “Play Speed”: fast, medium and slow.
6.3 Image Compare
6.3.1 Cine Compare

1. In Review screen, select the image files to be compared: click two or more than two
image files of the same exam or exams of the same Animal.
2. Click [Compare] to enter into image compare mode.
3. Review the images of different image windows (cine replaying can’t be performed for
single-frame image file), press <Update> to switch the active image window, and roll
the trackball to review the images.
 If two image files are to be compared, the screen displays in dual-split mode
when come into image compare.
 If more than two image files are to be compared, the screen displays in quad-split
mode when come into image compare.
 For image compare of more than 4 image files, you can first select an image
window, and double click a thumbnail, then the image will be displayed in the
selected image window.
 Switch to single, dual, or quad mode by pressing , <Dual>, or <Quad>.
4. Adjust the image parameters or do other operations (like image zoom in/zoom out,
comment) if necessary.
5. Save the image.
6. In non-single display format, image will be saved in BMP-format; in single display
format, FRM image will be saved in FRM-format, and CIN image file will be saved in
CIN-format.
7. Click [Return] or press <Freeze> to exit image compare.
6.3.2 Frame Compare

1. Freeze the image in B/C mode, press the user-defined key (already assigned the
function “Frame Compare”) or click [Frame Compare] on the soft menu to be "On" to
enter the windows of different frames. Besides, you can double click the cine file in
the thumbnail area to go for same cine different images compare.
The two windows display the same image when initially enter into image compare.
2. Roll the trackball or rotate the multifunctional knob to review the images; switch the
window by pressing <Update>.

3. Adjust the image parameters or do other operations (like image zoom in/zoom out,
comment) if necessary.
4. Save the image.
5. Click [Frame Compare] again, or press the user defined key again, to return to freeze
mode; press <Freeze> to go to image scanning.
Tips: image compare only can be performed on single-format B/C mode images only.
6.4 Cine Saving

In freeze mode, click [Save Cine] in the soft menu or menu to save the cine.
After the cine is successfully saved, there is a thumbnail displayed on the screen.
You can also perform cine saving by set user-defined shortcut keys: [Setup] -> [System
Preset] -> [Key Config]. (For details, please refer to “14.1.7 Key Config”)
6.5 Live Capture

Live capture refers to save images or cines in image scanning status, and after the
storage, the system continues image scanning.
Live capture can be divided into 2 kinds: retrospective and prospective saving.
Retrospective saving is to save the specified images before the current moment that is to
save the images stored in the cine memory to the system hard disk. Prospective saving is
to save the specified images later than the current moment that is to save the images to
both the cine memory and the system hard disk.
To perform a live capture:
 In scanning mode, press the user-defined key for live capture (for user-defined
key setting, please refer to "14.1.7 Key Config").
 Click [Pro Capture] or [Retro Capture] on the soft menu in contrast real-time
mode.
6.6 Cine Memory
6.6.1 Cine Memory Setting

There are 2 ways of cine memory split: auto and split.
Setting path: select "Auto" or "Split" for cine memory in [Setup] -> [System Preset] ->
[Image Preset].
Where,
 "Auto" for the cine memory indicates the system splits the cine memory as per the
number of B image windows.
 “Split” indicates the system always splits the cine memory, even if in the single-B
window, the system splits the cine memory into two as well. You can press to
switch and display the images in either memory, so you can compare images in
Split mode.
The memory capacity is evenly distributed as per splitting number, as shown in the
following table (Taking B images in low density as an example, the capacity of B cine
memory is N frames):

Imaging Mode Single-B/ Color Dual Quad
Split
Auto One memory, with The memory splits into The memory splits into
capacity N frames. two, with capacity N/2 four, with capacity N/4
frames each frames each
Split The memory splits The memory splits into The memory splits into
into two, with two, with capacity N/2 four, with capacity N/4
capacity N/2 frames frames each frames each
each
6.7 Cine Settings

You can set the cine length via “[Setup] -> [System Preset] -> [General]”. The items are
shown as follows:
 Non-live storage
 For Time without ECG(s), 1~60s.
 For Time (with ECG Loop): the unit is Beat, 1~16.
 Live capture
 Type: Retrospective, Prospective.
 Cine length.

7 ECG
The system can be configured with the optional ECG module. In that case, the ECG signal
is displayed on the image, and can be reviewed simultaneously with the image.
 When the system is connected with the ECG module:
 The Physio menu is available.
 The ECG icon including heart-shaped symbol and heart rate symbol are
displayed on the screen.
 The system supports ECG signal from ECG lead.
1. DO NOT use the physiological traces for diagnosis and
WARNING: monitoring.
2. To avoid electric shock, the following checks shall be
performed prior to an operation:
The ECG electrode cable shall not be cracked, frayed or
show any signs of damage or strain.
The ECG electrode cable shall be correctly connected.
You should use the ECG leads provided with the ECG
module. Otherwise it may result in electric shock.
3. The ECG electrode cable must be connected to the
system first. Only after the cable is connected to the
system, can the Animal be connected to the ECG
electrodes. Failure to follow these instructions may
subject the Animal to electric shock.
4. DO NOT place the ECG electrodes directly in contact the
Animal’s heart; otherwise it may lead to stop of the
Animal’s heartbeat.
5. DO NOT apply the ECG electrodes if the voltage exceeds
15 volts. This could produce an electric shock.
6. Before using high frequency electric surgical unit, high
frequency therapeutic equipment or defibrillator, be sure
to remove the ECG electrode from the Animal, in order to
prevent electric shock.
7. Conductive parts of electrodes and associated
connectors for ECG should not contact other conductive
parts including earth/grounding.
8. Frequent trampling or squeezing on the cables may
result in cable break-down or fracture.
NOTE: When abnormality is detected in physio trace, please check if ECG leads are
properly connected with the system.
ECG 7-1
7.1 ECG Operation Basic Procedures
1. Connect the ECG device.
Set ECG parameters if necessary.
 Turn off the power supply of the system, and connect the ECG module to the
system (For connection, please refer to “2.8 Extend Modules”)
 Turn on the power supply of the system
 Place the ECG electrodes on the Animal’s body
2. Enter physio operation status:
 Press ECG user-defined key (set in “[Setup] -> [System Preset] ->[Key Config]”).
 Move the cursor to the menu; navigate the cursor onto [Physio] and press <Set>
or the multifunctional knob.
3. Select [ECG] to be “On”, and the heart-shaped symbol appears on the upper right
part of the screen.
4. Switch the imaging modes and display formats, and adjust relevant parameters to
optimize the image.
5. Parameter adjustment:
On the Physio page, you can adjust [Speed], [ECG Gain], [ECG Pos].
6. Freeze the images and review them. For details, please refer to “7.4 ECG Review”
7. Exit ECG mode, and remove ECG electrodes from the Animal.
In ECG mode, set [ECG] to be “Off”, the ECG waveform disappears and the system
exits ECG mode.
7.2 ECG Setting

Enter “[Setup] -> [Image Preset] -> Physio” to preset the ECG mode parameters.
 Menu Preset
Click [Menu Preset] in the Image Preset screen to enter the menu preset page, and
click “Physio” page tab to go for the setting.
Display Function: to set if to display ECG trace on the screen.
Function: to set the vertical position of the ECG trace on the image display.
Position
Value: 0%-100%, in increments of 5%.
Display
Function: to set if to display Animal heart rate on the screen.
HR
Function: to set the amplitude of ECG trace.
Gain
Value: 0-30, in increments of 1.
7-2 ECG
7.3 Parameter Description
Function: to control the display of ECG trace in live status.
Value: On/Off, On is to display the trace, while Off is to hide the trace.
ECG
In scanning mode, turn off ECG display will stop ECG signal acquisition.
In freeze mode, this is used to show or hide the ECG trace.
Function: to set the amplitude of ECG trace.
ECG Gain Method: click [Gain] in the soft menu or menu.
Value: 0-30, in increments of 1.
Function: to set the vertical position of the ECG trace on the image display.
ECG
Method: click [ECG Pos] in the soft menu or menu.
Position
Value: 0%-100%, in increments of 5%.
Function: change the speed of the physio trace.
Value: 1-4
Speed
The refresh speed of the physio signal on B image is independent from the
refresh speed of timeline refresh speed (M mode, PW and CW mode)
7.4 ECG Review

When an image is frozen, the ECG waveform will be frozen at the same time. When
images are reviewed with the ECG electrodes connected, the ECG waveform is the
reference for time.
After the images are frozen, all real time images are in the status of linked review.
The frame position marker indicates the time relationship between the currently reviewed
2D image and the ECG trace or M/D image.
ECG 7-3
8 Measurement
You can perform measurements on a zoomed image, cine reviewing image, real-time
image, or frozen image. For measurements details, please refer to the [Advanced
Volume].
1. Be sure to measure areas of interest from the most
WARNING: optimal image plane to avoid misdiagnosis from
inaccurate measurement values.
2. To obtain accurate Doppler flow measurement values,
make sure the transmitting beam is not perpendicular to
the flow, otherwise false readings and potential
misdiagnosis may result.
1. If an image is unfrozen or the mode is changed during a

CAUTION: measurement, the calipers and measurement data will be
cleared from the screen. The general measurement data
will be lost (the application measurement data are stored
in the report).
2. If the system is turned off or <End Exam> is pressed
during a measurement, the data not saved will be lost.
3. In Dual-B imaging mode, the measurement results of the
merged image may be inaccurate. Therefore, the results
are provided for reference only, not for confirming a
diagnosis.
8.1 Basic Operations

 To enter/ exit measurement
Press the user-defined key for caliper (refer to "14.1.7 Key Config" for user-defined
key setting) to enter general measurement.
Press <Measure> to enter application measurement.
Press <Caliper> (user-defined) key or <Measure> again to exit.
 Measurement result and help information
The system displays and updates measurement results in the result window.
The help information concerning measurement and calculation is displayed in the
Help Information area at the bottom of the screen.
Measurement 8-1
8.2 General Measurements
8.2.1 2D General Measurements

2D general measurements refer to general measurements on images of B, Color, Power
or iScape imaging modes. The measurements listed below can be performed:
Measurement
Function
Tools
Distance Measures the distance between two points of interest.
The distance between probe surface and the probing point along
Depth
ultrasound beam.
Angle The angle between two intersected planes.
Area Measures the area and perimeter of a closed region.
Volume The volume of a target.
The length of two line segments, which are perpendicular to each
Cross Line
other.
Parallel Line The distance between each pair of parallel lines in a sequence.
Trace Length Measures the length of a curve on the image.
Measures the lengths of any two line segments and the calculated
Distance Ratio
ratio.
Area Ratio The areas of any two regions and the calculated ratio.
The grayscale distribution of ultrasonic echo signals in a closed
B histogram
region.
B profile The grayscale distribution of ultrasonic echo signals across a line.
Color Velocity Color flow velocity (only valid for Color mode).
Measures blood flow through some vascular cross section per unit
Volume Flow
time.
Color Velocity Detects velocity profile as well as diameter of the maximum
Profile diameter vessel to get blood flow volume per unit time.
Displays the strain ratio using the histogram, strain ratio = strain
Strain-Hist (Option)
(normal tissue)/strain (lesion).
8-2 Measurement
8.2.2 M General Measurements
M general measurements refer to general measurements on M mode, Color M mode,
Free Xros M mode images. The measurements listed below can be performed:
Measurement
Function
Tools
Distance The vertical distance between two points.
Time The time interval between any two points.
Measures the distance and time between two points and calculates
Slope
the slope.
Measures the time of n (n≤8) cardiac cycles and calculates the heart
HR
rate in M mode image.
Calculates the average velocity by measuring the distance and time
Velocity
between two points.
8.2.3 Doppler General Measurements

Doppler general measurements refer to general measurements on PW/CW mode images.
The measurements listed below can be performed:
Measurement
Function
Tools
Time The time interval between any two points.
N intervals (n≤8) are measured to calculate a PW mode derived HR
HR
value in Beats Per Minute (BPM).
On the Doppler mode image, measure velocity, PG (pressure
D Velocity gradient) and spectrum correction angle of a point on the Doppler
spectrum waveform and etc.
Measure the velocities of two points and their time interval on the
Acceleration Doppler image, and calculates the acceleration, pressure gradient,
velocity difference and correction angle.
On the PW mode image, one or several Doppler waveforms are
D Trace
traced to obtain speed and PG, etc.
Measure the Peak Systolic (PS) velocity and End Diastolic (ED)
PS/ED velocity on the Doppler spectrum, and calculates resistance index
(RI), S/D and correction angle.
Vas Area Measures the area of vessels on the image.
Measure two D velocity values on one or two spectrum and calculate
Velocity Ratio
the ratio to analysis the flow information.
VTI Ratio Measure two VTI values on the spectrum and calculate the ratio.
Measurement 8-3
8.3 Application Measurement
The system can be configured with the following application measurement packages
corresponding to the application packages (refer to "2.5 System Configuration" for
details):
 Abdomen measurements - Used for measurements of abdominal organs (liver, gall
bladder, pancreas and kidney, etc.) and large abdominal vessels.
 Reproduction measurements- Used for animal reproduction measurements.
 Cardiac measurements- Used for cardiac function measurements and other
parameters measurements.
 Small Part measurements – Used for small parts such as thyroid.
 Vessel measurements – Used for carotid, cerebral, upper and lower extremities
vessels, etc.
8-4 Measurement
9 Comments and Body
Marks
9.1 Comments (Annotations)

Comments can be added to an ultrasound image to bring attention, notate or
communicate information observed during the examination. You can add comments to:
zoomed image, cine review image, real-time image, frozen image. You can type the
character as comments; insert the pre-defined comments from the comment library; insert
arrow markers, or trace a graphics.
You must ensure that the entered comments are correct.
WARNING: Incorrect comments may cause misdiagnosis!
9.1.1 To Add Comments

1. To enter comment status:
 Press the <Comment>, and the cursor becomes “|”.
 Press any alphanumeric key, and the corresponding letter or numeral is displayed
besides the cursor.
 Press the <Arrow> to enter the arrow-adding status.
Tips: when the system entered comment status, the default characters entered are
uppercase. You can see the <Caps Lock> indicator lights on.
2. Place the cursor to the desired place to set the comment location. Add new comment
to the image according to actual situation. Here, you can modify, move, delete, hide or
display the completed comments.
3. To exit comment status:
 In the comment status, press <Comment>.
 Or press <ESC> or other operating mode keys, such as <Measure> etc.
 In the arrow-adding status, press the <Arrow>.
9.1.2 Comment Menu

You can adjust relevant settings in comment status via menu or the soft menu.
 Display or hide the soft menu
After entering the comment status, pressing the <Menu> or the multifunctional knob
will show or hide the Comment Text Library menu.
Comments and Body Marks 9-1

 Home of comments
Move the cursor to the desired location for a comment and click [Set Home]. The
current position of the cursor is set to be the default position of the comment adding.
When clicking [Home], the cursor will return to the default setting position.
Assign the user-defined key for the set home function in “[Setup] → [System Preset]
→ [Key Config]”.
 Change Font Size/Arrow Size
 Click [Font Size] to change the font size of comment: Small, Mid, Big.
 Click [Arrow Size] to change the arrow size of comment: Small, Mid, Big.
 Navigating through comment libraries
 Press <Menu> to show the comment menu, and select the menu title to change
the comment library (the available ones are those customized libraries for all the
exams assigned to the current probe).
 Click [Library] on the soft menu to change among comment text libraries (the
available ones are those customized libraries for all the exams assigned to the
current probe). The default is the customized comment text library in the current
exam mode.
When entered the comment status, the system displays the customized comment text
library for the current exam. If there is no customized comment text library for the current
exam, it will display the comment text libraries of all the exam modes assigned for the
current probe. And if no text library for all the exam modes is customized, no comment text
will be displayed.
Please refer to “14.6 Comment Preset” for comment preset for the specific exam mode.
 ABC Display
Click [ABC Display] to display or hide the added comments. Assign the user-defined
key for the function in “[Setup] → [System Preset] → [Key Config]”.
 Set comment language
Click [English] to turn on or off the English comments. If “English” is turned on, the
comments will display in English; if turn off, the comments will display in the language
you set.
If the current language is English, this selection is not available.
 Trace
Click [Trace] to enter the trace commenting status.
9.1.3 Adding Comments

 Typing comment characters
1. To set the comment location:
Roll the trackball or press directional keys on the control panel to move the cursor to
the desired location for comments.
2. To type the alphanumeric characters:
 Type the alphanumeric characters through the qwerty (The default characters are
uppercase).
 To type the upper characters, press <Shift> on the control panel and the
character key at the same time.
3. Move to a new line:
In the edit status (the characters are in green color), press <Enter> to move the cursor
to the new line, and the location of the cursor is aligned with that of the first line.
9-2 Comments and Body Marks

4. In the edit status, move the trackball or press the multifunctional knob to confirm the
character added, and the color of the character added turns yellow.
 Adding a Comment Text
Move the cursor onto the desired comment text in the menu and press <Set> or the
multifunctional knob, and then the system adds the selected comment text on the set
location. The added comment text is in the edit status, so you can edit the comment
text added.
 Add combined comment
a) Press <Menu> or the multifunctional knob to show the menu.
b) Rotate the multifunctional knob to view the comments one by one
c) Press the knob again to add the selected item onto the image (comment
added in an editable state)
d) Rotate the multifunctional knob to search for the next part, and press the
knob again to add the second part of the combined comment.
e) Repeat procedures to add other parts of a combined comment.
f) Press <Set> to complete the comment.
 Adding an Arrow
You can add an arrow to a location where you want to pay attention.
1. Press the <Arrow>, and an arrow will appear at the default position.
2. Adjust the arrow
 Adjust the position and orientation of the arrow: roll the trackball to the desired
position and use the multifunctional knob to change the orientation in 15°
increments.
 click the [Arrow Size] item on the soft menu to change the arrow size:
3. Press <Set> or <Enter> to anchor the arrow position, and then the arrow turns yellow.
4. Repeat the above steps to add more arrows if necessary.
5. Press <Arrow>, <ESC> or to exit the arrow comment status.
 Trace
1. In the comment status, click [Trace] to activate trace.
2. Roll the trackball to move the cursor to a desired position and press <Set> to confirm
the start point.
3. Roll the trackball to move the cursor along the edge of the desired region and trace
the outline of the region.
 Rotate the multifunctional knob anticlockwise, to cancel trace of 1 pixel.
 Rotate the multifunctional knob clockwise, to restore trace of 1 pixel.
 Press <Clear> to clear the trace(s).
4. Press <Set> to finish a tracing.
5. Click <Trace> again to exit the status.
9.1.4 Moving Comments

1. Move the cursor onto the comment that needs to be moved. Press <Set> to select it,
and a highlighted box appears around the comment.
2. Roll the trackball to move the comment to the new position.
3. Press the <Set> to anchor the comment in the new position, and the
comment-moving operation is complete.

9.1.5 Modifying (Editing) Comments
 Modifying (Editing) characters
1. In the comment status, move the cursor onto the comment that needs to be modified:
 Directly enter the character at the position that the cursor stays; or,
 Double press the <Set> to enter the edit status, use the or key to
move the cursor to a location where needs to insert characters, and type
characters.
2. Press the <Del> to delete the comment character or text on the right side of the cursor;
Press the <Backspace> to delete the comment character or text on the left side of the
cursor.
3. Roll the trackball or press the <Set> or the multifunctional knob to confirm the
modification and to exit the edit status, and the color of the comments turns yellow.
 Modifying (Editing) Arrows
1. Move the cursor on the arrow that needs to be modified. After the cursor turns to ,
press the <Set>. The color of the current arrow turns green, and there is green frame
around the arrow, indicating the arrow can be edited. Move the cursor to change the
arrow position.
2. Rotate the multifunctional knob to modify the arrow direction.
3. Press the <Set> or the <Enter> to complete the operation.
9.1.6 Deleting Comments

 Deleting Comment Characters, Texts or Arrows
1. Move the cursor to the comment to be deleted.
2. Press the <Set> to select the comment.
3. Press the <Del> or <Back> to complete the deleting operation.
 Deleting a recently-added character, text or arrow
After you add several comments and the cursor is in the “|” or “ ” status, pressing
<Clear> can delete the recently-added or recently-edited comment.
 Delete word
Click <Delete Word> to delete the word in the reserved order. You can also assign the
user-defined key for the function in “[Setup] → [System Preset] →[Key Config]”.
 Delete all comments (characters, texts or arrows)
Click [Erase All Text] to delete all the comment items on the screen. You can also
assign the user-defined key for the function in “[Setup] → [System Preset] → [Key
Config]”.
Or, press and hold the <Clear> to delete all the comments.
 Clear comments automatically
It can be set if to clear the comment when the image is unfrozen or the probe or exam
is changed. The setting path is: “[Setup] → [System Preset] → [Comment]”.
NOTE: 1. When no object is selected, pressing the <Clear> will clear all comments
and all measurements calipers.

2. After powering off, the system will clear all comments on the image.
9.2 Body Marks

The Body Mark (Pictogram) feature is used for indicating the exam position of the Animal
as well as probe position and orientation. User can preset body marks for specific exam
modes, customize the body marks and import/ export the body marks.
9.2.1 Soft Menu for Body Marks

The body mark soft menu displays the settings for the current mode:
 Library
Click [Library] to switch the body mark library, the corresponding body marks are shown at
the bottom of the image.
 Display
Set [Display] to be “On” or “Off” to turn on or off the body mark display.
 Page-turning
If there is more than one page of the body marks, click [Page Down]/ [Page Up] to turn
pages.
 Current BM (Body Mark)
The Current BM (Body Mark) has two statuses, “1st” and “2nd”. The Current BM 1st is
default.
If you want to add two body marks onto an image, after you add the first body mark, you
should select [Current BM] to be 2nd and then add the second body mark.
9.2.2 Adding Body Marks

 To add the first body mark:
1. Press <Body Mark> to enter the body mark status. Select the body mark group
through the [Library].
2. Move the cursor onto the desired body mark to highlight your choice.
3. Press <Set> to confirm the selection.
4. To adjust the probe position and orientation marker:
 Roll the trackball to place the probe marker at the correct position.
 Rotate the multifunctional knob to adjust the orientation.
 Press the <Set> to confirm the position and orientation of the probe marker and
exit the body mark mode.
 To add a second body mark after the first body mark is added:
Set the type for the second body mark (the types of the two should be different). E.g.
the first body mark was added as "1st" in the [Current BM], and then the second body
mark should be “2nd”.
1. Set the [Current BM] to be “2nd”.
2. Add the second body mark according to the steps previously noted for the 1st body
mark as above.

9.2.3 Moving Body Marks
You can move the body mark graphics to any desired position within the image area.
1. Roll the trackball to move the cursor onto the body mark. The cursor changes into ,
indicating you can move the pictogram to a new position.
2. Press <Set> to select the body mark, and a frame will appear around the graphics.
3. Roll the trackball to move the body mark to the desired position.
4. Press <Set> to anchor and confirm the new graphics position.
NOTE: In Dual B Mode, a body mark cannot be moved between the separated image
windows.
9.2.4 Deleting Body Marks

 To delete a body mark
1. Use the trackball to position the cursor on the body mark graphic and Press <Set> to
select.
2. Press <Clear> to delete the selected body mark.
NOTE: In the Body Mark mode, if no object is selected, pressing the [Clear] key
will clear all comments, body marks and general measurements from the
screen.
Tips:
 Powering off, preset returning, switching the exam/ Animal/ mode/ probe will clear
the body marks.

10 Animal Data Management
An exam record consists of all information and data of one exam.
An exam record consists of the following information:
 Animal basic information and exam data
 Image files
 Reports
NOTE: 1. DO NOT use the internal hard drive for long-term image storage. Daily
backup is recommended. External storage media is recommended for
image archive.
2. The system Animal database space is limited, please back up or clear
Animal data in time.
3. Mindray is not responsible for lost data if you DO NOT follow suggested
backup procedures.
10.1 Animal Information Management
10.1.1 Enter Animal Information

The general Animal information and exam information are entered through the Animal Info
screen, for details; please refer to “4.2.1 New Animal Information”
After completion of Animal information entry, click [OK] to save the Animal information to
the Animal data.
10.1.2 Animal Information Setting

Open “[Setup] → [System Preset] → [General]”, and then set the following in the Animal
Info area. Here, you can select if to display Animal gender, age or operator in the screen;
set the H&W applied unit and select the using surface formula.
 Setting Animal information display
 H&W Unit
 Surface formula setting
Animal Data Management 10-1

10.2 Image File Management
You can store the image files either in the Animal database in the system, or to external
memory devices. For a saved image, you can perform operations like image reviewing,
analyzing and demonstration (iVision).
10.2.1 Memory Media

System supported memory media including:
 System hard disk
 USB memory devices: USB flash drive, removable USB hard disk
 DVD+RW, DVD+R, DVD-R, DVD-RW, CD-RW, CD-R
10.2.2 Image File Formats

The system supports two types of image file formats: system-relevant and PC-compatible.
 System-relevant formats:
 Single-frame image file (FRM)
Refers to single-frame static image files not to be compressed; you can perform
measurements and comments adding on this type of files.
 Cine file (CIN)
System-defined multi-frame file format; you can perform manual or auto cine
review, and perform measurements or add comments for the reviewed images.
After you open a stored CIN file, the system automatically enters cine review
status.
The system can save FRM files as BMP, JPG, TIFF or DCM files, or save CIN files as
AVI, DCM files. The system can also open FRM, JPG, BMP and CIN files.
 PC-compatible formats:
 Screen file (BMP)
Single-frame file format, used to save the current screen, non-compressed
format.
 Screen file (JPG)
Single-frame file format, used to save the current screen in the compressed
format; you can set the compression ratio.
 TIFF: Single-frame export format
 Multi-medium files (AVI)
Multi-frame file format, general cine file format.
 DICOM files (DCM)
DICOM standard files format, single-frame or multi-frame format, used to record
Animal information and images.
10.2.3 Image Storage Preset

 Set image size
You can set the image size via “[Setup] →[System Preset]→ [General]”. The items are
shown as follows:
10-2 Animal Data Management

 Set single frame export format
 Format
You can select the image export format in the “Send To” dialogue box.
You can set the JPG compression ratio via “[Setup] → [System Preset] →
[General]”.
NOTE: Compression in a JPEG format may result in image distortion.
 Set cine saving length
 Live Capture
 Clip length
For details, please refer to “6.2 Cine Review”.
 Send to DICOM print when ending the exam
Open “[Setup] → [System Preset] → [General]”, check “Send/ Print Image after End
Exam” in “Animal Management” area. Then every time you press <End Exam>, the
system will send images of the exam to the connected default DICOM server.
 Storage image/clip linked operation
You can set to send image/clip to other media when you save/clip to hard disk (10.2.4
Saving Images to the System), the setting path is: [Setup] → [System Preset] →
[General] → “Image/clip storage”
 Image can be sent to: local default printer, DICOM storage, DICOM printer.
 Clip can be sent to DICOM storage.
10.2.4 Saving Images to the System

 To save a single-frame image in the system:
(1) Set the user-defined key in the path: [Setup] → [System Preset] →[Key Config].
(2) Press the user-defined key to save the image.
 In the image screen, press the shortcut key to save the current single-frame
image with the image frozen, and the image is saved with the default file name in
the default file directory in the FRM format. The thumbnail of this image will
appear in the thumbnail area on the right side of the screen. When you move the
cursor onto the thumbnail, its filename with suffix will be displayed.
 When a dialog box is displayed on the current screen, press the shortcut key to
save the screen in the BMP format.
 To save cineloop image in the system:
Freeze an image and click [Save Cine] in the soft menu to save the current cine file in
the default file directory in the dynamic image format CIN.
The thumbnail of this image will appear in the thumbnail area on the right side of the
screen. When you move the cursor onto the thumbnail, its filename with suffix will be
displayed.

10.2.5 Quickly Saving Images to USB Flash Drive
Use user-defined keys to quickly save the single-frame or cine to USB flash drive.
The image file is stored in the directory: U disk\ US Export\ Animal folder\ exam folder\
Image ID.bmp, where,
 Animal folder name: Animal name + Animal ID
 Exam folder name: exam mode+ exam time
 To store single-frame image to USB flash drive:
(1) Set the user-defined key through the path: [Setup] → [System Preset] → [Key
Config].
Select a key in the Key Function page on the left side and select “Send image to
USB disk” in the Output page of Function field on the right side.
(2) Press the user-defined key to save the image to the USB flash drive.
 To store cine to USB flash drive
Save cine images to a USB flash drive in the AVI format.
(1) Set the user-defined key through the path: [Setup] → [System Preset] → [Key
Config].
Select a key in the Key Function page on the left side and select “Send AVI Cine
to USB disk” in the Output page of Function field on the right side.
(2) Press the user-defined key to save the cineloop.
10.2.6 Quickly Saving Full Screen Image to the

System
This function can save the current full screen image to the system with the image in
real-time status.
Set the user-defined key through the path: [Setup] → [System] → [Key Config]. Select a
key in the Key Function on the left side and select “Save Full Screen Image to hard drive”
in the Output page of Function field on the right side.
After the setting, you can use the user-defined key to save full screen image to the
system.
10.2.7 Thumbnails
The stored images or cineloops are displayed in the form of thumbnails on the screen:
 In the iStation screen, the thumbnails refer to the images stored for the selected
exam or the selected Animal.
 In the scanning or freeze mode, the thumbnails refer to the images stored in the
current exam. You can click or to page down or up the thumbnails
when there are more than one page.
 In the Review screen, the thumbnails refer to the images stored in the same
exam.
 In the Review screen, open an image to enter the image analyzing status, all the
thumbnails belong to the exam are displayed.
 When you move the cursor onto a thumbnail, its name and format will be
displayed.

10.2.8 Image Review and Analysis
You can review and analyze the stored images (only refer to the images stored in the
system default path).
10.2.8.1 Review an Image

You can review all images stored in an exam, and send, delete or analyze the stored
images.
 To enter Review:
 Press <Review> to enter Review screen. The system displays the images stored
in this exam of the current Animal (if there is no current Animal information, you
can review the images of the latest exam).
 Select an exam of an Animal in the iStation screen, and press <Review> to enter
the Review screen to review the images of the Animal. You can also select more
than one exam, and the system will display images of the lately exam images in
Review status.
 To exit Review:
 Click [Exit] on the Review screen; or,
 Press <ESC> or <Review> again.
 Basic operations
1. Move the cursor onto an exam record in the Exam History area and press <Set>. The
selected item is highlighted.
2. Click [Info] or [Report] to view Animal information or report.
3. Double-click a thumbnail to view and analyze an image. Rotating the Multifunctional
knob will navigate through thumbnails.
The function buttons are described as follows:
 Exam History:
You can select one certain exam from the exam directory to review the images.
 If entered from iStation, the screen displays the record(s) selected in the
iStation. If no Animal is selected when it was in iStation, then all the Animals
in the system database will be displayed, and the current Animal exam is
listed.
 If entered from the imaging status, the Review screen displays the images of
the current exam, and the default selected image is the one displayed on the
preview main screen.
 [Info]:
Click to enter the Animal Info screen, you can review or edit the
currently-selected Animal information.
 [Report]
Click to review or edit the currently-selected Animal report.
 Image operations
[Select All]: click to select all images in the thumbnail window.
[Deselect All]: after clicking the [Select All], the button changes into [Deselect All],
you can cancel all the selections by clicking [Deselect All].
[Send To]: click to send the selected image to other location, DICOM server,
printer, MedSight devices and etc.
[Delete]: click to delete the selected image.

[Compare]: click to enter cine compare in review mode. Refer to 6.3.1 Cine
Compare for details.
 Layout:
You can select the layout of the Review screen among three selections: 1×1, 2×2
and 4×4.
 Switching operations:
[New Exam]: click to create a new exam for the selected Animal and open the
Animal Info screen.
[Activate Exam]: click to enter the currently selected exam and enter the image
scanning screen; it grays out if the current Animal cannot be activated.
[Open]: click to open the selected image.
[iStation]: click to enter the iStation screen.
[Exit]: click to exit the Review status, and return to the main screen.
10.2.8.2 Image Analysis

For the image analysis, you can view, zoom, perform post processing and measurements,
add comments and perform cine (multi-frame) review for a stored image. The operation
steps are the same as those for real-time scanning; please refer to relevant sections for
details.
 To enter image analysis:
 In the image scanning or freeze status, double-click a thumbnail stored in the
exam to enter the image analysis status; or
 In the Review status, select a thumbnail and click [Open] or directly double-click
the selected thumbnail to open the image.
 To exit the image analysis:
 Press <Freeze> to exit and enter the real-time scanning status.
 Press <Review> to exit from the image analysis to the Review status.
 Press <ESC> to return to the previous screen.
 For BMP-formatted image, click [Exit] at the lower right corner of the image to
exit.
In image analysis status, the selected image is open on the screen, and the
thumbnails of the same exam are displayed on the Thumbnail area, you can click
to turn pages, click to delete or click to send a selected image.
10.2.9 iVision
iVision function is used for demonstration of the images stored. Image files are played
according to file names one by one (including the image of system-relevant and
PC-compatible format).
To perform image demonstration:
1. Enter iVision screen:
 Move the cursor onto [iVision] in the Other menu, and press <Set>.
 Press the user-defined key (setting path: [Setup]→[System Preset]→[Key
Config])
2. Add the contents to be played and select the demo mode.
3. Select an item in the list, and click [Start] to begin the demonstration.
4. Click [Exit] or press <ESC> to exit the iVision status.

 Demonstration item
The demonstration items are the image files in the formats that the system supports.
You can add the exam data in Animal database (D:\AnimalData) or system supported
image files and folders to demonstration item list. For files and folders in
demonstration list, the images in the directory and subdirectory are played one by one,
and the system will automatically jump over the files that can’t be opened.
 Demonstration item
There are two kinds of catalogs: Demo Catalog and Customize Catalog.
 Demo Catalog: demo catalog is the folder in hard disk (E disc), where the factory
DEMO is stored. The system plays the images in this folder when performs
demonstration.
The system supports import, delete or clear the data in demo catalog.
Click [Demo Manager] to operate:
：To import data to demo catalog.
：To delete the selected data.
：To delete all data.
 Customize Catalog: what saved here is the catalog of the displayed image. The
system plays the images in the catalog when performs demonstration.
Operate the catalog by the buttons on the right:
[Add File]: to add files to the file list.
[Add Catalog]: to add catalog to the file list.
[Delete]: to delete the selected file or catalog in the file list.
[Clear]: to clear all the files or catalogs in the file list.
[Export]: export the selected directory/file to the specified external storage
devices.
Select or deselect the directory/file by checking or un-checking the check box before
the file list, only the selected directories/files will be replayed.
 Demo mode
The system automatically plays all the image files in the list one by one. The time
intervals between images played can be changed through the drop-down list of
“Interval”.
 Option of Demo
You can choose whether to repeat the demonstration or exit after a demonstration is
completed.
10.2.10 Sending Image File

 On the image screen, select a stored image thumbnail (press <Shift> to select more
than one at the same time), click (Send To) on the lower right corner of the
screen, the image can be sent to the external devices.
 In the iStation or Review screen, click [Send To] to send the selected image to the
external devices.
 For external memory devices (e.g. USB memory devices, DVD-RW, MedSight
devices or network storage server):
a) PC format transfer: JPG/ AVI, BMP/ AVI, TIFF/ AVI. Where a single-frame
image is exported as JPG, TIFF or BMP, and the cine file exported as AVI.

b) DCM format transfer: DCM (including single-frame DCM and multi-frame
DCM).
c) You can also select to export report format.
d) Select the cine zoom mode.
 For DICOM Storage or Print server, select the DICOM Storage or Print server.
 For a video printer, send images to the video printer connected with the system.
For a graph/ text printer, send the images to the default graph/ text printer.
10.3 Report Management

 Report storage:
The exam reports are stored under the directory of the exam of the Animal.
 Importing, exporting and sending a report
In the iStation screen, select Animal data, click [Restore] or [Backup] to import or
export Animal information, images and reports from or to an external memory device
or network storage server.
You can also select whether to remove local Animal exams data or only images after
backup.
In the iStation or Review screen, click [Send To] to send Animal data to an external
memory device or network storage server, you can choose if reports are exported with
images.
To export the report:
(1) Check “Export Report” on the screen.
(2) Click [OK] to confirm.
You can select paper size for the report in the path: [Setup] → [Peripheral Preset]
 Printing report
Use a connected graph/text printer to print a report. Please refer to “14.7 Peripheral
Preset” for details about default report printer setting.
For details on report relevant operations, please refer to [Advanced Volume].
10.4 Animal Data Management (iStation)

The Animal data include basic Animal information, exam information, image files and
reports. You can search, view, backup, send, restore or delete Animal data in iStation.
 To Enter iStation
 Press <iStation> on the control panel; or
 Click [iStation] in the Animal Info screen; or
 Click [iStation] in the Review screen.
10.4.1 Viewing Animal Information

 Data Source
Select the data source of Animal data, the system Animal database is default.
 Animal list
Display Animal information, exam mode, number of images and cines, exam state,
backed up or not.
 Info
Select an exam of a Animal, click [Info] on the right side to display the Animal
information of this exam.
 Report
After you select an exam of a Animal, click [Report] to view the report of this exam for
this Animal. If no report is generated in the exam, the system prompts that “There is
no report belongs to the exam”.
 Review
Select an exam of a Animal, click [Review] to enter Review screen.
 Select All/Deselect All
Click [Select All] to select all the Animal data listed. Then the button changes into
[Deselect All], you can cancel all the selections by clicking [Deselect All].
10.4.2 Searching a Animal

(1) Select the data source.
(2) Set search items of Name, ID, DOB, and Exam Date in the "Item" drop-down list.
(3) Enter the keyword in accordance with the “Item” selected, and the system
searches and displays the results in the Animal list.
(4) When you select a Animal in the Animal list, the images of this Animal will be
displayed at the bottom of the screen.
Tips:
 When you clear the keyword, enter other keywords or cancel the selection “Find
in results”, the system will refresh the searched results.
 Click [Reset], the system will clear the information you entered in Keyword, and
all the recorded Animal information will be listed out.
 Select “Find in results”, the system will do searching based on the last searched
results.
10.4.3 Animal Data Management

 Send To
The system supports to send data to external memory, DVD-RW/DVD+RW, network
storage server or DICOM server or send images or reports to printers to print.
 The [Send To] button on the right side of the Animal list is used to send exam data
or images of the selected exam.
 The [Send To] button on the right side of the thumbnail area below the Animal list
is used for sending selected images.
 Send Animal exam data to USB devices, DVD-RW/DVD+RW drive, network
storage.
 Send images to USB devices, disc, DICOM storage server, DICOM printer,
video printer, text/ graph printer, network storage.
 Send images with report to USB devices, DVD-RW/DVD+RW drive, and
network storage.
 Format transfer is available when sending images to USB devices,
DVD-RW/DVD+RW drive or network storage. (Please refer to “10.2.10
Sending Image File” for details.)

 Press <Shift> on the control panel to select more than one exam or image at
one time.
 Delete
To delete the selected Animal or exam data, click the [Delete] button on the right side
of the Animal list. However, you cannot delete Animal data being printed, exported or
sent, or delete the current exam.
The [Delete] button on the right side of the Animal list is used to delete exam data
of the selected exam.
 The [Delete] button on the right side of the thumbnail area below the Animal list is
used for deleting selected images.
 Recycle bin
The recycle bin is used to store the deleted Animal data, exam data and images (time
lasts from deleting to system is powered off). The system supports recovery of the
data from the recycle bin.
Tips: The recycle bin will be cleared after the system is powered off.
To recover the deleted Animal data, click at the lower right corner of the screen to
enter the Animal Recycle Bin screen.
(1) Select items to be recovered in the list.
(2) Select operations:
Click [Restore Items] to restore the item back to iStation.
Click [Delete] to delete the item permanently, and the item can never be restored
again.
 Click [Restore All Items] to restore all the items back to iStation.
 Click [Empty Recycle Bin] to empty the recycle bin and all items can never be
restored again.
 Click [Exit] to exit Recycle Bin screen and return to iStation.
 Backup/ Restore
You can back up the selected Animal data to the system-supported media in order to
view it on computers, or restore the Animal data to the system from an external
media.
[Backup]: click to export the selected Animal data to the system-supported media.
[Restore]: click to import the Animal data from an external media. If no external data
source is connected, then the button is unavailable.
10.4.4 Examinations
 New Exam:
After you select a Animal data or exam in the iStation screen, click the [New Exam] to
enter the Animal Info screen, where you can select a new exam mode and click [OK]
to begin a new exam.
 Activate exam
After you select an exam, which has been performed within 24 hours, click [Activate
Exam] to activate the exam and load the basic Animal information and measurement
data to continue the exam.
If you want to select a Animal data in an external memory database to start a new
exam or recover the exam, you have to first allow the system to load the Animal data
to the system’s Animal database.

 Continue Exam
Select an exam that is paused within 24 hours, click [Continue Exam] to activate the
exam and load the basic Animal information and measurement data to continue the
exam.
If you want to select a Animal data in an external memory database, you have to first
allow the system to load the Animal data to the system’s Animal database.
10.5 Network Storage

Network storage is used to save image files and measurement reports to the remote PC
server.
Open “[Setup]→[Network Preset]→[Network Storage]” to set properties for network
storage. (For details, please refer to “14.8 Network Preset”)
1. Enter iStation; select one (or more than one) Animal data or image in the local data
source.
2. Click [Send To].
3. Select [Network Storage] in the Send To dialogue box, and select the PC server on
the right side.
4. Select PC transfer format and check if to send report.
5. Click [OK] to start sending.
 User-defined key for network storage
 Send Image to Network Storage: to send image(JPG format) to the default
network server.
 Send AVI Cine to Network Storage: to send image(AVI format) to the default
network server.
10.6 Print Job Management

You can manage the pending print tasks for graph/text or digital video printer.
After the printer is successfully connected and print task is undergoing, click the printer
icon in the lower right corner of the screen to open the Print Task Manager screen.
Information of all print tasks is displayed in the list, including name, status (being printing
or suspended), printer and submit time.
If all print tasks are finished, the print icon will disappear from the screen, if not, please
check the manager to see if there is any failure task.
 To delete a print task
Select the print task in the list and click [Delete].
 To restart a print task after it is suspended
Click [Restart] to restart the paused print task.

10.7 Backing Up and Erasing Files
through DVD Drive
The system supports DVD-RW drive to write data in CD/DVD and to read data from
CD/DVD in PC.
The system supports the following media: DVD+RW, DVD-R, DVD-RW, DVD+R, CD-RW,
CD-R.
The DVD-RW drive can write the files in the format of ISO or UDF, and the setting path is:
[Setup] → [System Preset] → [General] → “File System Type”.
 To write data to a CD/DVD:
(1) Put a CD/DVD in the tray, and the symbol appears in the lower right corner
of the screen.
(2) Select the data to be backed up, click [Send To] or [Back Up] in the screen (in
iStation or Review). Select the target drive in the Send To or Back Up Animal
Record dialogue box.
(3) Click [OK] or [Backup] to begin writing, the task management icon displays ,
and the disc symbol displays .
(4) After the writing process is completed, click to pop up the Disc Option
dialogue box, and select [Eject] to eject the CD/DVD.
 To erase data from a CD/DVD
(1) Put the CD/DVD in the tray.
(2) Click the symbol to pop up the Disc Option dialogue box, as shown in the
figure below.
(3) Click [Erase] to erase data from a CD/DVD.
(4) After the erasing process is completed, click [Eject] in the Disc Option dialogue
box.
Tips:
 Writing data using “Send To” supports PC format transfer function, while CD/DVD
written by “Backup” supports only system-relevant formats.
 The symbol indicates that the input CD/DVD is damaged or with data of
wrong format.
During the backup process, if a CD/DVD is forcibly taken out
CAUTION: or you perform other operations, the backup process will fail
or the system may malfunction.
NOTE: Directly removing a DVD-RW drive may result in the damage of DVD-RW drive
and /or the system, please refer to 3.6 Connecting/ Removing a USB Memory
Device” for disconnection.

10.8 Animal Task Management
Click at the lower right corner of the screen to pop up the dialogue box:
 Storage Task: displays the DICOM storage task.
 Print Task: displays the DICOM print task.
 Media Storage Task:
 DICOM media storage task(including DVD-RW and USB devices)
 Backup task (system-relevant format): select the exam in iStation and click
[Backup].
 Send to external devices (including DVD-RW and USB devices): select exam
data or images in iStation or Review screen, click [Send To].
 Network Storage task.
 MedSight storage task:
 In iStation screen, send exam to MedSight devices.
 On review screen, iStation screen, thumbnail area, send the image(s) to
MedSight devices.
In the Task Management dialogue box, Animal ID, name, destination, progress, type,
contents and task created time are displayed.
You can do the following operations:
 Click [Cancel] to cancel the selected task.
 Click [Retry] to retry the failed task.
 Click [Select All] to select all the tasks.
 Task status
 When there is/are task (s) undergoing, the task management icon displays as
, you can click the icon to check the process.
 When there is any task failed, the task management icon displays as , you
can click the icon to check the failure.
 When the task management icon displays as , it means no task is undergoing

or no failure.
10.9 Administration
10.9.1 Access Setting

There are two kinds of users: the system administrator and operator.
The system administrator can view all Animal data, such as Animal information, image
and report, etc. The operator can only view the exam information saved in the system and
operated by himself or herself, such as Animal information, image and report, etc. The
operator cannot view the exam data operated by others.
Emergency operators are general ones; they can enter the system without entering
password. But they can’t modify or delete the password.

10.9.2 Setting Access Control
The system administrator can preset the access control, that is, if an operator has the right
to access to the data in the system.
The access control only can be set by the system administrator.
Setting access control:
1. Open the “Admin” page through the path: [Setup]→[System Preset]→[Admin].
2. If is selected, you need to have the authority before

accessing the data. If not, you can access all the data without the authority.
10.9.3 System Login

If access control has been set by the system administrator, you can access the data in the
system only after you log on the system.
You need to enter user name and password in the following cases:
 Before entering the system
 Changing user
As long as the system is in the working status, you can enter the above screens without
entering user name and password repeatedly.
 Log on the system:
(1) If the system requires you to log on the system before you access the data, you
can see the following dialogue box.
(2) Select the user name in the drop-down list of User Name.
(3) Enter password and click [Login].
 For emergency users, click [Emergency] directly to log on.
 To change user:
(1) To log out the current user and change to another user, click at the lower
right corner of the screen to pop up the following dialogue box:
(2) Click [Change User] to pop up the Login dialogue box.

(3) Enter the user name and password in the field box.
10.9.4 Add/ Delete a User

The system administrator can add and delete a user, while the operator can’t.
Add a User
Premise: you must log on the system as the system administrator. If not, you will be
required to enter administrator name and password before the setting.
2. Click [Add] to enter the following page.
3. Enter the user name (you are not allowed to enter the same name or modify the name
already exist).
4. Enter the password and the confirm password (the password is consist of 6-16
characters)
5. Set the user role in the drop-down list: administrator or operator.
6. Click [OK] to confirm the setting and exit the dialogue box, then the new user will
appear on the User List.
Delete a User
Premise: you must log on the system as the system administrator. If not, you will be
required to enter administrator name and password before the setting.
2. Select the user to be deleted in the User List (Emergency user can’t be deleted), click
[Delete] to delete the selected user.
10.9.5 Modify Password

The system administrator can modify password of all users.
The operator can only modify his/her own password.
To modify the password, the user has to log on the system first.
There are two ways to modify password: modify it on “Admin” page or on “Session
Manage” dialogue box.
 “Admin” page (administrator can modify the password)
(1) Open the “Admin” page through the path: [Setup]→[System Preset]→[Admin].

(2) Select the user name to be modified (except emergency operator) in User List,
click [Change Password] to open the dialogue box.
(3) Enter new password and confirm password, then click [OK].
 Session Manage page (general operator and administrator can modify the password).
When the user has logged on the system, you can see at the lower right corner
of the screen.
(1) Click at the lower right corner to pop up the Session Manage dialogue box,
on which you can see the current user’s information.
(2) If you want to modify the current password, click [Change Password] to pop up
the Change Password dialogue box.
(3) Enter the previous and the new password in the dialogue box.
(4) Click [OK] to exit.

11 DICOM
NOTE: Before using DICOM, please read the electronic file DICOM CONFORMANCE
STATEMENT along with the device.
This chapter is confined to the preset, connection verification and DICOM services of the
DICOM-configured ultrasound machine, not including SCP configurations like PACS/ RIS/
HIS.
The DICOM package is optional, so the description here is only applicable for the system
configured with the DICOM package.
This system supports the following optional DICOM functions:
 DICOM Basic function: DICOM connection verify, DICOM task management,
DICOM storage, DICOM print, DICOM storage commitment, DICOM media
storage (DICOMDIR review)
 DICOM Worklist
 MPPS（Modality Performed Procedure Step）
 DICOM Query/ Retrieve
Workflows of DICOM preset and application are briefly described as follows:
1. DICOM preset (Local TCP/IP setting, DICOM local setting, DICOM server setting, and
DICOM service setting)
2. Verify connectivity.
3. DICOM Services (image storage, print, MPPS, Worklist, storage commitment, media
storage, DICOMDIR review, task management).
11.1 DICOM Preset
11.1.1 Local TCP/IP Setting

NOTE DO Not edit IP address in Network Preset page as the network task is executed,
otherwise it fails. View if there is any undergoing task in task manager of the
system.
To set the network properties of the ultrasound system.
1. Press <Setup> to enter the Setup menu.
2. Move the cursor onto [Network Preset], select [Local TCP/IP] to open the screen.
3. Local TCP/ IP preset items are described as follows:
11.1.2 DICOM Local Setting

To set the DICOM server properties and log saving manner.
2. Move the cursor onto [Network Preset], select [DICOM Local] to open the screen.
DICOM 11-1
3. DICOM Local Setting items are described as follows:
Name Description
Application entity title of the ultrasound system.
AE Title The AE title here should be the same with the one of the acceptable SCU set
in the server.
DICOM communication port, which should be the same with the one in the
Port
server.
Maximum PDU data package size ranging from 16384 to 65536. The default
PDU
value is 32768.
File Name: name of the DICOM log, generated by the system automatically.
Log Level: to set the log type.
Log The available selections: No log, Service result log, Service process log, All
Setting log.
We suggest setting “All log”, so that you can see the DICOM log on the E
disk.
OK Click to confirm parameter setting.
Cancel Click to cancel parameter setting.
Enter AE Title, Port, PDU according to the actual situation, and then click [OK] to exit the
screen.
Tips:
 AE Title should be the same with the SCU AE Title preset in the server (PACS/
RIS/ HIS), for example, if the AE Title of the server preset in the storage server is
AAA, and the AE Title of the accepted SCU is preset as MMM, then in the figure
above, the AE Title of Local should be MMM, and the AE Title of storage server
should be AAA.
 Same IP Address may result in DICOM abnormality.
11.1.3 DICOM Server Setting

To add or delete DICOM servers, or set IP address and name for the DICOM server.
2. Move the cursor onto [Network Preset]; select [DICOM Server] to open the screen.
3. DICOM server setting items are described as follows:
Name Description
Device Name of the device supporting DICOM services
IP
IP address of the server
Address
You can ping other machines to verify connection after entering the correct IP
Ping address. Also you can check the connection of the already added server in the
list.
Add Click to add servers to the device list
Delete Click to delete the selected server(s) in the device list
Exit Click to exit the DICOM Server screen
11-2 DICOM
Tips:
 If the currently entered name has already existed, the system will pop up: “The
server name exists!” Click [OK] to enter another name.
11.1.4 DICOM Service Setting

When the system is configured with DICOM basic function module, and installed DICOM
Worklist, MPPS, DICOM Structured Reporting, DICOM storage commitment, and Query/
Retrieve modules, the corresponding preset settings can be found in DICOM Service
screen.
Open “[Setup]→[Network Preset]→[DICOM Service]” to set properties of DICOM
services.
11.1.4.1 Storage Setting

1. Enter the “Storage” page: “[Setup]→[Network Preset]→[DICOM Service]→Storage.
 Select device, enter the information. For device setting, please refer to “11.1.3
DICOM Server Setting”.
 Click [Add] to add the service to the Service list.
 Select an item in the service list, change the parameters in the above area, and
click [Update] to update the item in the service list.
 Select an item in the service list, and click [Delete] to delete the service.
 Select an item in the service list, and click [Default] to set the server to be the
default service.
2. Select an item in the service list, and click [Verify] to verify the connection.
3. Click [Exit] to confirm the setting and exit the page.
DICOM storage setting items are described as follows:
Name Description
After you set the server(s) in DICOM Server Setting, the name(s) will
Device
appear in the drop-down list, select the name of the storage server.
Service Name Default is xxx-Storage, and it can be modified.
Application Entity title, here, it should be consistent with that of the
AE Title
storage server.
DICOM communication port, 104 by default. Here, the port should be
Port
consistent with that of the storage server port.
Maximum Refers to times that the system performs retrying connection, the
Retries adjusting range is 0-9.
Interval Time(s) Reserved feature.
Refers to time after which the system will stop trying to establish a
Timeout
connection to the service. Value: 5－60s.
Allow
If SCP supports this function, then select it.
Multiframe
Max Framerate Set the frame range of transferring cin file into DCM multi-frame file.
SR Storage
To enable or disable structured reporting sending.
Option
DICOM 11-3
Name Description
Cine Zoom
Select the cine zoom mode during image file storage.
Mode
Compression Select the compression mode: uncompressed, RLE, JPEG and
Mode JPEG2000.
Compression
Select the compression ratio of JPEG: lossless, low, medium and high.
Ratio
Color Mode Select the color mode.
Cancel Click to cancel the parameter setting.
Select an item in the service list, change the parameters in the above
Update
area, and click [Update] to update the item in the service list.
Delete Click to delete the selected service in the service list.
Select an item in the service list, click [Default] and you can see “Y” in
Default
the Default column.
Click to verify if the two DICOM application entities are normally
Verify
connected.
Exit Click to exit the screen.
Tips: RLE, JPEG and JPEG2000 are not supported by all SCPs. Please refer to the
electronic file DICOM CONFORMANCE STATEMENT of the SCP to check whether SCP
supports or not. Do not select these compression modes if the storage server doesn’t
support them.
11.1.4.2 Print Service Setting

1. Enter the “Print” page: “[Setup]→[Network Preset]→[DICOM Service]→Print.
default service.
DICOM print setting items are described as follows:
Name Description
After you set the server (s) in DICOM Server Setting, the name(s) will
Device
appear in the drop-down list, select the name of the print server.
Service Name Default is xxx-Print, and it can be modified.
Application Entity title, here, it should be consistent with that of the print
AE Title
server.
Port
consistent with that of the print server port.
11-4 DICOM
Name Description
Maximum Refers to times that the system performs retrying connection, the
Retries adjusting range is 0-9.
Interval Time(s) Reserved feature.
Timeout connection to the service.
Value: 5－60s, in increments of 5s, and 15 by default.
Refer to copies of printed files. You can select among 1 through 5, or
Copies
directly enter the number.
The system supports RGB (color printing) and MONOCHROME2 (black
Settings
and white printing). Please select the type the printer supports.
Film Orientation Select between LANDSCAPE and PORTRAIT.
Priority Specify printing task priority among HIGH, MED and LOW.
Film Size Select film size among the selections listed in the drop-down list.
Specify quantity of printed files, e.g. STANDARD\2, 3 indicates 6
Display Format
images are printed for each page.
Configuration
Enter configuration information in the field.
Info
Specify print medium: Paper, Clear Film, and Blue Film.
Medium Type Select Blue Film or Clear Film for black and white printing, select Paper
for color printing may provide better effects.
Specify where the file is exposed: MAGAZINE (stored in the magazine),
Destination
or PROCESSOR (exposed in the processor).
Min Density Enter the minimum density of the film
Max Density Enter the maximum density of the film.
Select how the printer magnifies an image to fit the film.
Replicate: interpolated pixels belong to duplicate of adjacent pixels.
Magnification Bilinear: interpolated pixels are generated from bilinear interpolations
Type between adjacent pixels.
Cubic: interpolated pixels are generated from cubic interpolations
between adjacent pixels; None: without interpolation.
Specify whether you want a trim box to be printed around each image
Trim
on the film: Yes or No.
Add Add the DICOM service to the service list.
Update
Select an item in the service list, click [Default] and you can see “Y” in
Default
the Default column.
Verify
connected.
DICOM 11-5
Name Description
11.1.4.3 DICOM Worklist Setting

1. Enter the “Worklist” page: [Setup]→[Network Preset]→[DICOM Service]→ Worklist.
default service.
DICOM service setting for Worklist is described as follows:
Name Description
After you set the server(s) in DICOM Server Setting screen, the
Device name(s) will appear in the drop-down list, select the name of the
Worklist server.
Service Name Default is xxx-Worklist, and it can be modified.
Application Entity title, Here, it should be consistent with that of the
AE Title
Worklist server.
Port
consistent with that of the Worklist server port.
Maximum Retries Reserved feature
Interval Time(Sec) Reserved feature.
Timeout(Sec) connection to the service. Value: 5－60s, in increments of 5s, and 15
by default.
To set the AE Title of the scheduled station. For example, if the AE
Scheduled Station
Title of the Worklist server is M6, then the scheduled station AE Title
AE Title
here should be M6.
Add Click to add the Worklist service to the service list.
Update
Select an item in the service list, click [Default] and you can see “Y”
Default
in the Default column.
Verify
connected.
11-6 DICOM
Tips:
In terms of “Scheduled Station AE Title”, if you set this item in the Worklist server, then
“Scheduled Station AE Title” configured here should be consistent with the one set in the
server.
For example, when you set “Scheduled Station AE Title” in the Worklist server as M6 (this
means you assigned the scheduled exam to M6), then both “Scheduled Station AE Title”
and “AE Title” in the ultrasound system configuration should be M6.
11.1.4.4 MPPS Setting

1. Enter the “MPPS” page: “[Setup] → [Network Preset] → [DICOM Service] → MPPS.
default service.
DICOM MPPS setting items are described as follows:
Name Description
Device
appear in the drop-down list, select the name of the MPPS server.
Service
Default is xxx-MPPS, and it can be modified.
Name
Application Entity title, here, it should be consistent with that of the MPPS
AE Title
server.
Port
consistent with that of the MPPS server.
Maximum
Reserved feature.
Retries
Interval
Reserved feature.
Time(s)
Timeout Value: 5－60s, in increments of 5s, and 15 by default.
Update
Delete Click to delete the selected service in the service list
Select an item in the service list, click [Default] and you can see “Y” in the
Default
Default column.
Verify
connected.
DICOM 11-7
11.1.4.5 Storage Commitment Setting
1. Enter the “Storage Commitment” page: “[Setup] → [Network Preset] → [DICOM
Service]→Storage Commitment.
default service.
DICOM storage commitment setting items are described as follows:
Name Description
Device appear in the drop-down list, select the name of the storage
commitment server.
Service Name Default is xxx-SC, and it can be modified.
Application Entity title, Here, it should be consistent with that of the
AE Title
storage commitment server.
Port
consistent with that of the storage commitment server port.
Maximum Retries Reserved feature.
Interval Time(Sec) Reserved feature.
Timeout(Sec) Value: 5－60s, in increments of 5s, and 15 by default.
Associated The associated storage server is preset before storage commitment,
Storage Service only after the exam is sent out, can storage commitment be created.
Update
Select an item in the service list, click [Default] and you can see “Y”
Default
in the Default column.
Verify
connected.
11.1.4.6 Query/ Retrieve Setting

1. Enter the “Query/ Retrieve” page: “[Setup] → [Network Preset] → [DICOM Service] →
Query/ Retrieve.
2. Select device, enter the information. For device setting, please refer to “11.1.3
11-8 DICOM
default service.
DICOM query/retrieve setting items are described as follows:
Name Description
After you set the server (s) in DICOM Server Preset screen, the name (s) will
Device
appear in the drop-down list, select the name of the server.
Service
Default: xxx-Store, and it can be modified
Name
AE Title Application Entity title
DICOM communication port, 104 is default. Here, the port should be
Port
consistent with that of the query/retrieve server port.
Maximum
Reserved feature.
Retries
Interval
Reserved feature.
Time(s)
Timeout Value: 5－60s, in increments of 5s, and 15 by default.
Add Add the DICOM service to the service list
Cancel Click to cancel parameter setting
Select an item in the service list, change the parameters in the above area,
Update
and click [Update] to update the item in the service list.
Verify Click to verify if the two DICOM application entities are normally connected.
Select an item in the service list, click [Default] and you can see “Y” in the
Default
Default column.
11.2 Verify Connectivity

If you want to verify connectivity (it is not a must), you can click [Verify] button on the
pages of DICOM Service screen respectively.
 If the verification succeeds, it will prompt “xxx Verify Succeed”.
 Otherwise, it prompts “xxx Verify Failed”.
If verification failed, the possible causes may be:
 The ultrasound machine can’t communicate normally with the server. Please
check if the cable is properly connected; or,
Check if the IP of the server is configured in the same segment with that of the
ultrasound machine; or,
Check if the network adapter, the router, the exchanger and the HUB are normally
working.
DICOM 11-9
 The server does not support the verification. If the connection is normal, it can be
concluded that the server does not support the verification.
 The server supports the verification, but this function is not activated. Please
check if the verification function is activated.
Tips:
Not all the SCPs can support verification; please consult SCP belongings to confirm
whether SCP can support this service. If not, the verification won’t pass.
11.3 DICOM Service

If the system is configured with DICOM modules, and connected to the relevant DICOM
servers, after verifying connection, you can perform storage, print, Worklist, storage
commitment, structured report and query/ retrieve applications.
11.3.1 DICOM Storage

DICOM Storage is used to send image(s) to DICOM storage server for storage.
 Send image in iStation/Review/main screens:
(1) Select image(s)
 Press <iStation> to enter the iStation screen, click to select an exam record in the
list, where thumbnails are displayed in the thumbnail area in the lower part of the
screen, and then click to select a thumbnail or several thumbnails. Or,
 Press <Review> to enter the Review screen, click to select an image or several
images. Or,
 On the main screen, select a thumbnail or several thumbnails.
(2) On the iStation/Review screen, click the corresponding [Send To] button, or, on
the main screen, click at the right side of Thumbnail area.
(3) Select DICOM in the “Target” list; select a server in the “Storage Server” list.
(4) Click [OK] to start the sending.
 To send images by shortcut key
(1) You can save single frame image or multi-frame images to DICOM server by
shortcut key:
 Save Image to DICOM Storage.
 Save Clip to DICOM Storage.
You can select <Save>, <F1>, <F2>, <F3>, <F4>, <F5>, <F6> on the control panel, or
footswitch keys as user-defined keys.
(2) Define the shortcut key.
a) Enter the key configuration page: "[Setup]→[System Preset]→[Key Config]".
b) Assign functions to the desired keys.
c) Click [OK] to confirm.
d) Select [Return] in the Setup menu to take effect.
(3) To set default server
a) Enter the “Storage” page: “[Setup]→[Network Preset]→[DICOM Service
Setting]→Storage.
b) Select the desired server in the server list, and click [Default.]
c) Click [Exit] to confirm the settings, and click [Return] in Setup menu to take
effect.
11-10 DICOM
(4) Press XX key on the control panel (which has been assigned as the shortcut key
for “Save Image to DICOM Storage”), the image is frozen. The system captures
the current screen image and sends it to the storage server as the single-frame
file. Or,
Press XX on the control panel (assigned as shortcut key for “Send Clip to DICOM
Storage”), the system will freeze the image and save it as multi-frame file and
send it to the storage server.
 To send images for storage after an exam ends:
(1) Open [Setup] → [System Preset] →[General], and then check
in the Animal Management area.
(2) Set a default storage server as described before.
(3) After finishing the setting, you can perform image scanning, and each time you
press <End Exam>, the system will send images to the default DICOM storage
server.
 Send image/ clip to DICOM storage while storing image/ clip to hard disk
(1) Open [Setup] → [System Preset] →[General], then check
or in the Image/ clip
Storage area.
(3) After the setting, every time you save images or clips, the system will send images
or clip to DICOM storage automatically.
11.3.2 DICOM Print

DICOM Print is used to send image(s) to DICOM print server to print images.
 Print image in iStation/Review/main screens
(1) Select image(s), operations are the same with DICOM storage.
(2) In the Send To dialogue box, select a DICOM print server. (Procedures are the
same with those in DICOM Storage).
(3) Click [OK] to send print task.
 To send images by shortcut key
You can send single frame image to DICOM server by shortcut key.
(1) Define the shortcut key for “Send Image to DICOM Server” in the path:
[Setup]→[System Preset] → [Key Config].
(2) Set a default print server. For details, please refer to “11.1.4.2 Print Service
Setting”.
(3) Press XX on the control panel (assigned as the shortcut key), then the system
sends the image to the print server.
 To print image after an exam ends
(1) Open [Setup] →[System Preset]→[General], then check
(2) Set a default print server. For details, please refer to “11.1.4.2 Print Service
Setting”.
(3) After finishing the setting, you can perform image scanning, and each time you
press <End Exam>, the system will send images to the default DICOM print
server.
DICOM 11-11
 Send image to DICOM printer while storing image to hard disk
(1) Open [Setup] →[System Preset]→[General], then check
in the Image/ clip Storage area.
(3) After the setting, every time you save images or clips, the system will send images
to DICOM printer to print the image automatically.
11.3.3 DICOM Worklist

After successfully connected DICOM Worklist server with ultrasound system, you can
query Animal records from Worklist server, and then import the desired information to your
system.
 To query Animal information via Worklist server:
(1) Press <Patient> to enter Animal Info screen.
(2) Click [WorkList] to enter the WorkList page.
(3) Query Animal information:
a) Set query criteria among Animal ID, Animal Name, Accession #, Search Key,
Worklist Server or Exam Date. The default exam date is the current date.
b) Click [Query].
c) The scheduled Animals, which meet the criteria, are displayed in the lower
part of the screen.
d) After the first query, you can perform the second query based on the previous
results. The scheduled Animals in the list will update in real time.
(4) Select the desired Animal record in the displayed Animal list, and
 Select the desired Animal and click [Start Exam], the Animal information is
imported into the system and then an exam is started.
 Click [Transfer], the Animal information is imported into the Animal Info screen.
Edit the Animal information in the Animal Info screen, and select [OK] to start a
new exam.
(5) To show Animal information in details:
a) Click to select a Animal record.
b) Click [Show Detail] to view the detailed Animal information and properties.
 Use the automatic query function via Worklist server
(1) Enter DICOM Service Preset screen, and open the Worklist page:
[Setup]→[Network Preset]→[DICOM Service]→Worklist.
(2) Select an item in the service list, and click [Default] to set the server to be the
default service.
(3) Click [Exit] and click [Return] in the Setup menu.
(4) Press <Patient> to enter Animal Info screen.
(5) Click [WorkList] to enter the WorkList page.
(6) The system queries intraday Animals via Worklist server automatically and the
Animal records will appear in the list.
In the off-line status, you can:
11-12 DICOM
 Perform a second query; or,
 Click [Show Detail] to view the Animal information in details.
11.3.4 MPPS
MPPS is used to send exam status information to the configured DICOM server. This can
acquaint other medical devices with the current exam progress and facilitate better
arrangements for Animals.
 After you preset the Worklist server and MPPS server, if the system retrieves Animal
information from Worklist server to begin exam, it will send exam status information to
MPPS server of whether the exam is undergoing or ended. If the sending fails, the
system resend automatically.
The status information is described as follows:
 When you begin an exam, the system sends status information “In Progress” to
MPPS server.
 When the exam is ended, the system sends status information “Completed” to
MPPS server.
 When a paused exam is continued, the system sends status information “In
Progress” to MPPS server.
 When an exam is cancelled, the system sends status information “Discontinued”
to MPPS server.
 When an ended exam is activated, the system sends status information “In
Progress” to MPPS server.
11.3.5 Storage Commitment

Storage commitment is used to confirm whether images or structured reports are
successfully stored to the DICOM server.
Before storage commitment, you should set a default storage commitment server.
 Storage commitment after sending images on iStation screen
(1) Press <iStation> to enter iStation screen.
(2) Select an exam record (the exam is suspended or inactive and image(s) is/are
stored in the exam record), click [Send To] button at the right side of Animal list to
open the Send To dialogue box.
(3) Click to select “DICOM” in the “Target” box on the left side, and then select the
DICOM storage server in the “Storage Server” box on the right side.
(4) Click [OK] to start sending. The system will send all the images stored in the
exam record to the storage server, meanwhile, it will send storage commitment to
the storage commitment server.
 To send storage commitment after an exam ends
1. Open [Setup] →[System Preset]→[General], then check
2. Set the default storage server and storage commitment server (refer to “11.1 DICOM
Preset”).
3. After finish the above settings, every time you press <End Exam>, the system will
send images to the default DICOM storage server for storage and storage
commitment to default DICOM storage commitment server.
DICOM 11-13
If images are successfully send to the storage server, the storage commitment server will
return information about the successful image storage. In the iStation screen, you will see
a tick “√” marked on in the list below .
Storage commitment is confined to the whole exam, while each image sending will not be
indicated.
NOTE: Multi-frame storage is not allowed if “Allow Multiframe” is not
selected([Setup]→[Network Preset]→[DICOM Service Setting]→Storage). For
example, if there is multi-frame file in the exam to be sent, then only single-frame
image storage will be performed, and after the storage is completed, there is no
“√” marked in the list below in the iStation screen.
11.3.6 Query/ Retrieve

The query/ retrieve function is employed to query and retrieve the Animal exam records in
a designated server.
After setting the DICOM query/ retrieve server, you can perform the query/ retrieve
function in iStation screen.
1. Open iStation screen: press <iStation> or press <Patient> and click [iStation].
2. Click [Query/ Retrieve] to enter the screen.
3. Select the server in “Server and Service” area for the source and the destination.
4. Enter the query information, such as Animal name, Animal ID, accession number,
exam time, and select keyword for searching.
Click [Clear] to empty the entered query information.
5. Click [Query], the system performs the query to the server and lists out the result into
the Animal (source) list.
You can perform a second query based on the preview results.
6. Select one or more Animal records according to the actual situation.
Click [Select All] to select all the Animal records listed.
Click [Deselect All] to deselect all the Animal records listed.
7. Click [Retrieve] to retrieve the Animal records in the DICOM query/ retrieve server into
the system.
8. Click [Exit], you can see the retrieved Animal records listed in the iStation screen.
11.4 DICOM Media Storage

The system supports to save Animal data to the external media in DCM format.
Meanwhile, in the system, you can view the saved DCM files from external media.
 Media storage:
1. Select Animal record(s) in the iStation screen.
2. Click [Backup] to enter the following dialogue box:
11-14 DICOM
3. Select destination in the drop-down list (CD/DVD/USB disk) and select “DICOM
Format”.
4. Set whether to remove Animal exam data or only images from the local hard disk.
5. Click [Backup] to begin storage.
If the backup succeeded, there will be a tick marked in the Backup list in iStation screen;
otherwise, no tick is marked.
Tips:
There should be no DICOMDIR/ DCMIMG/IHE_PDI files in the external storage media of
the same name with the one being backed up, otherwise, the backup can’t proceed.
Please make sure there is enough storage space; otherwise, backup may fail due to
space shortage.
 Media review:
1. Connect the external media with DCM files to the system.
2. Select the data source in iStation screen, and the visible data will be shown.
If there are several kinds of data on the media, the system will ask you to select the format,
as shown in the following:
Data Restore:
1. If the DICOM format data is backed up to external media, you can restore the data to
the system from the media.
2. Review the data stored in the external media.
3. Select the data to be restored in iStation.
4. Click [Restore] in the iStation screen. If the data to be restored already existed in the
system, it asks whether to overwrite the data or not.
NOTE: Only the system accessible media can be selected.
DICOM 11-15
11.5 Showcase Recording
Showcase software can be employed for DICOM image file viewing.
When record DICOM files (both files backed up as DICOMDIR format and files
transformed into DICOM files by clicking [Send To]) and structured reports, the showcase
can be recorded to the CDs together. Insert a CD containing showcase software, the
showcase runs automatically.
NOTE: To view the DCM files successfully, it is suggested to install NET Framework
(Visual Studio.Net) of a version later than 2.0, if your computer was installed
with TortoiseSVN.
11.6 DICOM Task Management

DICOM Task Management is used to view task progress or manage tasks after sending
images for storage, print, or media storage.
Please refer to “10.8 Animal Task Management” for details.
11-16 DICOM
12 Probes and Biopsy
Note: For details of storage time and condition for disinfected probes or sterilized
probes and brackets, please refer to Technical standard for Disinfection of Medical
and Health Structures
12.1 Probe
The system supports the following probes:
Probe Illustration Probe
Illustration
Model Model
6CV1s D7-2s
7L4s 2P2s
P7-3s L14-6Ns
P4-2s 6C2s
Probes and Biopsy 12-1

3C5s C11-3s
P7-3Ts 7L5s
L14-6s 6LE5Vs
12.1.1 Name and Function of Each Part of the Probe

The basic structures and corresponding functions of probes are basically the same. The
following will take probe 7L4s as an example to illustrate.
<1>
<3>
<2>
<4>
12-2 Probes and Biopsy

No. Name Function
It converts the electrical signal into ultrasound signal,
making the sound beams focus in the given direction;
meanwhile, it will receive the ultrasound signal and then
<1> Probe head convert the received signal into electrical signal.
The lens on the surface is the acoustic lens. Apply
ultrasound gel on the acoustic lens.
Needle-guided
<2> bracket fix tabs and Used to mount the needle-guided bracket.
grooves
Used to transmit electrical signals between the probe
<3> Probe cable
body and connector.
Used to connect the probe to the ultrasonic diagnostic
<4> Probe connector
system.
Tips:
The probes’ structure marked <2> in the figure above may vary with the matched
needle-guided brackets.
12.1.2 Orientation of the Ultrasound Image and the

Probe Head
The orientation of the ultrasound image and the probe are shown as below. The “Mark”
side of the ultrasound image on the monitor corresponds to the mark side of the probe.
Check the orientation before the examination (Here takes linear probe as an example).
Orientation mark

Mark
12.1.3 Procedures for Operating

This section describes general procedures for operating the probe. The proper clinical
technique to be used for operating the probe should be selected on the basis of
specialized training and clinical experience.

 Procedures for operating (with biopsy function):
Inspection before examination
Connection to the ultrasonic

diagnostic system
Examinations
Biopsy procedure
Disconnection to the ultrasonic

diagnostic system
Sterilization of the needle-
guided bracket
Wiping off the ultrasound gel

Inspection after use
Washing the transducer with water

Storage
Draining/drying
Immersion into disinfectant
Removing the transducer

from disinfectant
Rinsing the transducer in sterile water
Draining/drying
Storage

 Procedures for operating (with no biopsy function):
Inspection before examination
Connection to the ultrasonic

diagnostic system
Examinations
Disconnection to the ultrasonic

diagnostic system
Wiping off the ultrasound gel
Washing the
transducer with water
Draining/drying
Disinfection
Immersion into disinfectant
Removing the transducer

from disinfectant
Rinsing the transducer into sterile water
Draining/drying
Storage
Disinfect the probe and sterilize the needle-guided bracket

before and after an ultrasound-guided biopsy procedure is
WARNING: performed. Failure to do so may cause the probe and the
needle-guided bracket become source of infection.

12.1.4 Wearing the Probe Sheath
A legally marketed probe sheath must be installed over the probe before performing
intra-cavitary and intra-operative examination. Protective barriers may be required to
minimize disease transmission. Probe sheaths are available for use with all clinical
situations where infection is a concern.
To order probe sheath, contact:
CIVCO Medical Instruments Co.
102 First Street South, Kalona, IA 52247-9589 USA Tel: 1-319-656-4447
E-mail: info@civco.com
http://www.civco.com
1. Be sure to cover the probe with a new (unused) probe
CAUTION: sheath to prevent infection during examination. If the
package of a probe sheath is open or broken, the
sterilization of the probe sheath may not be sufficient. DO
NOT use such a probe sheath.
2. The cover contains natural rubber latex and talc that can
cause allergic reactions in some individuals.
3. DO NOT use an expired probe sheath. Before using probe
sheaths, verify whether the term of validity has expired.
Method (for reference only):
1. Place an appropriate amount of gel 2. Insert the probe into the sheath; make
inside the sheath or on probe face. Poor sure to use proper sterile technique.
imaging may result if no gel is used. Pull cover tightly over probe face to
remove wrinkles and air bubbles,
taking care to avoid puncturing cover.
3. Secure the sheath with enclosed elastic 4. Inspect the sheath to ensure there are
bands. no holes or tears.

12.1.5 Probes Cleaning and Disinfection
After completing each examination, clean and disinfect (or sterilize) the probes as
required. When biopsy procedures have been performed, be sure to sterilize the
needle-guided bracket. Fail to do so may result in the probe and the needle-guided
bracket to becoming sources of infection. Please follow the instructions in the manual for
cleaning.
Never immerse the probe connector into liquid such as water
WARNING: or disinfectant. Immersion may cause electrical shock or
malfunction.
1. When performing cleaning and

CAUTION: disinfection of the probe to prevent
infection, wear sterile gloves.
2. After disinfection, rinse the probe thoroughly with sterile

water to remove all chemical residues. Chemical residues
on the probe may be harmful to the human body.
3 No cleaning and disinfecting may result in the probe
becoming a source of infection.
NOTE: 1. After the examination, wipe off the ultrasound gel thoroughly. Otherwise,
the ultrasound gel may solidify and degrade the image quality of the
transducer.
2. DO NOT make the probe to become overheated (more than 55°C) during
cleaning and disinfections. High temperature may cause the probe to
become deformed or damaged.
Cleaning
Please refer to the instructions in the manual and follow your hospital policy and
procedures for cleaning.
1. Disconnect the probe from the system.
2. Wear sterile gloves to prevent infection.
3. Wash the transducer with clean water or soapy water to remove all the foreign
matters, or, wipe the transducer with a soft ethyl carbamate sponge. Avoid using a
brush, because it may damage the transducer.
4. Dry the transducer using a sterile cloth or gauze after rinsing. Do not dry the
transducer by heating it.
Disinfecting with Sprays
Use protective eyewear when disinfecting using sprays.

CAUTION:
Wear sterile gloves to prevent infection.

1. After you have finished cleaning, spray the transducer with a disinfectant. Follow the
disinfectant manufacturer’s recommended contact time and mode.
2. Remove any residue with a water-moistened soft cloth on the transducer.
3. Wipe off water on the transducer using sterile cloth or gauze after washing.
Connector
Strain relief
NOTE: Observe the graph here carefully to perform disinfection. Do not spray the strain
relief on the connector end or the connector.
Disinfecting by Immersion
Wear sterile gloves to prevent infection.
Clean the transducer before disinfecting it.MINDRAY recommends the following
solutions to disinfect the transducer.
 Refer to the instructions provided by the chemical manufacturer concerning
concentration of the disinfectant solution, method of disinfection and dilution and
cautions during use.Do not soak the transducer connector or the cable near it into
water or any solution.
 Soak the transducer into the disinfectant solution for the shortest time the
manufacturer recommends (for example, the shortest time recommended by the
manufacturer for soaking Cidex OPA is 12 minutes).
 Follow local regulations when selecting and using the disinfectant.
Rinse the transducer with plenty of sterile water (about 2 gallons) for at least 1 minute
to remove all chemical residues on it.Or, follow the rinsing method recommended by
the disinfectant manufacturer to rinse the transducer.
Wipe off the water on the transducer with sterile cloth or gauze after rinsing it.Do not
dry the transducer by heating.

Strain relief
Probe handle
NOTE: 1. Observe the graph here carefully to immerse the transducer. Only soak
parts of the transducer below the strain relief.
2. Repeated disinfection will eventually damage the probe, please check the
probe performance periodically.
Compatible Disinfectants
Please refer to Disinfectant Compatible Chart accompanied with probes.
12.1.6 Storage and Transportation

When all examinations for the day have been completed, confirm that the probe is in good
condition. After disinfecting the probe, confirm that the probe is in good condition and
store it in a suitable place so that the next examination can be conducted smoothly.
1. To prevent the probe from being damaged, DO NOT store it in locations where it may
be exposed to:
 Direct sunlight or X-rays
 Sudden changes in temperature
 Dust
 Excessive vibration
 Heat generators
2. Store and transport the probe under the following ambient conditions:
 Ambient temperature: -20°C ～ 55°C
 Relative humidity: 30% ～ 95% (no condensation)
 Atmospheric pressure: 700 hPa ～ 1060 hPa
Store and transport the D7-2s probe under the following ambient conditions:
 Atmospheric pressure:700 hPa ～ 1060 hPa
Store and transport the P7-3Ts probe under the following ambient conditions:
 Atmospheric pressure:700 hPa ～ 1060 hPa

3. When the probe is sent to MINDRAY Customer Service Department or sales
representative for repair, be sure to disinfect it and keep it in the carrying case to
prevent infection.
4. Sterilize the carrying case as necessary.

12.2 Biopsy Guide
1. The person performing biopsy procedures must
WARNING: understand diagnostic ultrasound thoroughly and have
been trained adequately, otherwise, side effects may be
caused to the Animal.
2. In situations listed below, the biopsy needle may fail to
penetrate the target. The incorrect biopsy may cause
various side effects in the Animal.
Use a needle-guided bracket other than that provided.
Mount the needle-guided bracket incorrectly.
Use a biopsy needle that is unsuitable for the type of
biopsy being performed.
Use a biopsy needle or guiding block that is unsuitable
for the needle guide.
3. Before and after a biopsy procedure is performed,
confirm that the needle-guided bracket is normal.
Manually confirm that the parts of the needle-guided
bracket do not slip off or move from their proper
positions. If the needle-guided bracket is used when
parts are not securely and correctly installed, the
Animal may be injured. If an abnormality is found on the
needle-guided bracket, immediately stop using it and
contact MINDRAY Customer Service Department or
sales representative.
4. DO NOT use a needle-guided bracket when scanning is
performed. The needle may advance in an incorrect
direction and possibly injure the Animal.
Never perform a biopsy during image scanning.
5. DO NOT freeze an image while performing biopsy
procedure.
6. During biopsy procedures, the needle may deviate from
the desired course due to the tissue characteristics or
the type of needle. In particular, needles of small
diameters may deviate to a greater degree.
7. Disinfect the probe and sterilize needle-guided bracket
before and after each ultrasound-guided biopsy
procedure is performed. Fail to do so may cause the
probe and the needle-guided bracket become sources
of infection.
8. The needle mark displayed on the ultrasound image
does not indicate the actual position of the biopsy
needle. Therefore, it should only be used as a reference.
Always monitor the relative positions of the biopsy
needle during the procedures.
9. Adjust the needle mark before the biopsy procedure is
performed.

10. When performing biopsy procedures, use only sterile
ultrasound gel that is certified to be safe. And manage
the ultrasound gel properly to ensure that it does not
become a source of infection.
11. When performing the operation concerning biopsy,
wear sterile gloves.
12. Image of the biopsy target and the actual position of the
biopsy needle:
Diagnostic ultrasound systems produce tomographic
plane images with information of a certain thickness in
the thickness direction of the probe. (That is to say, the
information shown in the images consist all the
information scanned in the thickness direction of the
probe.) So, even though the biopsy needle appears to
have penetrated the target object in the image, it may
not actually have done so. When the target for biopsy is
small, dispersion of the ultrasound beam may lead to
image deviate from the actual position. Pay attention to
this.
If the target object and the biopsy needle appear in the
image as shown in the figures below (For reference
only):
Biopsy
Target
The biopsy needle appears to reach the target object in

the image

Probe
Needle
Target
Ultrasound beam
Dispersion of the ultrasound beam

The biopsy needle may not have actually entered the
target object even though it appears to have done so on
the image. To avoid this problem, note points below:
Do not rely only on the needle tip on the image. Pay
careful attention to that, when the biopsy needle comes
into the target object or contacts with it, the object
should shift slightly.
Before you perform the biopsy, please evaluate the size
of the object and confirm if the biopsy can be carried
out.
When using the needle-guided bracket wear sterile gloves to

CAUTION: prevent infection.
12.2.1 Basic Procedures for Biopsy Guiding

1. Select the appropriate needle-guided bracket and needle, and install them properly.
For details, please refer to “12.2.4 Needle-guided Bracket Inspection and Installation”.
Before biopsy guiding, you can preset bracket model, biopsy display and guide line
dot type. For details, please refer to “12.2.3 Biopsy Preset”.
2. Verify the biopsy guide line.
3. Move the cursor onto the image menu; navigate the cursor to [Other] item and press
<Set> or the multifunctional knob. Click [Biopsy] to enter biopsy.
Tips:
 If the current probe has no matched bracket; or, the image is frozen and the guide
line is hidden before image frozen, then you can’t enter Biopsy menu.
 Before entering Biopsy menu, the system will prompt you “Please verify
guidelines before biopsy”.
4. Set [Display] as “On” to display the guide line, select the bracket and guide line
according to actual situation. For details, please refer to “12.2.5 Biopsy Menu”.
5. On the Biopsy menu, click [Verify] to enter the Verify menu to verify the guide line.
After the verification, click [Save] on the menu to save the parameter setting. And then
click [Exit] to return to Biopsy menu.
Tips:
 If you switch the probe or needle-guided bracket during the biopsy, please verify
the guide line again.

 When exit the Biopsy Verify menu without saving the setting, system will confirm
with you “Data have changed. Do you want to save the changes?” Click [OK] to
save the setting and return to Biopsy menu.
6. Scan to locate the target. Center the target in the electronic guidezone path.
7. Direct the needle into the area of interest for specimen.
8. After extraction of the biopsy sample is completed, gently remove the probe from the
body. To exit Biopsy menu: press <Esc>; or, navigate the cursor onto the Other menu.
9. Disassemble the items and properly dispose of these items as required.
Fail to match the guidezone displayed to the guide may cause
DANGER: the needle to track a path outside the zone.
It is extremely important that when using the adjustable angle
biopsy guides, the angle displayed on the screen matches the
angle set on the guide, otherwise the needle will not follow the
displayed guidezone which could result in repeated biopsies
or Animal injury.
12.2.2 Needle-guided Brackets

A needle-guided bracket is available for purchase as an optional accessory; it is used in
combination with the probe. Some of the probes have matched needle-guided bracket
and needles. To order needle-guided brackets, contact MINDRAY Customer Service
Department or sales representative.
For biopsy or treatment, ultrasound-guided biopsy procedures can be performed using the
probe in combination with a needle-guided bracket (optional accessory) and a biopsy
needle (provided by the user).
Names of Parts
This section describes the parts and corresponding functions of each needle-guided
bracket.
 NGB-004：
Locking
nut Retaining clamp
Needle
Locating bulge guide
Locating groove Probe

 NGB-005/NGB-011
Needle-guided
bracket
Probe

 NGB-006/ NGB-007
 Metal needle-guided bracket:
8
7
6
10
3
4
1 5
No. Name Description

Support of needle-guided Used for installing the needle-guided bracket on the
1.
bracket probe.
Groove and tab of the Respectively matches with the tab and groove of the
2.
needle-guided bracket probe
3. Angle adjusting base There are 3 types of angles available to be adjusted.
Angle shift sign(40°, 50°,
4. Matched with the biopsy angle (40°, 50°, and 60°).
60°)
5. Angle pinch nut Used for fixing the angle lock at a chosen angle.
Used for determining the angle of the biopsy; different
6. Angle block
specifications of blocks can be used.
Used for installing biopsy needle; there are five
7. Guiding block specifications of guiding blocks for different biopsy
needles.
Specification of guiding
8. Matched with the corresponding biopsy needle (14G).
block (14G)
9. Needle guide hole Used for installing the biopsy needle.
Pinch nut of needle-guided Used for locking the needle-guided bracket and the
10.
bracket probe

 Plastic needle-guided bracket:
No. Name Description

Support of needle-guided Used for installing the needle-guided bracket on the
<1>
bracket probe.
Used for determining the angle of the biopsy; there
<2> Angle block
are three specifications of blocks of angle.
Used for installing biopsy needle; there are five
<3> Guiding block specifications of guiding blocks for different biopsy
needles.
Groove and tab of the Respectively matched with the tab and groove of the
<4>
needle-guided bracket probe.
Specification of guiding
<5> Matched with the corresponding biopsy needle (13G).
block (13G)
<6> Needle guide hole Used for installing the biopsy needle.
Specification of angle block
<7> Corresponding to the size of the biopsy angle (60°).
(60°)
 NGB-018
Needle guide hole
Guiding block
Guiding block
specification
Pinch nut of bracket

Angle shift sign
Angle pinch nut Angle-adjusting base
Angle block Groove
Clamp

12.2.3 Biopsy Preset
Enter the biopsy preset page: [Setup]→[System Preset]→“Biopsy”.
 Bracket preset
To set the default bracket for a probe:
1. Select a probe model in the Probe Model list, all the supported bracket models will be
displayed in the “Bracket Model” list on the right side. (If the selected probe has no
bracket matched, no model is displayed.)
2. Click to select a bracket model on the Bracket Model list.
3. Click [OK] to confirm the setting and return to Setup menu.
To set if to display/hide guide line and dot type.
1. Check [Guide Line Display] to set the guide line display, otherwise, the guide line is
hidden when enters biopsy status.
2. On “Guide Line Dot Type” column, select a dot type among Small, Medium and Big.
3. Click [OK] to confirm the setting and return to Setup menu.
12.2.4 Needle-guided Bracket Inspection and

Installation
Inspection of the Needle-guided Bracket
Be sure to perform inspections before and after use of the needle-guided bracket. If an
abnormality is found on the needle-guided bracket, immediately stop using it and contact
MINDRAY Customer Service Department or sales representative.
1. Sterilize the needle-guided bracket before and after use.
2. Confirm that the needle-guided bracket is free of damage, deformation, stripping, and
malfunction, loose or missing parts.
3. Confirm that the needle-guided bracket is securely mounted in the correct position.
Installing the Needle-guided Bracket

 NGB-004
1. Put on the sterile probe sheath.
2. Open the retaining clamp, align the needle-guided bracket with the probe to locate the
locating bulge on the needle guide to the locating grooves on the probe, and then turn
the retaining clamp to match it with the probe (See the figure below).
3. When the retaining clamp is turned to the right position, the locking nut will lock the
retaining clamp and the needle-guided bracket is then mounted to the right position.

 NGB-005/NGB-011
(1) Inosculate the locating groove on the clamp with the two raised edges on the
probe head and aligning the locating pit of the clamp to the convex point on the
probe head.
(2) Turn the grip knob at the tail of the needle-guided bracket tightly.
 NGB-006/ NGB-007
 Metal needle-guided bracket
a) Put on the sterile probe sheath.
b) Select a proper needle-guided bracket, and match the groove and tab with
the tab and groove of the probe respectively. Mount the bracket onto the
probe.
c) Screw the pinch nut of the needle-guided bracket to confirm that the
needle-guided bracket is properly installed on the probe.
d) Select a proper guiding block and push it into the groove above the angle
block, and clamp it tightly.
e) Screw the nut of the block to secure the block.

f) Insert a biopsy needle with the same specification as that of the guiding block
into the hole of the guiding block.
 Plastic needle-guided bracket

a) Put on the sterile probe sheath.
b) Hold the probe by one hand, select the proper needle-guided bracket, and
hold it with the other hand. Align the narrow end tab of the needle-guided
bracket with the groove of the probe, then push the needle-guided bracket
forward, making the tabs and the grooves of the needle-guided bracket to
match with the grooves and tabs of the probe.

c) Check manually to confirm that the needle-guided bracket is securely
installed on the probe.
d) Select a proper guiding block and push it into the groove above the angle
block, and clamp it tightly.
e) Insert a biopsy needle with the same specification as that of the guiding block
into the hole of the guiding block.
 NGB-018
(1) Put the sterile probe sheath on.
(2) Select a suitable needle-guided bracket and match the groove to the tab of the
transducer. Mount the bracket onto the transducer. The needle-guided brackets
may be different from each other, but the methods are the same.
(3) Screw the pinch nut of the needle-guided bracket to ensure that the
needle-guided bracket is properly installed on the transducer.
(4) Select a suitable guiding block and push it into the groove above the angle block.
(5) Screw the block's nut to secure the block.

(6) Insert a biopsy needle with the same specification as that of the guiding block into
the guiding block hole.
Ensure that all guide parts are seated properly prior to

CAUTION: performing a biopsy.

12.2.5 Biopsy Menu
Move the cursor onto the image menu; navigate the cursor to [Other] item and press
<Set> or the multifunctional knob. Click [Biopsy] to enter the biopsy menu.
 Select biopsy bracket angle

If the needle-guided bracket supports more than one biopsy angle, you can select the
angle from the drop-down list (the last two numerals).
 Select Guide Line
If a bracket has more than one guide lines, then you can see the [Guide Line] item,
and click to display the guide lines, whether one line or all.
 Display or hide the guide line
To display the guide line, set [Display] as “On”; to hide the guide line, set [Display] as
“Off”.
Or, press <Biopsy> on the control panel to display or hide the guide line.
 Select guide line dot size
Move the cursor onto [Dot Size], press <Set> to select the dot size among Small,
Medium and Big.
Tips:
 The guide line is a dot line which consists of two kinds of dots, the distance
between two dots is depth dependent. Move the cursor onto the big dot, a
numeral, which represents the biopsy depth, is displayed.
 The biopsy guidezone adjusts along with image adjustments, such as image
inversion/rotations, zoom and depth changes.
 When the imaging depth and scan range are changed, the guide line will be
adjusted.
 Select through B mode image menu:
 [Biopsy]: to display or hide the guide line.
 [Biopsy Kit]: to select bracket angle.
Preset the two items through: [Setup]→[Image Preset]→[Menu Preset].

12.2.6 iNeedle
In the course of biopsy, the metal needle attached to the probe is punctured into the tissue
with a certain angle; because of the needle acoustic impedance, the ultrasonic beam
cannot penetrate the metal needle, a reflecting boundary is formed. As in figure 1, if the
deflection angle is very large, the needle display is not clear.
In the condition of deflected ultrasonic transmission, the beam direction is perpendicular
to the needle direction, and the reflection direction will be the same with the needle, as
shown in figure 2, when the needle display in the ultrasound image is very clear. The
system provides an additional deflection transmission that is approximately perpendicular
to the metal needle, as the normal transmission (perpendicular to the transducer surface)
is contained as well. And the deflection angel can be chosen by users.
Figure 1 Figure 2
To enter/exit iNeedle
 To enter iNeedle
Click [iNeedle] item in B soft menu.
Or, you can assign a user-defined key for entering iNeedle.
 Open iNeedle in Biopsy status
1. Perform scanning and locate the target, press <Biopsy> to enter the screen.
2. Click [iNeedle] to enter the status, available adjusting parameters are displayed on
the menu.
 To exit iNeedle
Press the user-defined key or click [iNeedle] to exit the status and enter B mode.
Needle Steer
Description This function adjusts the biopsy needle angle via changing the steer angle
of the scan line. The iNeedle affecting region changes correspondingly.
Operation Adjust through the [Needle Steer] item on the menu.
B/iNeedle
Description This function is used to display B image and iNeedle image synchronously.
Operation Adjust through [B/iNeedle] on the menu.
Tips: iZoom (full-screen magnification) is available on iNeedle status.

12.2.7 Verifying the Biopsy Guide Line
Prior to each biopsy procedure, be sure to verify the
WARNING: 1.
guide line.
If the needle is not consistent with the guide line, DO
2.
NOT perform the biopsy procedure.
NOTE: You can perform guide line verification on a single live B/C image only, and all
biopsy-irrelevant operations are forbidden.
1. Confirm that the needle-guided bracket has been installed securely in the correct
position.
2. Prepare a container filled with sterile water.
3. Place the head of the probe in the sterile water, and get a biopsy needle into the
needle guide.
When the biopsy needle appears on the image, please adjust the parameters of the
menu on the screen to make sure that the biopsy needle is displayed at almost the
same position as the selected needle mark.
 Adjust guide line position

Move the cursor onto [Position], press <Set> to move it linearly, or press and
rotate the multifunctional-knob. This is operative when there is only one guide line
displayed.
 Adjust angle
Move the cursor onto [Angle], press <Set> to change the guide line angle, or
press and rotate the multifunctional-knob. This is operative when there is only
one guide line displayed.
 Save verified settings
After the position and angle of the guide line are adjusted, click [Save], and the
system will save the current settings of the guide line. When enter biopsy again,
the displayed Position and Angle are the verified value.
 Restore the factory default settings
Click [Load Factory], and the position and angle of the guide line will be restored
to the factory default settings.
 Exit the biopsy verify status
Click [Exit], and the system will exit the verification status of the guide line.

12.2.8 Removing the Needle-guided Bracket
 NGB-004
Hold the probe in the left hand, unscrew the locking nut with the right hand to open the
retaining clamp, and then raise the needle-guided bracket to separate the locating
bulge from the locating grooves.
 NGB-005/NGB-011
Hold the probe and the needle-guided bracket, open the grip knob of the
needle-guided bracket.
 NGB-006/ NGB-007
 Metal needle-guided bracket:
(1) Screw the nut of the guiding block and remove the guiding block slightly along the
direction of the needle’s tail.
(2) Separate the residual part of the needle-guided bracket and the probe from the
needle.
(3) Screw the pinch nut of the bracket, and remove the needle-guided bracket from
the probe.
 Plastic needle-guided bracket:

(1) Remove the guiding block slightly along the direction of the needle’s tail.
(2) Separate the residual part of the needle-guide bracket and the probe from the
needle.
(3) Remove the support of needle-guided bracket from the probe.
 NGB-018
(1) Loosen the guiding block's nut and slightly move the guiding block in the direction
of the needle’s tail.

(2) Separate the residual part of the needle-guide bracket and the transducer from
the needle.
(3) Loosen the bracket's pinch nut and remove the needle-guided bracket from the
transducer.
12.2.9 Clean and Sterilize the Needle-guided Bracket

Cleaning
2. Wash the needle-guided bracket with water or soap water to remove all the external
matters. Or, clean the needle-guided bracket with urethane sponge.
3. Wipe off the water on the needle-guided bracket using sterile cloth or gauze after
washing it.
Please follow the instructions in the manual for cleaning.
Sterilization
2. Clean the needle-guided bracket before sterilizing it. MINDRAY recommends the
following solution or sterilizing system to sterilize the needle-guided bracket.
3. Follow local regulations when selecting and using the disinfectant.
 Glutaraldehyde-based sterilant:
Chemical
Trade name Procedures
name
Cidex Please refer to the instructions provided by the
Glutaraldehyde Activated manufacturer of the solution for details.
(2.2-2.7%) Glutaraldehyde Soak the transducer into the activated solution for
Solution 10 hours (20-25℃)
Before safety and performance is affected, plastic bracket NGB-007 can be sterilized by
Cidex Activated Glutaraldehyde Solution for at least 233 times (10 hours for one time).
 Refer to the instructions provided by the chemical manufacturer concerning
concentration of the solution, and method of disinfections and dilution. Note that
the glutaraldehyde disinfectant solution needs an activating solution.
 Rinse the needle-guided bracket thoroughly with sterile water to remove all
chemical residues on it.
 Wipe off the water on the needle-guided bracket with sterile cloth or gauze after
rinsing it.
 STERRAD 100S low-temperature hydrogen peroxide gas plasma sterilization system
Chemical
Trade name Procedures
name
Hydrogen
Hydrogen Please refer to the instructions provided by the
peroxide gas
peroxide vapor producer of the solution for details.
plasma

Refer to the instruction of STERRAD 100S sterilizing system provided by the
manufacturer for operation instructions and cautions.
 The STERRAD 100S low-temperature hydrogen peroxide gas plasma
sterilization system is available for metal needle-guided brackets.
 Hydrogen Peroxide and Peroxyacetic Acid -based sterilant:
Trade Name Chemical Name Procedures
Minncare® Cold 22% Hydrogen Dilute the sterilant with sterilized purified
Sterilant Peroxide water (1:20).
4.5% Peroxyacetic Immersed time: 11 hours.
Acid Temperature: 20℃-25℃.
Please refer to the instructions provided by
the manufacturer of the solution for details.
Before safety and performance is affected, plastic bracket NGB-007 can be sterilized by
Minncare COLD STERILANT for at least 245 times (11 hours for one time).
 High-pressure steam sterilization (only applicable for metal guided-bracket)

Autoclaving (moist heat) 121C for 20 minutes.
NOTE: 1. Repeated sterilization may degrade the safety and performance of the
needle-guided bracket.
2. The high-pressure steam/ immersion sterilization do not affect the bracket
dual life, and the dual life is affected by the daily application of the bracket.
Please check the appearance of the bracket before using.
3. Sterilization of plastic guided-bracket NGB-007 with Minncare COLD
STERILANT can be done at least 245 times and 11 hours for each time.
12.2.10 Storage and Transportation

1. Don’t use the carrying case for storing the needle-guided bracket. If the carrying case
is used for storage, it may become a source of infection.
2. Between examinations, keep the needle-guided bracket in a sterile environment.
3. When the needle-guided bracket is sent to your MINDRAY representative for repair,
be sure to disinfect or sterilize it and keep it in the carrying case to prevent infection.
4. Sterilize the carrying case as necessary.
5. Store or transport the needle-guided bracket under the following ambient conditions:
 Ambient temperature: -20°C to 55°C
 Relative humidity: 30% to 95% (no condensation)
12.2.11 Disposal
Be sure to dispose the needle-guided bracket only after sterilizing it.
Contact your MINDRAY representative when disposing of this device.

12.3 Middle Line
Middle Line helps to locate and observe the focus point of lithotripsy wave during
lithotripsy treatment. By means of providing information for the lithotripsy machine as well
as a tool for watching the procedure of lithotripsy in real-time, you can adjust the intension
and frequency of the lithotripsy wave through lithotripsy machine.
NOTE: This function in the ultrasound system is for lesion (stone) location and
observation only. For details, please refer to lithotripsy machine accompanying
manuals.
 To enter the mode: Click [Other] → [Biopsy] → [Middle Line] in the image menu to turn
on the function.
 The middle line is a vertical dotted line located in the middle of the screen, the
position and direction of which cannot be changed.
 There is a mark icon of “×” located on the middle line which can be moved up and
down along the line by rolling the track ball.
 To use the Middle Line function of the ultrasound system:
a) Use the trackball to change the mark position and by adjusting lithotripsy
machine tools or Animal posture to locate the stone center at the mark.
b) Read the depth of the mark by observing the depth caliper on the right of the
image.
c) By getting the depth information of the stone, refer to lithotripsy machine
manuals to perform the lithotripsy.
 The depth of the mark is displayed in the image parameter area of the screen.

13 Recording
NOTE: 1. Strictly observe the procedures described here to perform the recording and
replaying operations; otherwise it may result in data loss or system
malfunction.
2. Set the PAL or NTSC in the setup and this shall be consistent with that in the
DVR.
3. Accidental exposure to strong electromagnetic fields or mishandling of the
video cassette may result in image and data loss, so check if the recording
is successful as soon as possible. Mindray is not responsible for any data
loss.
13.1 DVR
You can use the DVR device to record and replay videos and audios that can be stored in
DVD disc or hard disc. For the detailed operation, please refer to the DVR accompanying
operation manual.
13.1.1 DVR Recording

Recording is to record videos/audios arise from the examination and store them into DVD
or hard disc of the DVR device.
1. Connect the DVR recorder to the ultrasound system and insert an available DVD disc
or make sure there is memory in the hard disc.
2. Enter "[Setup]→[Peripheral Preset]→[Input& Display]", preset the output setting. For
details, please refer to “14.7 Peripheral Preset”.
3. Start the ultrasound exam and acquire images.
 Record: press “begin” recording related keys on the DVR to begin recording.
 Stop: press stop recording related keys on the DVR to stop recording.
13.1.2 DVR Video Replay

You can replay the video and audio record.
1. Connect the DVR recorder to the system and place the media with recorded data.
2. Enter "[Setup]→[Peripheral Preset]→[Input& Display]", preset the input setting.
3. Assign a key as user-defined Video: the setting path is "[Setup]→[System
Preset]→[Key Config]. Please refer to "14.1.7 Key Config" for details. Press the
user-defined key to enter the video replay screen in the ultrasound system.
4. Select the record to be replayed.
 Press the begin replaying related keys on the DVR to begin the replaying.
 Press stop replaying related keys to stop the replaying, and press the
user-defined key Video to exit.
Recording 13-1
14 Setup
The Setup function is designed to set the configuration parameters of operating the
system and maintain user workflow preferences. The setup data of the user and system
are stored to the hard drive, and should be backed up to CD/DVD or USB memory
devices.
When the setup data is changed, be sure to save the
CAUTION: preferences according to the methods described in this
chapter. Mindray is not responsible for the loss of the setup
data.
 To enter Setup:
 Press the <Setup> to enter Setup; or
 On image menu, select [Setup] in the [Other] menu to enter the Setup.
 On “Probe & Exam” selection page, click [Exam Preset] to enter Exam Preset
page.
 To exit Setup:
Select [Return] on the Setup menu or press <ESC> to close the Setup menu with
parameter settings saved.
If you change the system language and click [Return] on the Setup menu or press
<ESC>, the system will automatically restart to make the changing effective.
 Basic operations
The commonly-used setting types are:
 Text box: posit the cursor into the corresponding box; enter the desired value
through keyboard.
 Radio button: click the button to select an item.
 Check box: click the check box to select one or several options.
 Drop-down list: click the arrow beside the list to select an item.
 General buttons
 [OK]: click to confirm the setting, exit the current page and then return to the
previous page.
 [Cancel]: click to give up the setting, exit the current page and then return to the
previous page.
 [Load Factory]: click [Load Factory], and all parameter settings will be restored to
the original factory default.
14.1 System Preset

Click [System Preset] on the Setup menu to open the page:
Page Description
To set the hospital name, language, time zone, time format, system
Region
date/time, logo and so on.
Setup 14-1
Page Description
To set Animal information, exam setup, Animal management, storage,
General
system dormancy, operation log and so on.
Image Preset To set some general parameters in imaging modes.
Meas To set the measure ruler, measure result, units and so on.
Comment To set general information about comment.
Key Config To assign functions to footswitch and <Print>, <Save>, <F1> ~<F6>.
To set the needle-guided bracket model and biopsy guide line relevant
Biopsy
parameters.
Displays the installation of system supported options. You can install or
Option
uninstall the options through the page.
Admin To set the user account control relevant information.
14.1.1 Region
Open the Region page via “[Setup] → [General] → [Region]”.
Items Description
Hospital To set the hospital relevant information like name, address, telephone and
Information so on.
To select a language for the system, the available languages are Chinese,
English, French, German, Italian, Portuguese, Russian, Spanish, Polish,
Language Czech, Turkish, Finnish, Danish, Icelandic, Norwegian, and Swedish.
The system will restart automatically after you change the language.
Time Zone To select the time zone.
Time Format To select the time format between 12 Hour and 24 Hour.
To set the date format among DD/MM/YYYY, MM/DD/YYYY and
Date Format
YYYY/MM/DD.
To set the system date.
System Date Posit the cursor into the corresponding field, and enter the data through
the keyboard; or, click the calendar icon , and then select the date.
Move the cursor onto the corresponding field, enter the time manually
through the keyboard; or, move the cursor onto the time segment and
System Time
press <Set>, then increase or decrease the certain value by rotating the
multifunctional knob or clicking the icons at the right side.
14.1.2 General
Open the General page via “[Setup] → [System Preset] → [General]”, items are
introduced as follows:
14-2 Setup
Region Items Description
To select if to display the following Animal
Info displays in
information on the image banner: Gender, Age,
image banner
Operator, ID, Name, Hospital, and DOB.
Animal Info
H&W Unit To set the unit for Animal height and weight.
Surface Formula To set the surface formula.
Status after exam To set the system status when exam ends among
ends Scan, Register, Worklist.
Exam Setup
Confirmation To set if the system pops up prompts “Do you want
when exam ends to end the current/active exam” when end an exam.
For an anonymous Animal exam, you can save
Save image images without entering any Animal information. If
without Animal you check “Auto generated ID” ([Setup]→[System
info Preset]→ [General]), the system will save the
images using the auto generated ID.
Animal
Management Check the item to generate an ID automatically
Auto generated ID
when begins an exam for a new Animal.
Send/print Image
after print after Select if to automatically archive the exam data.
End Exam
To set the size for a stored image :
640*480.
Image Size
800*600.
1024*768.
Clip length/ Time To set the cine length when no ECG loop is
(s) included. Value: 1~60s.
Clip length/ To set the number of ECG loops in a saved cine.
Storage Beat(heart cycle) Value: 1~16.
JPG Compress To set the compression ratio: H, M, L.
To set the file system type when record data to a
File system type
CD: UDF, ISO.
Prospective Cine To set the cine length for prospective live capture.
Length Value: 1-480s, or 1-120 cycles.
Retrospective To set the cine length for retrospective live capture.
Cine Length Value: 1-120s, or 1-120 cycles.
Select the accompanying image sending
While storing
destination: local default printer; DICOM Storage;
image to hard disk
Image/ clip DICOM Printer.
storage
While Storing Clip Select the accompanying clip sending destination:
to hard disk DICOM Storage.
Enable Screen To enable screen saver function, and select the

Saver waiting time until screen saver.
Screen Saver
To enable the standby function, you can select the
Enable Standby
waiting time for entering standby after screen saver.
Setup 14-3
Enable logging To set if to enable logging the operation log.
Operation Log
Auto Upload To set if to automatically upload the operation log.
Review Play To set if to turn on the review play function.
14.1.3 Image Preset

Open the Image Preset page via “[Setup] → [System Preset] → [Image Preset]”.

Probe To set the default probe model for the system.
Reset
Config Reload Preset Check to set if to reload setup data when begins a new
on New Animal Animal exam.
Freeze Status after
To set the system status after image is frozen.
Config Freeze
To set the steer mode in B+ Color +PW imaging mode.
C& PW: select to adjust the sample volume in color mode
Steer Mode and sample line in PW mode together.
C/ PW: select to adjust the sample volume in color mode
and sample line in PW mode individually.
Image The spectrum can automatically invert when the color flow is
Auto invert steered to a certain angle, thus accommodating operator’s
habit of distinguishing flow direction.
Cine Memory To set the cine memory splitting type: Auto, Split.
iScape Ruler
To set if to display the iScape ruler on iScape imaging mode.
Display
14.1.4 Meas
Open the Meas page via “[Setup] → [System Preset] → [Meas]”. Through the page, you
can set the measure ruler, measure result and unit relevant information. For details,
please refer to the Operator’s Manual [Advanced Volume]
14.1.5 OB
Open the OB page via “[Setup] → [System Preset] → [OB]”. Through the page, you can
set the gestational age formula, fetal growth formula, fetal weight formula and the relevant
information. For details, please refer to the Operator’s Manual [Advanced Volume].
14.1.6 Comment
Open the Comment page via “[Setup] → [System Preset] → [Comment]”. Through the
page, you can set the font size and arrow size for comment.
14-4 Setup
Preset whether to clear the comments when unfreezing the image or change the probe or
the exam.
Preset whether to erase the body mark when the image is unfrozen.
14.1.7 Key Config

Open the page via “[Setup] → [System Preset] → [Key Config]”.
 Key function setting

You can set the functions for <Print>, <Save>, and F-key (F1-F6).
To assign a function to a key:
a) Click to select the desired key in the Key Function column at the left side of
the page.
b) Click to select a function in Function area. You can see the function selected
is displayed at the right side of the selected key.
c) Click [OK] to complete function setting.
The following introduces an example as setting <F4> as “Save AVI Cine to USB disk”:
a) Select F4 in the “Key Function” list at the left side of the page.
b) Select “Save AVI Cine to USB disk” in “Function” at the right side of the page.
c) Click [OK] to complete the setting.
In Function area, the functions of user-defined keys can be divided into five
categories: Output, Print, Advanced Features, Measurement and Other.
 Other Settings
Item Description
Key Lightness To set the lightness for the keys: 0, 1, 2, 3
Key Volume To set the key volume: 0-3, 0 means no sound
To set the trackball speed when move the trackball: Slow,
Trackball Speed
Medium, Fast
Trackball Lightness To set the color for the trackball: A, B, C, D, E, F
14.1.8 Biopsy
Open the Biopsy page via “[Setup] → [System Preset] → [Biopsy]”, as shown in the figure
below.
 Bracket model
To select the default needle-guided bracket for the probe.
(1) Select the probe model in the left-hand list, the matched bracket model will be
shown in the right-hand area.
(2) Select the bracket model in the right-hand list.
(3) Click [OK] to confirm the setting.
 Parameter setting
Guide Line Display: to set if to display the biopsy.
Setup 14-5
Guide Line Dot Type: Small, Medium, Big.
14.1.9 Option
Open the Option page via “[Setup] → [System Preset] → [Option]”.
In Option list, the system lists out all the system supported options and the installation
status (Disabled or Installed).
 Click [Install] to begin the installation of a disabled option.
 Click [Uninstall] to begin the un-installation of an already installed option.
 Trial
Select the option item in the list to see the information on the Comment region on the right.
For functions that are not configured, you can use the function for free for 3 months.
 Click to select the function(s) and click [Trial].
Tips: every trial option can be used only once.
Please contact Mindray Customer Service Department or sales representative for details.
14.1.10 Admin
Open the Admin page via “[Setup] → [System Preset] → [Admin]”.
For details of access control, please refer to “10.9 Administration”.
14.2 Exam Preset

Open “[Setup][Exam Preset]” or click [Exam Preset] in the “Probe & Exam” selection
screen to enter Exam Preset screen.
14.2.1 Exam Selection

After the Exam Preset screen is entered, the screen will display the Exam Selection page.
This page is used to assign an exam type to a specific probe.
1. To select a probe: move the cursor onto the column, and select the probe model
through the drop-down menu.
2. Selecting/delete exam modes
On the right side of the screen, you can view the exam types supported by the current
probe. On the left side, you can view all the exam modes supported by the system,
i.e., Exam Library.
 Select the exam from the Exam Library on the left and click to add it to
the Exam Selected.
 Click to add the exams, which Exam Library has but Exam Selected
doesn’t have, from Exam Library to Exam Selected.
 To delete an exam supported by the current probe, select the exam first, and then
click to delete it.
 Click [Up] and [Down] to adjust the sequence of the items in Selected Items.
 Click [Default] to set a selected exam mode as the default exam mode.
14-6 Setup
3. Click [OK] to confirm the modified setup; or click [Cancel] to cancel the modified
setting.
14.2.2 Exam Configuration

In the Exam Preset screen, click “Exam Config” page tab to enter Exam Config page.
After an exam mode is selected,
 Click a selection in Application list, you can select a new application for the exam
mode in the popped up drop-down list.
 Click [Up] and [Down] to adjust the sequence of the items in Selected Items.
 Click [Rename] to change the name of the user-defined exam mode.[Rename]
 Click [Copy] to copy the parameters of the selected exam mode. Select a second
exam mode and, click [Paste] to paste the copied parameters to the
secondly-selected exam mode.
 Click [Export] to open the screen to store the parameters of the selected exam
modes.
 Click [Load] to open the screen to load the parameters of the exam mode.
 Click [Export All] to open the screen to store the parameters of all exam modes for the
current probe.
 In addition, you can preset measurements, comments, body marks and image
parameters for the exam modes by clicking [Measure Preset], [Comment Preset],
[Body Mark Preset], [Image Preset] respectively.
Tips: loading or pasting exam setup data will overwrite previous presets and can't be
reverted. Exercise caution for this operation.
14.2.3 User-defined Exam Modes

To define exam modes for a probe:
1. Click to select a user-defined item in the [Exam Mode] list in Exam Config page, such
as [User-defined 1].
2. Click a selection in Application list, and select an application for the exam mode in the
popped up drop-down list.
3. Click functional buttons to perform relevant operations:
 Click [Rename] button to open the screen. You can enter a new name to your
preference.
Click [OK] to complete the body mark setting.
14.3 Image Preset

To enter Image Preset screen:
 In the Setup menu, select the [Image Preset] item to enter the image preset
screen.
 Or, Click [Image Preset] button in the Exam Config page ([Setup]→[Exam Preset]
→ Exam Config) to open the Image Preset screen.
Image preset is used to set the image parameters for each imaging mode.
Image parameters can be divided into the following three categories:
Setup 14-7
 Imaging mode relevant parameters.
 Parameters pertinent to both exam mode and probe.
 Other image specific parameters.
For details, please refer to the relevant imaging modes chapters.
14.4 Measure Preset

For measurements details, please refer to the [Advanced Volume].
14.5 Body Mark Preset

In order to accommodate your workflow – numerous preferential settings can be captured
in Body Mark Preset. This function is to preset, body marks in each exam type, or
user-defined body marks.
14.5.1 Preset Body Mark for Exam Mode

1. To enter Body Mark Preset screen:
 In the Setup menu, select [Body Mark Preset] item to enter the Body Mark Preset
screen. Or,
 Click [Body Mark Preset] button in the Exam Config page ([Setup] → [Exam
Preset] → Exam Config) to open the Body Mark Preset screen.
2. Select the body mark applied exam mode: select the exam mode in the drop-down list,
the current exam mode is by default.
3. Set library: enter the library name of custom body marks.
4. Add or delete body mark(s)
 Click to add the item in Available Items on the left into Selected Items
on the right.
 Click to add all items in Available Items on the left into Selected Items
on the right.
 Click to delete the selected item in Selected Items.
 Click to clear the content in Selected Item.
5. Click [Up] and [Down] to adjust the sequence of the items in Selected Items.
6. Preset the probe mark of the selected body mark in Selected Items.
Move the cursor onto the probe mark of the body mark in Probe area and press <Set>
to make the cursor turn green. Roll the trackball to change the position of the probe,
rotate the multifunctional knob to change the angle, and press <Set> to confirm the
orientation of the probe.
7. Select the body mark in Selected Items and click [Default], and then the body mark
will be prior to be displayed.
8. Click [OK] to complete the body mark setting.
14.5.2 User-defined Body Marks

If there is no body mark pictogram from the body mark library, you can create a graphic of
your own.
14-8 Setup
In the Body Mark Preset screen above, click [User-defined] to enter the user-defined body
mark screen.
You can edit, delete, or export a user-defined graphic. In addition, you can create a Body
Mark graphic with a draw tool or add it from loading. The file format is *.Bin.
 Adding new body mark
Click [Add].
 Copy a body mark
a) Select a body mark of a certain application area.
b) Click [Copy] to enter the “Body Mark Preset - Add Picto” screen, thus you can
edit the copied body mark.
 Add new body mark
a) Click [New] to enter the “Body Mark Preset - Add Picto” screen; here you can
draw a body mark to your preference.
Available tools are described as follows:
Brush Eraser
Up/down flip Left/right flip
Zoom in Zoom out
Rotate Drag
b) Check on the screen, move the cursor onto the probe mark and
press <Set>, adjust the position with the trackball and direction with the
multifunctional knob.
Setup 14-9
c) After the drawing of a body mark is completed, click [OK] to save it and exit
the user-defined body mark status.
 Edit/ delete a user-defined body mark
After selecting a user-defined body mark, click the [Edit] button to edit it.
 Delete
After selecting a user-defined body mark, click [Delete] to delete the selected image.
 Load:
Click [Load] to load user-defined body mark from external media.
 Export
Click [Export] to export user-defined body mark to external media.
 Return
Click [Return] to exit the current screen.
14.6 Comment Preset

You can preset the custom comments library for each exam mode to your preference.
14.6.1 Custom Comments

You can preset the custom comments library for each exam mode to your preference. The
comments in the library are provided by the system or user-defined ones. The name of the
library, which can be set, will appear on the first page of the library.
1. To enter Comment Preset:
 In the Setup menu, click [Body Mark Preset] item. Or,
 Click [Comment Preset] in the Exam Config page ([Setup] → [Exam Preset] →
Exam Config).
2. Select exam mode.
3. Enter Library Name: you can enter characters for the library name, or accept the
default name (the same as that for the exam mode).
4. Add user-defined comments: directly enter comment texts, or select comment texts
for the comment library.
 Directly enter comment texts: posit the cursor in the field box above [Add
Comment], enter the text comment through the keyboard, and then click [Add
Comment]. Then the directly-entered comment will be added to the Available
Items and Selected Items.
 Select available items: First select a comment library in the drop-down list beside
“Available Items”, all items will be displayed below “Available Items”.
 Click to add the item in Available Items on the left into Selected
Items on the right.
 Click to add all items in Available Items on the left into Selected
Items on the right.
5. Change position of the selected items: select an item on the right side box and click
[Up], [Down], [Left] or [Right] button to change the position of the item.
6. Withdraw or delete a user-defined comment:
 Withdraw an item (from the library or user-defined) in the Selected Items list:
14-10 Setup
Select an item in Selected Items list, and click to withdraw it to the
Available Items list.
Click to withdraw all items in Selected Items.
 Delete a user-defined item in the Available Items box:
Select a user-defined item in the Available Items box, and click [Delete]. After the
user-defined item in the Available Items box is deleted, the same item in the
Selected Items box on the right will disappear as well.
You can only delete the user-defined items rather than the items in the system
library. After a user-defined item is deleted, it will not be available.
7. After you customize comments, click [OK] to confirm and exit the [Comment Preset]
screen.
14.7 Peripheral Preset

The Peripheral Config screen is used to set up printer and Input& Display.
 Printer setting
The settings of a printer include print service and print driver.
For the printers aforementioned in “2.5 System Configuration”, you do not need to install
them. For printers that need to install the driver, please refer to “3.7 Graph /Text printer 3.8
Video Printer” for details.
NOTE: If you use the user-defined key to print, the user-defined printer type shall be
consistent with that of the default printer.
 Print Service Setting
Setup 14-11
 Add Service: click to begin print service adding.
 Remove Service: click to delete the selected print service.
 Rename Service: click to rename the selected print service.
 Default print service: click to set the selected print service as the default one.
 Property: to preset the property of print services.
Tips: please set the proper page margin, otherwise, only part of the contents can be
printed.
 Printer Driver Setting
Printers listed in the operator’s manual are all supported by the system, no drive
is required.
Click [Print Driver] page to enter printer driver setting screen:
 View the printer name as well as print status.
 You can add printer including network printer.
 Check the printer attribute. The attributes vary with the print services.
14.8 Network Preset

 Please refer to DICOM chapter for details about DICOM setting.
 The Network Storage setup is as follows:
Name Description
Service Name The name of the network service, cannot be empty
Destination
Name of the device, cannot be empty
Device
IP Address IP address of the network service device, cannot be empty
14-12 Setup
Name Description
Ping Press Ping to confirm that a device is connected
User name for entering the shared PC server, which is decided by the
User Name
server
Password for entering the shared PC server, which is decided by the
Password
server
Shared Dir Shared folder directory, cannot be empty
To enter the Net Disk Browse screen to set the shared folder directory.
Browse And if the user name or the password is incorrect, the server cannot be
entered.
Add Click it to add the Network service to the service list.
Cancel Click to cancel parameter setting
Update To save the changed parameters.
Default To set as the default server for network storage
 Add a network service:

1. Set the network server properties as described above.
2. Click [Add] to add the service to the Service list.
3. Select the added service in the service list, you can set it as default or delete it.
 Modify a network service:
1. Select the service to be updated in the service list.
2. You can see properties in the Configure Service area.
3. Modify the parameters and click [Update] to update setting.
Tips: in order to make network storage function normally, setting of the sharing folder of
the PC server in advance is a must, e.g. destination, user name and password should be
confirmed at first.
14.9 Manage Settings

The Manage Settings page is used to import or export the setup data or restore factory
setup data.
14.9.1 Exporting Setup Data

This function is used to write all setup data of the system into a disk for backup. The
format of the data file is .DTA.
Procedures:
1. Select some or all items in the “Export” field on the left side of the “Manage Settings”
screen.
2. Click [Export] to open the [Export Data] screen.
Setup 14-13
3. Select the path to save the data.
4. Select the exported file and type as DTA and click [OK].
14.9.2 Importing Setup Data

This function is used to import the existing setup data to the setup data memory of the
system. The system will reset and operate according to the setup preferences that were
imported.
Procedures:
1. Select an item in the Import field on the right side of the Manage Settings screen.
2. Click Import to open the Load Data screen.
3. Select the imported file and type as DTA.
4. Click [OK], a progress bar will appear and the setup data in DTA format is imported to
the specified path.
5. To restore the factory setup data, click [Restore Factory] on the right side of the
screen.
You can use [Export All], [Import All], or [Load Factory] at the bottom of the screen to
export/import all setup data of the system or restore all factory setup data of the system.
The operating methods are the same as those mentioned above.
14.10 Maintenance
The [Maintenance] function is designed for you to update the system software or other
special functions. If you require these functions, please contact Mindray Customer Service
Department or sales representative.
Through the menu, you can perform net update, remote desktop, system test, log
operation, etc.
14.11 System Information

Click [About] in the Setup menu to enter the system information screen.
This screen displays the system software version and versions of other devices. You
cannot edit the information but only view them. The information varies depending upon the
system configurations and version.
To export the system information, click [Save] in the System Information page, specify the
file name and path, then you can save the information as a .txt file.
14-14 Setup
15 Batteries
1. The batteries have protective mechanism and circuit.
WARNING: DO NOT disassemble or alter the battery.
2. DO NOT short-circuit the batteries by directly
connecting the negative terminals with metal objects.
3. DO NOT heat the battery or discard it in a fire.
4. Keep the batteries away from fire and other heat
sources.
5. DO NOT immerse the batteries in water or allow them to
get wet.
6. DO NOT charge the batteries near a heat source or in
direct sunlight.
7. DO NOT pierce the batteries with a sharp object, hit or
step on them.
8. DO NOT use the batteries mixed with other battery
models.
9. DO NOT put the batteries into a microwave oven or
pressurized container.
10. If the batteries emit an odor or heat, are deformed or
discolored, or in a way appear abnormal during use,
charging or storage, immediately remove them and stop
using them.
15.1 Overview
The battery charges when the system is connected to the AC power supply.
 Generally, if the system is turned off, a completely discharged battery will fully
charge in 2 to 3 hours; or generally a battery has been charged for 2 hours, it can
restore the quality of electric charge to above 95%.
NOTE: It is recommended to charge the batteries when the system is turned off, thus
you can quickly charge the batteries and save time.
When the external power supply is not connected, two lithium-ion batteries will provide the
power.
The model of the chargeable lithium-ion batteries (hereinafter called batteries for short) is
LI23I001A.
Batteries 15-1
NOTE: 1. Only use the specified batteries.
2. If there is only one battery in the system, it cannot supply power and cannot
be charged.
3. Replace both batteries at the same time.
4. Charge the batteries periodically if they have not been used for a long
period of time. Otherwise, the performance of the batteries is degraded.
15.2 Precautions
1. Before using the batteries, carefully read the description in the label on the surface of
the batteries.
2. When you use the batteries at the first time and find that they are dirty or emit an odor,
do not use them.
3. Do not expose the batteries to heat sources or high pressure.
4. Do not leave the batteries in direct sunlight.
5. Store the batteries out of the reach of children.
6. The batteries are designed to be charged only in this system; charge the batteries
only when the ambient temperature is between 0 and 40℃.
7. When the batteries are out of power, please charge them immediately.
8. When the batteries will not be used for 10 days or over, take them out of the system
and store the batteries with caution. DO NOT wrap them with conductive material;
store them in shady, cool and dry place.
9. Do not knock the batteries.
15.3 Installing and Removing the Batteries

Turn off the system and disconnect the adapter from the
WARNING: main unit before installing or removing batteries. DO NOT
install or remove batteries when the system is turned on or
the system is turned off but the adapter is connected with the
system.
The batteries are put in the battery bays under the system bottom. You need two batteries.
You can install or remove them when the system is turned off and the adapter is
disconnected from the main unit.
To install the batteries:
1. Turn off the system, and disconnect the adapter from the main unit.
2. Close the monitor, turn the system upside down and put it on the table.
3. You can see two battery bays at the bottom of the system (Note that the batteries
shall be put in correct direction; if not, the batteries do not fit). Press the batteries
gently until they click. Now the batteries are clocked in the bays.
15-2 Batteries
To remove the batteries:
1. Turn off the system, and disconnect the adapter from the main unit.
2. Close the monitor, turn the system upside down and put it on the table.
3. Push the buckles located between the two bays to unlock the batteries.
4. Take out the batteries from the bays.
15.4 Battery Status Indicator

The battery status indicator is located in the lower right corner of the screen, indicating the
battery capacity.
 ：Indicates the battery capacity is empty.
 ：Indicates the battery capacity is full.

 The battery icons other than the two icons above-mentioned indicate the capacity
is between empty and full.
When the power capacity is not enough, the system will pop up a prompt:
“Warning! Battery is out of power! Please insert the Adapter or system will be shut down in
one minute.” Connect the power adapter to afford normal work.
15.5 One Full Discharge /Charge Cycle

Upon receipt of the system and before first time usage, it is recommended that you
perform one full discharge /charge cycle. If the battery has not been used for over 2
months, you are recommended to perform one full discharge /charge cycle. It is also
recommended that the battery is stored in the shady and cool area with FCC (full current
capacity).
 One Full Discharge / Charge Cycle:
1. Full discharge of the battery to let the system automatically shut down.
2. Charge the system to 100% FCC (full current capacity).
3. Discharge of the system for complete shutdown.
Batteries 15-3
15.6 Checking Battery Performance
The battery performance may be degraded over time, so you need to check the battery
performance periodically. The checking procedures are shown as follows:
1. Stop the ultrasound exam.
2. Connect the system to the AC power supply to charge the batteries until current
capacity is full.
3. Disconnect the system from the AC power supply to power the system by the
batteries until the system automatically shuts down.
4. The powering time of the batteries indicates the battery performance.
If the powering time of the battery is much shorter than that specified, you may replace the
battery or contact the service personnel.
NOTE: The usage life of the battery is 300 charge / discharge cycles. If the battery is
improperly used, its life may be shortened.
15.7 Battery Disposal

You need to dispose of the battery when it is damages or severely degraded.
NOTE: You should observe the local regulations when disposing of the battery.
15-4 Batteries
16 Acoustic Output
This section of the operator’s manual applies to the overall system including the main unit,
probes, accessories and peripherals. This section contains important safety information
for operators of the device, pertaining to acoustic output and how to control Animal
exposure through use of the ALARA (as low as reasonably achievable) principle. Also this
section contains information regarding the acoustic output testing and the real-time output
display.
Read this information carefully before using the system.
16.1 Concerns with Bioeffects

Diagnostic ultrasound is recognized as being safe. In fact, there have been no reports of
injuries to Animals caused by diagnostic ultrasound.
It cannot be stated categorically that ultrasound is 100% safe. Studies have revealed that
ultrasound with extremely high intensity is harmful to body tissues.
Diagnostic ultrasound technology has made a great leap forward during the last several
years. This rapid advance has generated concerns about the potential risk of bioeffects
when new applications or diagnostic technologies become available.
16.2 Prudent Use Statement

Although there are no confirmed biological effects on Animals caused by exposures from
present diagnostic ultrasound instruments, the possibility exists that such biological
effects may be identified in the future. Thus ultrasound should be used in a prudent
manner to provide medical benefit to the Animal. High exposure levels and long exposure
times should be avoided while acquiring necessary clinical information.
16.3 ALARA Principle (As Low As

Reasonably Achievable)
It is required to practice ALARA when using ultrasound energy. Practicing ALARA ensures
that the total energy level is controlled below a low enough level at which bioeffects are
not generated while diagnostic information is being accumulated. The total energy is
controlled by output intensity and total radiation time. The output intensity necessary for
examinations differs depending on the Animal and the clinical case.
Not all examinations can be performed with an extremely low level of acoustic energy.
Controlling the acoustic level at an extremely low level leads to low-quality images or
insufficient Doppler signals, adversely affecting the reliability of the diagnosis. However,
increasing the acoustic power more than necessary does not always contribute to an
increase in quality of information required for diagnosis, rather increasing the risk of
generating bioeffects.
Acoustic Output 16-1

Users must take responsibility for the safety of Animals and utilize ultrasound deliberately.
Deliberate use of ultrasound means that output power of ultrasound must be selected
based on ALARA.
Additional information regarding the concept of ALARA and the possible bioeffects of
Ultrasound is available in a document from the AIUM (American Institute of Ultrasound
Medicine) title “Medical Ultrasound Safety”.
16.4 MI/TI Explanation
16.4.1 Basic Knowledge of MI and TI

The relationship of various ultrasound output parameters (frequency, acoustic pressure
and intensity, etc) to bioeffects is not fully understood presently. It is recognized that two
fundamental mechanisms may induce bioeffects. One is a thermal bioeffect with tissue
absorption of ultrasound, and another one is a mechanical bioeffect based on cavitations.
Thermal Index (TI) gives the relative index of temperature increase by thermal bioeffect,
and Mechanical Index (MI) gives the relative index of mechanical bioeffect. TI and MI
indices reflect instantaneous output conditions, so they DO NOT consider the cumulative
effects of the total examination time. TI and MI models contain practical simplifications to
complex bioeffects interaction. Then the operator should be aware that the actual worst
case temperature rise may be up to several times higher than the displayed TI value.
 MI (Mechanical Index):
The mechanical bioeffects are the result of compression and decompression of insonated
tissues with the formation of micro bubbles that may be referred to as cavitations.
MI is an index that shows the possibility of the cavitations generation based on acoustic
pressure, and the value in which the peak-rarefactional acoustic pressure is divided by the
square root of the frequency. Therefore MI value becomes smaller when the frequency is
higher or the peak-rarefactional acoustic pressure is lower, it becomes difficult to generate
the cavitations.
MI = Pr, 
fawf  CMI
CMI = 1 (MPa / MHz )
For the frequency 1 MHz and the peak-rarefactional acoustic pressure 1 MPa, MI
becomes 1.It is possible to think MI to be one threshold of the cavitations generation.
Especially, it is important to keep MI value to be low when both gases and the soft tissues
exist together, for such as lung exposure in cardiac scanning and bowel gas in abdominal
scanning.
 TI (Thermal Index):
TI is determined by the ratio of the total acoustic power to the acoustic power required
to raise the tissue temperature by 1 degree C. In addition, because the temperature
rises is greatly different according to tissue structures, TI is divided three kinds: TIS
(Soft-tissue Thermal Index), TIB (Bone Thermal Index) and TIC (Cranial-bone
Thermal Index).
 TIS: Thermal index related to soft tissues, such as abdominal and cardiac
applications.
16-2 Acoustic Output

 TIB: Thermal index for applications, such as fetal (second and third trimester) or
neonatal cephalic (through the fontanel), in which the ultrasound beam passes
through soft tissue and a focal region is in the immediate vicinity of bone.
 TIC: Thermal index for applications, such as pediatric and adult cranial
applications, in which the ultrasound beam passes through bone near the beam
entrance into the body.
Although the output power is automatically controlled for the selected applications, high TI
values should be kept to a minimum or avoided in obstetric applications. WFUMB (World
Federation for Ultrasound in Medicine and Biology) guidelines: state that temperature
increase of 4 degree C for 5 min or more should be considered as potentially hazardous to
embryonic and fetal tissue.
The smaller the MI/TI values, the lower the bioeffects.
16.4.2 MI/TI Display

TI and MI values are displayed in the upper part of the screen in real-time. The operator
should monitor these index values during examinations and ensure that exposure time
and output values are maintained at the minimum amounts needed for effective diagnosis.
NOTE: If there is a value of MI or TI exceeds 1.0, you must be careful to practice the
ALARA principle.
The display precision is 0.1.
16.5 Acoustic Power Setting

 Acoustic power adjustment
Click [A. power] in the soft menu or the menu to adjust the acoustic power percentage,
and its value is displayed on the corresponding item as well as at the top of the screen.
The greater the acoustic power percentage, the greater the current acoustic output.
When the image is frozen, the system stops transmitting acoustic power.
 Default setting of acoustic power
Selection of diagnostic applications is the most important factor for controlling ultrasound
output.
The permissible level of intensity of ultrasound differs depending on the region of interest.
For fetal examinations, in particular, much care must be exercised.
In this system, imaging setups can be created using the ultrasound output set by you. At
this time, the default function is disabled. It is the user’s responsibility for any change to
the default settings.
Default choices
Initial power 7% to 100%*

* Definition of 100%: The maximum acoustic power of a transducer determined by the
increase in transducer surface temperature in the selected mode and the acoustic power
restrictions specified by the FDA.

NOTE: This system automatically returns to the settings whenever changes are made to
the values (when you turn on the power, switch between probes, press <End
Exam>, or select Return in the Setup menu).In the factory default settings, the
Acoustic Output is limited below 100%. Following the ALARA restriction, you are
allowed to increase the acoustic power under FDA 510(k) Guidance-Track3
limits and to set it in the image preset screen.
The acoustic output of the system has been measured and calculated in accordance with
IEC60601-2-37, FDA 510(K) GUIDANCE, Acoustic Output Measurement Standard for
Diagnostic Ultrasound Equipment (NEMA UD-2 2004) and the “Standard for Real-Time
Display of Thermal and Mechanical Acoustic Output Indices on Diagnostic Ultrasound
Equipment (AIUM and NEMA UD-3 2004).
Display accuracy of MI is ±18.1%, and TI is ±34.27%.
16.6 Acoustic Power Control

The qualified operator may use the system controls to limit the ultrasound output and to
adjust the quality of the images. There are three categories of system controls relative to
output. They are controls that have direct effect on the output, controls that indirectly
control output and controls that are receiver controls.
 Direct Controls
It is possible to control, if necessary, the acoustic output with the soft menu control on the
control panel. In this case, the maximum value of the acoustic output never exceeds an MI
of 1.9, TI of 6 and an ISPTA.3 of 720 mW/cm2 in any mode of operation.
 Indirect Controls
The controls that indirectly affect output are many imaging parameters. These are
operating modes, frequency, focal point positions, image depth and pulse repetition
frequency (PRF).
The operating mode determines whether the ultrasound beam is scanning or
non-scanning. Thermal bioeffect is closely connected to M mode, Doppler and Color
mode.
Acoustic attenuation of tissue is directly related to transducer frequency.
The focal point is related to active aperture of transducer and beam width.
For the higher PRF (pulse repetition frequency), the more output pulses occur over a
period of time.
 Receiver Controls
The receiver controls (for example, gain, dynamic range, and image post-processing, etc.)
do not affect output. These controls should be used, when possible, to improve the image
quality before using controls that directly or indirectly affect output.
16.7 Acoustic Output
16.7.1 Derated Ultrasonic Output Parameters

In order to determine the relevant Ultrasonic Output Parameters, a method is used which
allows for the comparison of ultrasound systems which operate at different frequencies
and are focused at different depths. This approach, called "derating" or "attenuating",
adjusts the acoustic output as measured in a water tank to account for the effect of

ultrasound propagation through tissue. By convention, a specific average intensity
attenuation value is used, which corresponds to a loss of 0.3 dB/cm/MHz. That is, the
intensity of ultrasound will be reduced by 0.3 dB/MHz for every centimeter of travel from
the transducer. This can be expressed by the following equation:
I atten  I water 10(－0.3 / 10  f c  z )

Where Iatten is the attenuated intensity, Iwater is the intensity measured in a water tank (at
distance z), fc is the center frequency of the ultrasound wave (as measured in water), and
z is the distance from the transducer. The equation for attenuating pressure values is
similar except that the attenuation coefficient is 0.15 dB/cm/MHz, or one-half the intensity
coefficient. The intensity coefficient is double the pressure coefficient because intensity is
proportional to the square of pressure.
Although the attenuation coefficient chosen, 0.3 dB/cm/MHz, is significantly lower than
any specific solid tissue in the body, this value was chosen to account for fetal
examinations. In early trimester ultrasound fetal examinations, there may be a significant
fluid path between the transducer and the fetus, and the attenuation of fluid is very small.
Therefore the attenuation coefficient was lowered to account for this case.
16.7.2 Limits of Acoustic Output

In accordance with the FDA Track 3 requirements, the derating (or attenuated) approach
was incorporated into the FDA Acoustic Output Limits, as listed below. The maximum
acoustic output level from any transducer in any operating mode is expected to fall below
these limits.
FDA Maximum Acoustic Output Limits for Track 3 (Attenuated Values)
Application Ispta.3 Isppa.3 MI

(mW/cm2) (W/cm2)
or
Regions
(except eyes) 720 ≤ 190 ≤ 1.9
16.7.3 Differences between Actual and Displayed MI

and TI
In operation, the system will display to the operator the Acoustic Output Parameters
Thermal Index, TI, or Mechanical Index, MI (or sometimes both parameters
simultaneously). These parameters were developed as general indicators of risk from
either thermal or mechanical action of the ultrasound wave. They serve to indicate to the
operator whether a particular setting of the system increases or decreases the possibility
of Thermal or Mechanical effect. More specifically, they were designed to assist in the
implementation of the ALARA principle. As an operator changes a given system control,
the potential effect of the change in output will be indicated. However, the Thermal Index
is not the same as temperature rise in the body, for several reasons. First of all, in order to
provide a single display index to you, a number of simplifying assumptions had to be
made. The biggest assumption was the use of the attenuating formula described above,
which is much lower than the actual value for most tissues within the body. Scanning
through muscle or organ tissue, for example, will produce much higher attenuation than
0.3 dB/cm/MHz. There were also significant simplifications made for the thermal
properties of tissue. Therefore, scanning through highly perfused tissue, such as the heart

or vasculature, will produce significantly less thermal effect than that suggested by the
Thermal Index.
Similarly, the Mechanical Index was derived to indicate the relative possibility of
mechanical (cavitation) effects. The MI is based on the derated peak-rarefactional
pressure and the center frequency of the ultrasound wave. The actual peak-rarefactional
pressure is affected by the actual attenuation caused by tissue in the path between the
transducer and the focal point. Again, all solid tissues within the body have higher
attenuation than the proscribed 0.3 dB/cm/MHz value, and therefore, the actual
peak-rarefactional pressure will be lower. Further, the actual peak-rarefactional pressure
will change depending upon the region of the body being scanned.
For these reasons, the TI and MI displays should only be used to assist the operator in
implementing ALARA at the time of the Animal examination.
16.8 Measurement Uncertainty

Ispta 32.9 %
Isppa 32.9 %
Center frequency (fc) 2%

Total power (W) 32.9 %
(5.1% for Scan-mode and Combined-mode)
Peak-rarefactional pressure 16.4 %
16.9 References for Acoustic Power and

Safety
1. “Bioeffects and Safety of Diagnostic Ultrasound” issued by AIUM in 1993
2. “Medical Ultrasound Safety” issued by AIUM in 1994
3. "Acoustic Output Measurement Standard for Diagnostic Ultrasound Equipment,
Revision 3" issued by AIUM/NEMA in 2004
4. "Standard for real-time display of thermal and mechanical acoustic output indices on
diagnostic ultrasound equipment, Revision 2" issued by AIUM/NEMA in 2004
5. "Information for Manufacturers Seeking Marketing Clearance of Diagnostic
Ultrasound Systems and Transducers" issued by FDA in 2008.
6. “Medical electrical equipment – Part 2-37: Particular requirements for the safety of
ultrasonic medical diagnostic and monitoring equipment” issued by IEC in 2015.

17 EMC Guidance and
Manufacturer’s Declaration
The system complies with the EMC standard IEC 60601-1-2: 2014.
Intended Environments: HOME HEALTHCARE ENVIRONMENT (except for near active
HF SURGICAL EQUIPMENT and the RF shielded room of an ME SYSTEM for magnetic
resonance imaging).
WARNING: 1. The use of unapproved accessories may diminish system

performance.
2. Use of components, accessories, probes, and cables other
than those specified may result in increased emission or
decreased immunity of system.
3. Operation of system, in the case that the patient
physiological signal is lower than the minimum amplitude or
value specified in the product specifications, results may not
be obtained (results can be obtained when the HR is in the
range of 30-250 bmp or when the QRS wave amplitude is
between 0.5-5 mV.)
4. Use of this equipment adjacent to or stacked with other
equipment should be avoided because it could result in
improper operation. If such use is necessary, this equipment
and the other equipment should be observed to verify that
they are operating normally.
5. Use of accessories, transducers and cables other than those
specified or provided by the manufacturer of this equipment
could result in increased electromagnetic emissions or
decreased electromagnetic immunity of this equipment and
result in improper operation.
6. Portable RF communications equipment (including
peripherals such as antenna cables and external antennas)
should be used no closer than 30 cm (12 inches) to any part
of the system, including cables specified by the
manufacturer. Otherwise, degradation of the performance of
this equipment could result.
NOTE: 1 The system needs special precautions regarding EMC and needs to be
installed and put into service according to the EMC information provided
below.
2 Other devices may interfere with this system even though they meet the
requirements of CISPR.
EMC Guidance and Manufacturer’s Declaration 17-1

3 Preventing conducted RF immunity. Due to technological limitations, the
conducted RF immunity level are limited to 3Vrms level, conducted RF
interference above 3Vrms may cause wrong diagnosis and measurements.
We suggest that you position system further from sources of conducted RF
noise.
4 Portable and mobile RF communications equipment can affects system. See
tables 1, 2, 3, and 4 below.
If the system is operated within the electromagnetic environment listed in Table 2 and
Table 3, the system will remain safe and will provide the following basic performances:
Imaging;
Doppler acoustic spectral displaying;
Taking measurements;
Patient information;
Date/time information.
TABLE 1
GUIDANCE AND MINDRAY DECLARATION—ELECTROMAGNETIC EMISSIONS
The system is intended for use in the electromagnetic environment specified below. The
customer or the user of system should assure that it is used in such an environment.
ELECTROMAGNETIC ENVIROMENT－
EMISSIONS TEST COMPLIANCE
GUIDANCE
The system uses RF energy only for its
internal function. Therefore, its RF
RF emissions emissions are very low and are not likely
Group 1
CISPR 11 to cause any interference in nearby
electronic equipment.
RF emissions
Class B
CISPR 11 The system is suitable for use in all
establishments including domestic
Harmonic Emissions
Class A establishments and those directly
IEC 61000-3-2 connected to the public low-voltage
Voltage Fluctuations/ Flicker power supply network that supplies
Emissions Compliance buildings used for domestic purposes
IEC 61000-3-3
17-2 EMC Guidance and Manufacturer’s Declaration

TABLE 2
GUIDANCE AND MINDRAY DECLARATION—ELECTROMAGNETIC IMMUNITY
IEC 60601 COMPLIANCE ELECTROMAGNETIC
IMMUNITY TEST
TEST LEVEL LEVEL ENVIRONMENT-GUIDANCE
Electrostatic Floors should be wood,
Discharge(ESD) concrete or ceramic tile. If
±8 kV contact; ±8 kV contact; floors are covered with
IEC 61000-4-2
±15 kV air ±15kV air synthetic material, the
relative humidity should be at
least 30%.
Electrical fast ±2 kV for power ±2 kV for power Mains power quality should
Transient / burst supply lines; supply lines; be that of a typical
IEC 61000-4-4 ±1 kV for ±1 kV for commercial or hospital
input/output lines input/output lines environment.
Surge ±1 kV line(s) to Mains power quality should
±1 kV line(s) to
line(s); be that of a typical
IEC 61000-4-5 line(s);
±2 kV line(s) to commercial or hospital
±2 kV line(s) to earth
earth environment.
Voltage dips, 0 % UT; 0,5 cycle 0 % UT; 0,5 cycle Mains power quality should
Short interruptions At 0°, 45°, 90°, At 0°, 45°, 90°, 135°, be that of a typical
and voltage 135°, 180°, 225°, 180°, 225°, 270°and commercial or hospital
variation on power 270°and 315° 315° environment. If you require
supply input continued operation during
voltage 0 % UT; 1 cycle 0 % UT; 1 cycle power mains interruptions, it
IEC 61000-4-11 70% UT for 25/30 70% UT for 25/30 is recommended that our
cycle cycle product be powered from an
at 0° at 0°
uninterruptible power supply
or a battery.
0 % UT; 250/300 0 % UT; 250/300

cycle cycle
Power frequency Power frequency magnetic

(50/60 HZ) fields should be at levels
magnetic field characteristic of a typical
30 A/m 30 A/m
IEC 61000-4-8 location in a typical
commercial or hospital
environment.
NOTE: UT is the A.C. mains voltage prior to application of the test level.

TABLE 3
GUIDANCE AND MINDRAY DECLARATION—ELECTROMAGNETIC IMMUNITY
IMMUNITY IEC 60601 COMPLIANCE ELECTROMAGNETIC
TEST TEST LEVEL LEVEL ENVIRONMENT-GUIDANCE
Portable and mobile RF
3 Vrms 3 Vrms communications equipment
0,15 MHz – 80 0,15 MHz – 80 should be used no closer to any
MHz MHz part of system, including cables,
6 Vrms in ISM and 6 Vrms in ISM than the recommended separation
Conduced RF distance calculated from the
amateur and amateur
IEC 61000-4-6 equation applicable to the
radio bands radio bands
between between frequency of the transmitter.
0,15 MHz and 80 0,15 MHz and 80
Recommended separation
MHz MHz distance
d = 1.2 x P
d = 1.2 x P 80 MHz to 800 MHz

Radiated RF 10 V/m 10 V/m
IEC 61000-4-3 80MHz - 2.7GHz 80MHz - 2.7GHz
d = 2.3 x P 800 MHz to 2.7GHz
Where, P is the maximum output
power rating of the transmitter in
watts (W) according to the
transmitter manufacturer and d is
27 V/m the recommended separation
27 V/m distance in meters (m).
380–390 MHz
Field strengths from fixed RF
Proximity fields 28 V/m transmitters, as determined by an
from RF 430–470 MHz, electromagnetic site survey,
800–960 MHz, 28 V/m should be less than the
wireless 1700–1990 MHz, compliance level in each
communications 2400–2570 MHz
frequency range.
equipment Interference may occur in the
IEC 61000-4-3 9 V/m vicinity of equipment marked with
704–787 MHz, 9 V/m the following symbol:
5100–5800 MHz
Note 1 At 80 MHz and 800 MHz, the higher frequency range applies.
Note 2 These guidelines may not apply in all situations. Electromagnetic propagation is
affected by absorption and reflection from structures, objects and people.
a Field strengths from fixed transmitters, such as base stations for radio (cellular
/cordless) telephones and land mobile radios, amateur radio, AM and FM radio
broadcast and TV broadcast cannot be predicted theoretically with accuracy.
To assess the electromagnetic environment due to fixed RF transmitters, an
electromagnetic site survey should be considered. If the measured field strength in
the location in which system is used exceeds the applicable RF compliance level
above, system should be observed to verify normal operation. If abnormal
performance is observed, additional measures may be necessary, such as reorienting

or relocating the system.
b Over the frequency range 150kHz to 80MHz, field strengths should be less than
3V/m.

TABLE 4
RECOMMENDED SEPARATION DISTANCES BETWEEN PORTABLE AND MOBILE
RF COMMUNICATION DEVICE AND THE SYSTEM
The system is intended for use in an electromagnetic environment in which radiated RF
disturbance are controlled. The customer or the user of system can help prevent
electromagnetic interference by maintaining a minimum distance between portable and
mobile RF communication equipment (transmitters) and system as recommended below,
according to the maximum output power of the communication equipment.
Separation Distance According to Frequency of Transmitter
Rated Maximum
Output power of (m)
Transmitter 150kHz -80MHz 80MHz-800MHz 800MHz-2.7GHz
(W)
d＝1.2√P d＝1.2√P d＝2.3√P
0.01 0.12 0.12 0.23
0.1 0.38 0.38 0.73
1 1.2 1.2 2.3
10 3.8 3.8 7.3
100 12 12 23
For transmitters at a maximum output power not listed above, the recommended
separation distanced in meters (m) can be determined using the equation applicable to
the frequency of the transmitter, where P is the maximum output power rating of the
transmitter in watts (W) according to the transmitter manufacturer.
If system image distortion occurs, it may be necessary to position system further from
sources of conducted RF noise or to install external power source filter to minimize RF
noise to an acceptable level.
Note 1 At 80 MHz and 800 MHz, the separation distance for the higher frequency range
applies.
Note 2 These guidelines may not apply in all situations. Electromagnetic propagation is
affected by absorption and reflection from structures, objects and people.
Cable sample
No. Name Cable length Shield or not Remarks
(m)
1 Power input 2.5m Not shielded /
2 SIP/SOP ＜3.0m Shielding /
3 ECG cable 4.0m Shielding /
4 Probe Cable ＜3.0m Shielding /
5 Footswitch Cable 2.9m Shielding /

18 System Maintenance
Routine system maintenance shall be carried out by the user. System maintenance after
the warranty has expired is the full responsibility of the owner /operator. The responsibility
for maintenance and management of the product after delivery resides with the customer
who has purchased the product.
If you have any questions, please contact Mindray Customer Service Department or sales
representative.
1. Only an authorized Mindray service engineer can
WARNING: perform maintenance not specified in this operator’s
manual.
2. For the sake of the system performance and safety, you
should perform periodical checks for the system.
18.1 Daily Maintenance

You are responsible for daily maintenance.
18.1.1 Cleaning the System

Before cleaning the system, be sure to turn off the power and
WARNING: disconnect the power cord from the outlet. If you clean the
system while the power is “On”, it may result in electric
shock.
Do not spill water or other liquid into the system while you
CAUTION: perform the cleaning. Otherwise it may result in malfunction or
electric shock.
 Cleaning the probe

Please refer to the operator’s manual of the corresponding transducer or “12 Probe
and Biopsy” chapter to perform cleaning and disinfection.
 Cleaning the probe enclosure and connector:
 Tools: mild soapy water , dry soft cloth , soft brush
 Method:
a) Use dry soft cloth to wipe out the dust attached to surface of probe, acoustic
head of the probe, connector and probe cable;
b) Remained stain or dust attached to surface of probe cable or connector
should be washed out by cloth with clear water or soapy water, and then
air-dry the probe cable or connector;
c) Use a soft brush to clean the connector, removing dust simultaneously.
System Maintenance 18-1

Note: DO NOT use cloth with water to clean the connector.
 Cleaning the probe cable
a) Use soft dry cloth to wipe off stains from the probe cable.
b) If it is difficult to clean the stains thoroughly, use soft cloth dipped with mild
detergent, and then let the cable air dry.
 Cleaning the monitor
 Tool: soft dry cloth ,clear water or mild soapy water
 Method:
Surface of display should be cleaned with soft dry cloth. Remained stain should be
washed out by cloth with clear water or soapy water, and then air-dry the surface.
NOTE: 1. Do not use hydrocarbon glass cleaner or cleaner for OA (Office Automation)
equipment to clean the monitor. These substances may cause deterioration
of the monitor.
2. Please clean the control panel periodically, otherwise the button may be
blocked by dirt and the system will be buzzing while the button makes no
response.
 Cleaning the control panel
 Tools: dry soft cloth, mild soapy water
 Method:
Use dry soft cloth to clean the surface of the system. If the system is dirty, moisten the
soft cloth with mild soapy water and wipe off any stains. Use dry soft cloth to remove
any moisture and allow all hard surfaces to completely air-dry. If it is difficult to clean
the control panel, disassemble the keys first and then use mild soapy water to clean it.
 Cleaning cover
 Tools: dry soft cloth, soapy water
 Method:
Use dry soft cloth to clean the cover of the system. If the system is dirty, moisten the
soft cloth with mild soapy water and wipe off any stains, then air-dry.
Note: Be sure to use soft brush to brush the dust attached to all the sockets or
interfaces which can be seen (such as probe sockets, sockets or interfaces in IO
panel and power supply panel),not the cloth with water.
 Cleaning the trackball

 Tools: Paper, dry cloth or mild soapy water
 Method:
For the stable performance of the system, you should perform periodical cleaning for
the trackball. A dumb cursor may be resulted from dirt inside the trackball.
a) Disassembling:
Rotate the trackball clamp ring 35 degrees anticlockwise. When the clamping ring
lifts, remove the clamping ring and trackball. You can draw out the ball with the
help of adhesive tape. See the figures below.
18-2 System Maintenance

Optical trackball
Clamp ring
b) Cleaning:
Clean the lens slightly using the tissue until there is no foreign matter. Then clean
the other parts and the dust excluder. Make sure to exert force properly when
clean the small ball, otherwise, the small ball may drop down. See the figure
below.
No system shutdown is required during the whole clean. Reinstall the ball and
clamp ring after the clean is finished.
Dust excluder
Small ball (3) Lens
Waterspout
When liquid is spray onto the trackball area, most of the liquid can be discharged
through the waterspout, besides, you can dry the leaving water using the tissue
or cloth.
c) Installing
Put back the ball, align the buckle with gap of the front cover, press the clamp ring
with both hands and rotate it 35 degrees clockwise to click the buckle. At this
moment, the clamp ring cannot be moved any further, it indicates that the clamp
ring clicks in position. See the figure below.

Buckle
 Cleaning the peripherals

Do the cleaning maintenance according to your actual peripheral configuration; items
which are not configured can be skipped.
Content Description
First wipe off dust or stain attached to the cover of printer with soft dry
Color and B/W
cloth, then clean the inside of printer. Be sure to do the cleaning
video printer
maintenance according to the operation manual if is necessary.
First wipe off dust or stain attached to the cover of printer with soft dry
Graph / text
cloth, then clean the inside of printer. Be sure to do the cleaning
printer
maintenance according to the operation manual if is necessary.
Use soft dry cloth with a little mild soap water to wipe off the dust or stain
Foot switch
attached to the pedals or cable of foot switch.
18.1.2 Checking the Probe

 Visually check to confirm that there is no crack and expansion to probe head.
 Visually check to confirm that there is no deterioration or desquamation to probe
cable.
 Visually check to confirm that there is no bend, destroyed or falling off pins to the
connector.Checking the Power Cable and Plug

 Visually check to confirm that there is no wrinkles, crack or deterioration; No crack
and expansion to the surface of adapter.
 Manually check to confirm that there is no looseness or rupture. The connection of
plug is reliable.
18.1.4 Checking Appearance

Check if there is any crack in the covers:
 Ultrasound system covers
 Probe appearance
 External appearance of ECG lead
18-4 System Maintenance

18.1.5 Backup of the System Hard Drive
To prevent deterioration or loss of data stored in the system hard drive, create a backup
copy of the hard drive data (including Animal info data, preset data and etc.) at regular
intervals.
18.2 Troubleshooting
If any persistent system malfunction is experienced, e.g. an onscreen error message,
blank imaging screen, absent menus, please refer to the following table below. If the
failure cannot be eliminated, please contact Mindray Customer Service Department or
sales representative.
 Troubleshooting Table
No. Failure Cause Measure
1 After the AC Abnormal power system or Verify that the plug has not
power input is incorrect connection of the become loosened or
connected,, the power cord. dislodged from the back of
AC power the system.
status indicator
does not light
on.
2 When the The interval between turnoff Turn off the system and wait
power indicator and restart is too short – wait a a minimum time of 1 minute,
of the monitor is minimum time of 20 seconds. and then restart the system.
on and image is The monitor brightness or Adjust the monitor brightness
blank. contrast may be improperly set and contrast back to factory
(use <Fn>+ Direction key to defaults.
adjust).
3 The monitor The transmission power, Adjust the transmission
displays the overall gain or TGC controls power, gain or TGC control.
characters but are improperly set. Ensure proper probe
no images. Verify that a probe is connected connection.
and / or fully connected. Unfreeze the image.
The system is in the frozen
status.
4 The image The exam mode is not correct. Select an appropriate exam
quality is The settings of the image post mode.
degraded processing are not correct. Adjust the settings of the
The image presets are image via post processing or
inappropriate reset the post processing to
the default values.
Reset the factory default
setups.
5 The button is There is too much dirt blocking Check the control panel for
responseless the button the button being blocked and
with the system press it several times to
buzzing release it.
Clean the button.

Appendix A Wireless LAN
1. It is prohibited to use the wireless LAN function in
WARNING airplane, as it may violate the relevant provisions in the
aviation regulations.
2． Use the wireless LAN function prudently in the
emergency ambulance (or other vehicles) as other
devices or communication signals may be interfered
with.
3. Be prudent to use the wireless LAN function in OR/ ICU/
CCU as it may interfere with other devices.
4. When wireless LAN function is turned on, the ultrasound
system may be interfered with by other equipment, even
if that other equipment complies with CISPR EMISSION
requirements.
A.1 To Use the W-LAN Function

The system can be configured with wireless net adapter, so as to assist information
communication.
1. Connect the wireless LAN adapter using the USB port.
2. Local TCP/IP setting in preset:
a) Press <Setup> to enter the Setup menu.
b) Move the cursor onto [Network Preset], select [Local TCP/IP] to open the
screen.
c) Local TCP/ IP preset items are described as follows:
Name Description
Station Name Name of the ultrasound system.
Station Location Location or department where the system is placed.
Current Net Adapter To select net adapter type.
If “DHCP” is selected, IP address will be automatically obtained
DHCP/ Static from DNS server; if “Static” is selected (using static IP address),
you need to enter the IP address.
IP Address IP address of the system.
Subnet Mask Used to set different network segment.
Gateway Used to set the gateway IP.
OK Click to confirm parameter setting.
Cancel Click to cancel parameter preset.
The IP address of the system should not be occupied by other devices in the LAN, or
failure may result.
Wireless LAN A-1

NOTE DO Not edit IP address in Network Preset page as the network task is executed,
otherwise it fails. View if there is any undergoing task in task manager of the
system.
3. Click the wireless LAN manager icon in the lower right corner of the toolbar
region, and the manager dialogue box pops up:
 [Connect]: select the target network and click to connect, and the manager icon
turns after connected.
 [Disconnect]: select the target network and click to disconnect.
 [Refresh]: click to update the wireless network list.
 [Configure]: click to enter the “Local TCP/IP Setting” screen.
 [Show Detail]: click to view the connection information of the wireless network,
and select [Export] in the prompted dialogue box to save the information.
 [Set Preferred Network]: click to set the selected network to be a default
connecting network, and the system will automatically connect to this network
after detecting it.
 [Delete Profile]: click to delete the preferred network setting and password that
has been entered.
NOTE: 1. When connecting an encrypted network, entered password will be
remembered.
2. When there is more than one wireless router in the LAN, DO NOT disable
the DHCP function of the current router.
3. If error password has been entered when connecting an encrypted network,
click [Delete Profile] and reconnect the network.
Tips: if abnormal network performance is detected, e.g. wireless network list is not
updated in time; you may take the following measures:
1. Connect/disconnect the network adapter again.
2. Restart the router and ultrasound system if the problem is not fixed.
3. Restart the router again and wait for 5-10 min and reconnect the network again if the
problem is not fixed.
A-2 Wireless LAN

Appendix B To Use the Lock
 To lock the machine

1. Turn the dials to be the correct combination password you have set (the initial
password is “0000”).
2. Press and hold the push-to-lock button to insert the locking tips into the locking slot of
the ultrasound system (as shown in the following figure).
3. Release the button and scramble the dials.

 To change the password
1. Use a strong needle or pen to turn the reset button 90°clockwise and hold.
2. Turn the dials to the new combination password.
3. Turn the reset button 90°anticlockwise to change the password to the current one.
For details about the lock, please refer to the accompanying manual of the lock.
To Use the Lock B-1

Appendix C Barcode Reader
The product supports two kinds of readers for logging data as patient ID: 1-D barcode
reader (SYMBOL LS2208) and 2-D barcode reader (SYMBOL DS4308).
The laser transmitted by SYMBOL LS2208 is Class 2 laser.
SYMBOL DS4308 is classified as “EXEMPT RISK GROUP” according to IEC 62471:2006
and EN 62471:2008.
WARNING: Class 2 laser adopts low power, visible LED.

DO NOT stare into beam because of unknown
hazards of transient radiation provided by
class 2 laser.
DO NOT stare into beam emitted by SYMBOL
DS4308 for more than 10s.
CAUTION: Ensure the information acquired by barcode

reader is consistent with the actual
information.
Note: the reader does not support decoding of Multilanguage.
C.1 1-D Barcode Reader

There are 2 operation modes:
Hand-held mode: press the trigger to decode.
Hands-free mode: seat the reader in the stand to enter the mode, the reader decodes
automatically.
Barcode Reader B-1

C.1.1 Overview
1. LED Green: A barcode was successfully decoded.

Red: A data transmission error or reader malfunction occurred.
2. Scan window Scan the barcode.
3. Trigger Press to decode
C.1.2 Setting up the Reader (Take LS2208 as an

example)
1. Plug the interface cable modular connector into the cable interface port on the bottom
of the reader handle, and ensure the connector is properly secured.
2. Connect the other end of the interface cable to the host.
1. Cable interface port
2. Interface cable modular connector
B-2 Barcode Reader

C.1.3 Setting
The reader has factory settings; please refer to A.4 for details.
The reader supports some user-defined functions as introduced below.
For more details, please contact the SYMBOL reader agents or Mindray Customer
Service Department.
 Volume setting:
Scan the following barcode to set the volume parameter.
 code 93 and codebar scanning:

To enable or disable Code 93, scan the appropriate barcode below.
To enable Codebar, scan the appropriate barcode below.
 code 39 full ASCII scanning:

Code 39 Full ASCII is a variant of Code 39 which pairs characters to encode the full ASCII
character set. To enable or disable Code 39 Full ASCII, scan the appropriate barcode
below.
 I 2 of 5 symbols setting:
Select this option to decode only I 2 of 5 symbols containing a selected length. Select the
length using the numeric barcodes below. For example, to decode only I 2 of 5 symbols
with 8 characters, scan I 2 of 5 - One Discrete Length, then scan 0 followed by 8.
Barcode Reader B-3

C.1.4 Scanning in Hand-Held Mode
1. Ensure all connections are secure.
2. Aim the reader at the barcode. Press the trigger.
Note: Ensure the scan line crosses every bar and space of the symbol, see the figure
below.
3. Upon successful decode, the reader beeps and the LED turns green.
B-4 Barcode Reader

Tips: Do not hold the reader directly over the barcode. Laser light reflecting directly back
into the reader from the barcode is known as specular reflection. This specular reflection
can make decoding difficult. You
achieve a successful decode
Barcode Reader B-5

C.1.5 Scanning in Hands-Free Mode
C.1.5.1 Assembling the Intellistand
NOTE Before tightening the wingnut under the base, ensure that the flat areas on the
flexible neck fit securely in the grooves in the base.
C.1.5.2 Mounting the Stand (optional)

You can attach the base of the reader’s stand to a flat surface using two screws or
double-sided tape (not provided).
 Screw Mount
1. Position the assembled base on a flat surface.
2. Screw one #10 wood screw into each screw-mount hole until the base of the stand is
secure
B-6 Barcode Reader

 Tape Mount
1. Peel the paper liner off one side of each piece of tape and place the sticky surface
over each of the three rectangular tape holders.
2. Peel the paper liner off the exposed sides of each piece of tape and press the stand
on a flat surface until it is secure.
C.1.5.3 Scanning in Hands-Free Mode

When the reader is seated in the stand’s “cup”, the reader’s built-in sensor places the
reader in hands-free mode. When you remove the reader from the stand it operates in its
normal hand-held mode.
C.2 2-D Barcode Reader (Take DS4308 as

an example)
The 2-D barcode reader supports hand-held operation mode.
Hand-held mode: press the trigger to decode.
Barcode Reader B-7

C.2.1 Overview
1. LED Green: A barcode was successfully decoded.

Red: A data transmission error or reader malfunction occurred.
2. Scan window Scan the barcode.
3. Trigger Press to decode
C.2.2 Setting Up the Digital Imager Reader
C.2.2.1 Installing the Interface Cable

1. Plug the interface cable modular connector into the cable interface port on the bottom
of the reader handle and ensure the connector is properly secure.
2. Connect the other end of the interface cable to the host.
B-8 Barcode Reader

C.2.2.2 Removing the Interface Cable
1. Using the tip of a screwdriver or some other tools with a sharp head, depress the
cable’s modular connector clip.
2. Carefully slide out the cable.
C.2.3 Setting
The reader has factory settings; please refer to A.4 for details.
The reader supports some user-defined functions as introduced below.
For more details, please contact the SYMBOL reader agents or Mindray Customer
Service Department.
Volume setting:
Scan the following barcode to set the volume parameter.
code 93 and codabar setting

To enable Code 93, scan the appropriate barcode below.
To enable Codabar, scan the appropriate barcode below.
Barcode Reader B-9

code 39 full ASCII setting
Code 39 Full ASCII is a variant of Code 39 which pairs characters to encode the full ASCII
character set. To enable or disable Code 39 Full ASCII, scan the appropriate barcode
below.
I 2 of 5 symbols setting
Select this option to decode only I 2 of 5 symbols containing a selected length. Select the
length using the numeric barcodes below. For example, to decode only I 2 of 5 symbols
with 8 characters, scan I 2 of 5 - One Discrete Length, then scan 0 followed by 8.
B-10 Barcode Reader

C.2.4 Scanning in Hand-Held Mode
1. Ensure all connections are secure (see the appropriate host chapter.)
2. Aim the digital imager reader at the barcode.
3. When the digital imager reader senses movement, in its default Auto Aim trigger
mode, it projects a red LED dot which allows positioning the barcode within the field of
view.
If necessary, the digital imager reader turns on its red LEDs to illuminate the target
barcode.
4. Center the symbol. Be sure the entire symbol is within the rectangular area formed by
the illumination LEDs.
5. Hold the trigger until the digital imager reader beeps, indicating the barcode is
successfully decoded.
NOTE: Steps 2 - 4 may be required to repeat on poor quality or difficult barcodes.
The aiming pattern is smaller when the digital imager reader is closer to the symbol
and larger when it is farther from the symbol. Scan symbols with smaller bars or
Barcode Reader B-11

elements (mil size) closer to the digital imager reader, and those with larger bars or
elements (mil size) farther from the digital imager reader.
The digital imager reader can also read a barcode presented within the aiming dot not
centered. The top examples in show acceptable aiming options, while the bottom
examples cannot be decoded.
C.3 Setting in Ultrasound System

2. Select [System Preset]- “General”, if “Scan Code” tab is invisible, click .

Setting items are described as follows:
Bar Code Reader Select type: 1D or 2D.
Select the mode for inputting patient data.
Only Patient ID: only patient ID is acquired from barcode reader. If
Input Patient this function is selected, patient ID can be acquired via barcode
Data mode reading in Patient, Worklist or QR screen.
Combination Item: patient ID, patient name and other information can
be acquired from barcode.(available only in 2-D reader)
When 2-D reader is adopted, you should first scan a sample barcode
Barcode Data
here and then set the parts definition for the information.
Patient ID Set the start and end position of each item.
Patient Name Note:
Age 1. Length of birth month and data are of 2 letters.
Birth 2. If one item of information is not included in the barcode, set the
Gender start and end position of the item to be 0 respectively.
C.4 Parameter Defaults

Refer to the following table for parameter defaults of LS2208 and DS4308.
B-12 Barcode Reader

Parameter Defaults
1-D Symbologies
UPC/EAN
UPC-A Enable
UPC-E Enable
UPC-E1 Disable
EAN-8/JAN 8 Enable
EAN-13/JAN 13 Enable
Bookland EAN Disable
Decode UPC/EAN/JAN Supplementals (2and 5 digits) Ignore
UPC/EAN/JAN Supplemental Redundancy 10
Transmit UPC-A Check Digit Enable
Transmit UPC-E Check Digit Enable
Transmit UPC-E1 Check Digit Enable
UPC-A Preamble System Character
UPC-E Preamble System Character
UPC-E1 Preamble System Character
Convert UPC-E to A Disable
Convert UPC-E1 to A Disable
EAN-8/JAN-8 Extend Disable
UCC Coupon Extended Code Disable
Code 128
Code 128 Enable
UCC/EAN-128 Enable
ISBT 128 Enable
Code 39
Code 39 Enable
Trioptic Code 39 Disable
Convert Code 39 to Code 32 (Italian Pharmacy Code) Disable
Code 32 Prefix Disable
Set Length(s) for Code 39 2 to 55
Code 39 Check Digit Verification Disable
Transmit Code 39 Check Digit Disable
Code 39 Full ASCII Conversion Disable
Buffer Code 39 Disable
Code 93
Code 93 Enable
Set Length(s) for Code 93 4 to 55
Interleaved 2 of 5 (ITF)
Interleaved 2 of 5 (ITF) Enable Enable
Set Lengths for I 2 of 5 14
I 2 of 5 Check Digit Verification Disable
Transmit I 2 of 5 Check Digit Disable
Convert I 2 of 5 to EAN 13 Disable
Codabar (NW - 7)
Codabar Enable
Set Lengths for Codabar 5 to 55
CLSI Editing Disable
NOTIS Editing Disable
2-D Symbologies
PDF417 Enable
MicroPDF417 Disable
Code 128 Emulation Disable
Data Matrix Enable
Maxicode Enable
QR Code Enable
Barcode Reader B-13

C.5 Maintenance
Cleaning the exit window is the only maintenance required. A dirty window can affect
scanning accuracy.
 Do not allow any abrasive material to touch the window.
 Remove any dirt particles with a damp cloth.
 Wipe the window using a tissue moistened with ammonia/water.
 Do not spray water or other cleaning liquids directly into the window.
B-14 Barcode Reader

Appendix D Electrical Safety
Inspection
The following electrical safety tests are recommended as part of a comprehensive
preventive maintenance program. They are a proven means of detecting abnormalities
that, if undetected, could prove dangerous to either the Animal or the operator. Additional
tests may be required according to local regulations.
All tests can be performed using commercially available safety analyzer test equipment.
These procedures assume the use of a 601PROXL International Safety Analyzer or
equivalent safety analyzer. Other popular testers complying with IEC 60601-1 used in
Europe such as Fluke, Metron, or Gerb may require modifications to the procedure.
Follow the instructions of the analyzer manufacturer.
The electrical safety inspection should be periodically performed every two years.
The safety analyzer also proves to be an excellent troubleshooting tool to detect
abnormalities of line voltage and grounding, as well as total current loads.
D.1 Power Cord Plug
D.1.1 The Power Plug

Test Item Acceptance Criteria
The power plug pins No broken or bent pin. No discolored pins.
The plug body No physical damage to the plug body.
The power plug No physical damage to the strain relief. No
The strain relief
plug warmth for device in use.
The power plug No loose connections.
No physical damage to the cord. No
deterioration to the cord.
For devices with detachable power cords,
The power cord
inspect the connection at the device.
For devices with non-detachable power
cords, inspect the strain relief at the device.
Electrical Safety Inspection D-1

D.2 Device Enclosure and Accessories
D.2.1 Visual Inspection

No physical damage to the enclosure and
accessories.
No physical damage to meters, switches,
connectors, etc.
The enclosure and accessories
No residue of fluid spillage (e.g., water,
coffee, chemicals, etc.).
No loose or missing parts (e.g., knobs,
dials, terminals, etc.).
D.2.2 Contextual Inspection

No unusual noises (e.g., a rattle inside the
case).
The enclosure and accessories No unusual smells (e.g., burning or smoky
smells, particularly from ventilation holes).
No taped notes that may suggest device
deficiencies or operator concerns.
D.3 Device Labeling

Check the labels provided by the manufacturer or the healthcare facility are present and
legible.
 Main unit label
 Integrated warning labels
D.4 Protective Earth Resistance

a. Plug the probes of the analyzer into the device’s protective earth terminal and
protective earth terminal of the AC power cord.
b. Test the earth resistance with a current of 25 A.
c. Verify the resistance is less than limits.
 LIMITS
ALL COUNTRIES R = 0.2 Ω Maximum
D-2 Electrical Safety Inspection

D.5 Earth Leakage Test
Run an Earth Leakage test on the device being tested before performing any other
leakage tests.
The following outlet conditions apply when performing the Earth Leakage test.
 normal polarity( Normal Condition);
 reverse polarity( Normal Condition);
 normal polarity with open neutral(Single Fault Condition);
 reverse polarity with open neutral(Single Fault Condition).
 LIMITS
For UL60601-1,
 300 μA in Normal Condition.
 1000 μA in Single Fault Condition.
For IEC60601-1,
 500 μA in Normal Condition.
D.6 Enclosure Leakage Test

The following outlet conditions apply when performing the Enclosure Leakage test.
 reverse polarity with open neutral(Single Fault Condition);
 normal polarity with open earth(Single Fault Condition);
 reverse polarity with open earth(Single Fault Condition).
 LIMITS
For UL60601-1,
 100μA in Normal Condition.
For IEC60601-1:
D.7 Animal Leakage Current

Animal leakage currents are measured between a selected applied part and mains earth.
All measurements have a true RMS only.
The following outlet conditions apply when performing the Animal Leakage Current test.
 reverse polarity( Normal Condition),
 reverse polarity with open neutral(Single Fault Condition).
Electrical Safety Inspection D-3

 LIMITS
For BF applied parts,

 500μA in Single Fault Condition.
D.8 Mains on Applied Part Leakage

The Mains on Applied Part test applies a test voltage, which is 110% of the mains voltage,
through a limiting resistance, to selected applied part terminals. Current measurements
are then taken between the selected applied part and earth. Measurements are taken
with the test voltage (110% of mains) to applied parts in the normal and reverse polarity
conditions.
The following outlet conditions apply when performing the Mains on Applied Part test.
 Normal Polarity;
 Reversed Polarity.
 LIMITS
 For BF applied parts: 5000 μA.
D.9 Animal Auxiliary Current

Animal Auxiliary currents are measured between any selected Applied Part connector and
the remaining Applied Part connectors. All measurements may have a true RMS only
response.
The following outlet conditions apply when performing the Animal Auxiliary Current test.
 reverse polarity with open neutral(Single Fault Condition);
 LIMITS
For BF applied parts,

 500μA in Single Fault Condition.
Note: Make sure the safety analyzer is authorized comply with requirement of
IEC61010-1.
Follow the instructions of the analyzer manufacturer.
D-4 Electrical Safety Inspection

P/N: 046-011711-02 (1.0)

H 046 011711 02 M6Vet Operators Manual 1.0

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

H 046 011711 02 M6Vet Operators Manual 1.0

Uploaded by

Document Information

Original Title

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

H 046 011711 02 M6Vet Operators Manual 1.0

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

M6Vet

Diagnostic Ultrasound System

1 Safety Precautions.................................................................................................... 1-1

2 System Overview ...................................................................................................... 2-1

3 System Preparation .................................................................................................. 3-1

4 Exam Preparation ..................................................................................................... 4-1

5 Image Optimization ................................................................................................... 5-1

6 Display & Cine Review.............................................................................................. 6-1

7 ECG ............................................................................................................................ 7-1

9 Comments and Body Marks ..................................................................................... 9-1

10 Animal Data Management ...................................................................................... 10-1

12 Probes and Biopsy ................................................................................................. 12-1

13 Recording ................................................................................................................ 13-1

15 Batteries .................................................................................................................. 15-1

16 Acoustic Output ...................................................................................................... 16-1

17 EMC Guidance and Manufacturer’s Declaration ................................................... 17-1

Appendix A Wireless LAN ........................................................................................A-1

Intellectual Property Statement

Release, amendment, reproduction, distribution, rental, adaptation, translation or any

This warranty shall not extend to:

Manufacturer: Shenzhen Mindray Bio-Medical Electronics Co., Ltd.

EC-Representative: Shanghai International Holding Corp. GmbH(Europe)

About This Manual

Software Interfaces in this Manual

1.1 Safety Classification

Safety Precautions 1-1

1.3 Meaning of Safety Symbols

General warning sign.

Patient/user infection due to contaminated equipment. Be careful when

Patient injury or tissue damage from ultrasound radiation. It is required to

1-2 Safety Precautions

1. Do connect the adapter power plug of this system and

Safety Precautions 1-3

1-4 Safety Precautions

1. Precautions concerning clinical examination

Safety Precautions 1-5

1-6 Safety Precautions

Safety Precautions 1-7

When using the probe, wear sterile gloves to prevent

1-8 Safety Precautions

Safety Precautions 1-9

NOTE: 1. The following definition of the WEEE label applies to EU

1.5 Latex Alert

1-10 Safety Precautions

hazards. The symbol on the warning labels indicates safety precautions.

Read this information carefully before using

The following labels are available

Safety Precautions 1-11

2.1 Intended Use

2.3 Product and Model Code

System Overview 2-1

2.4.1 Power supply

NOTE: The CE region applied voltage is 220-240V～.

2.4.2 Environmental Conditions

Do not use this system in the conditions other than those

2.4.3 External Dimensions and Weight

2.5 System Configuration

2.5.1 Standard Configuration

2.5.2.1 Probes and Needle-guided Brackets Available